Am Reb670

Application manual
Busbar protection IED

REB 670
Innovation
from
ABB
Document ID: 1MRK505181-UEN

Issued: December 2007
Revision: B
IED product version: 1.1
Copyright 2007 ABB. All rights reserved
COPYRIGHT
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT
THAT A PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL
PROPRIETARY RIGHT IS REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, IN
PARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DISSEMINATION TO THIRD
PARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED.
THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. HOWEVER, IN
CASE ANY ERRORS ARE DETECTED, THE READER IS KINDLY
REQUESTED TO NOTIFY THE MANUFACTURER AT THE ADDRESS
BELOW.
THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR
THE CONCEPT OR PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BE
DEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT OF GUARANTEED PROPERTIES. IN
THE INTEREST OF OUR CUSTOMERS, WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TO
ENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED TO THE LATEST
TECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS. AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THAT
THERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE HW/SW
PRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT.
Manufacturer:
ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Vsters
Sweden
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00
Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18
www.abb.com/substationautomation
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1
Introduction.......................................................................9
Introduction to the application manual................................................9
About the complete set of manuals for an IED..............................9
About the application manual......................................................10
Intended audience.......................................................................10
Related documents......................................................................11
Revision notes.............................................................................11
Section 2
Engineering of the IED...................................................13

Introduction.......................................................................................13
The interface between Signal matrix and Configuration tool.......14
The configurable LEDs...........................................................15
The analog preprocessing function block (SMAI)...................16
Configuration alternatives.................................................................18
Adapting a configuration to satisfy special needs.............................19
Signal Matrix Tool (SMT).............................................................19
Application configuration tool CAP 531.......................................21
Preparing a specific application configuration of the IED.................21
Configuring an IED with CAP531................................................21
Using the Signal monitoring tool (SMT).......................................24
Using the Event viewer tool.........................................................24
Setting of the IED.............................................................................24
Authorization.....................................................................................25
Authorization handling in the tool................................................26
Authorization handling in the IED................................................32
Blocking of setting after commissioning of the IED..........................32
How to use the configurable logics blocks........................................33
Some application ideas....................................................................34
Voltage selection.........................................................................34
Automatic opening of a transformer disconnector and closing
the ring breakers..........................................................................35
Automatic load transfer from bus A to bus B...............................35
Testing of the IED.............................................................................36
Engineering checklist........................................................................37
How to use the IED in conjunction with PCM 600 toolbox...........37
Section 3
Requirements.................................................................39
Current transformer requirements....................................................39
Current transformer classification................................................39
Conditions....................................................................................40
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
Table of contents
Fault current................................................................................41
Secondary wire resistance and additional load...........................41
General current transformer requirements..................................41
Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements........................42
Busbar protection...................................................................42
Breaker failure protection.......................................................43
Non-directional instantaneous and definitive time, phase
and residual overcurrent protection........................................44
Non-directional inverse time delayed phase and residual
overcurrent protection............................................................44
Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other
standards.....................................................................................45
Current transformers according to IEC 60044-1,
class P, PR.............................................................................45
Current transformers according to IEC 60044-1, class PX,
IEC 60044-6, class TPS
(and old British Standard, class X).........................................46
Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE.......................46
SNTP server requirements...............................................................47
Section 4
IED application...............................................................49
General IED application....................................................................49
Analog inputs....................................................................................51
Application...................................................................................51
Setting guidelines........................................................................52
Setting of the phase reference channel..................................52
Setting parameters......................................................................76
Local human-machine interface.......................................................78
Human machine interface............................................................78
LHMI related functions.................................................................81
Introduction.............................................................................81
General setting parameters....................................................81
Indication LEDs...........................................................................82
Introduction.............................................................................82
Setting parameters.................................................................82
Basic IED functions..........................................................................84
Self supervision with internal event list........................................84
Application..............................................................................84
Time synchronization...................................................................85
Application..............................................................................85
Setting guidelines...................................................................86
Parameter setting groups............................................................90
Application manual
REB 670
Table of contents
Application..............................................................................90
Test mode functionality................................................................91
Application..............................................................................91
IED identifiers..............................................................................92
Application..............................................................................92
Rated system frequency (RFR)...................................................93
Application..............................................................................93
Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI).........................................93
Application..............................................................................93
Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO).....................................94
Application..............................................................................94
Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI).............................................94
Application..............................................................................94
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)........................................95
Application..............................................................................95
Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph).......................................100
Application............................................................................100
Setting guidelines.................................................................100
Setting parameters...............................................................101
Authority status (AUTS).............................................................101
Application............................................................................101
Goose binary receive.................................................................102
Differential protection......................................................................102
Busbar differential protection (PDIF, 87B).................................102
Basic applications.................................................................103
Busbar protection applications.............................................103
REB 670
Application manual
Table of contents
Different busbar arrangements.............................................126

Summation principle.............................................................144
Current protection...........................................................................163
Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)...........163
Application............................................................................163
Four step single phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51)......174
Application............................................................................174
Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)...................................188
Application............................................................................188
Breaker failure protection, single phase version (RBRF,
50BF).........................................................................................192
Application............................................................................192
Control............................................................................................195
Autorecloser (RREC, 79)...........................................................195
Application............................................................................195
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
presentation (SLGGIO)..............................................................219
Application............................................................................219
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO).................................................220
Application............................................................................221
Generic double point function block (DPGGIO).........................222
Application............................................................................222
Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO)..................222
Application............................................................................223
Logic...............................................................................................224
Application manual
REB 670
Table of contents
Configurable logic blocks (LLD).................................................224

Application............................................................................224
Fixed signal function block (FIXD).............................................226
Application............................................................................226
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I.....................................226
Application............................................................................227
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node
representation (B16IGGIO).......................................................227
Application............................................................................227
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)...................................227
Application............................................................................228
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node
representation (IB16GGIO).......................................................228
Application............................................................................228
Monitoring.......................................................................................229
Measurements (MMXU)............................................................229
Application............................................................................230
Event counter (GGIO)................................................................254
Application............................................................................254
Event function (EV)....................................................................254
Application............................................................................255
Measured value expander block................................................258
Application............................................................................258
Disturbance report (RDRE).......................................................258
Application............................................................................259
Event list (RDRE)......................................................................276
Application............................................................................276
Indications (RDRE)....................................................................277
REB 670
Application manual
Table of contents
Application............................................................................277
Event recorder (RDRE).............................................................278
Application............................................................................278
Trip value recorder (RDRE).......................................................278
Application............................................................................278
Disturbance recorder (RDRE)...................................................279
Application............................................................................279
Section 5
Station communication.................................................281
Overview.........................................................................................281
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.........................................281
Application IEC 61850-8-1.........................................................281
Setting guidelines......................................................................283
Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)..........................283
Application............................................................................283
Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)................283
Application............................................................................283
Setting parameters....................................................................284
LON communication protocol.........................................................285
Application.................................................................................285
SPA communication protocol.........................................................287
Application.................................................................................287
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................290
Application.................................................................................290
Automation bits (AUBI)...................................................................300
Application.................................................................................300
Single command, 16 signals (CD)..................................................315
Application.................................................................................315
Application manual
REB 670
Table of contents
Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT).......................318

Application.................................................................................318
Settings................................................................................318
Section 6
Remote communication................................................321
Binary signal transfer to remote end...............................................321
Application.................................................................................321
Communication hardware solutions.....................................322
Application possibility with one-phase REB 670..................323
Section 7
Configuration................................................................329
Introduction.....................................................................................329
Description of configuration REB 670.............................................329
Description of 3 ph variant A20.................................................329
Description of 3 ph variant A31.................................................329
Description of 1 ph variants B20 and B21.................................329
Description of 1 ph variant B31.................................................330
Available configurations for pre-configured REB 670................330
Configuration #1 Called X01......................................................330
Section 8
Glossary.......................................................................333
Glossary.........................................................................................333
REB 670
Application manual
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
About this chapter
This chapter introduces the user to the manual as such.
1.1
Introduction to the application manual
1.1.1
About the complete set of manuals for an IED

The users manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:
Application
manual
Technical
reference
manual
Installation and
commissioning
manual
Operators
manual
Engineering
guide
en06000097.vsd
The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelines

and setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual should be used to
find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function could be used. The
manual should also be used when calculating settings.
The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionality
descriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals,
setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical reference
manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how
to install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as a
reference during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and
electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and
configuration as well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. The
chapters are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section
numbers) in which the protection IED should be installed and commissioned.
The Operators Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection
IED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operators manual
can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and
measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault.
REB 670
Application manual
Section 1
Introduction
The IED 670 Engineering guide (EG) contains instructions on how to engineer the
IED 670 products. The manual guides to use the different tool components for IED
670 engineering. It also guides how to handle the tool component available to read
disturbance files from the IEDs on the basis of the IEC 61850 definitions. The third
part is an introduction about the diagnostic tool components available for IED 670
products and the PCM 600 tool.
The IEC 61850 Station Engineering guide contains descriptions of IEC 61850
station engineering and process signal routing. The manual presents the PCM 600
and CCT tool used for station engineering. It describes the IEC 61850 attribute editor
and how to set up projects and communication.
1.1.2
About the application manual

The application manual contains the following chapters:
1.1.3
The chapter Engineering of the IED describes the overall procedure regarding
the engineering process of an IED.
The chapter Requirements describes current and voltage transformer
requirements.
The chapter IED application describes the use of the included software
functions in the IED. The chapter discuss application possibilities and gives
guidelines for calculating settings for a particular application.
The chapter Station communication describes the communication possibilities
in a SA-system.
The chapter Remote communication describes the remote end data
communication possibilities through binary signal transferring.
The chapter Configuration describes the preconfiguration of the IED and its
complements.
The chapter Glossary is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in
ABB technical documentation.
Intended audience
General
The application manual is addressing the system engineer/technical responsible who
is responsible for specifying the application of the IED.
Requirements
The system engineer/technical responsible must have a good knowledge about
protection systems, protection equipment, protection functions and the configured
functional logics in the protection.
10
Application manual
REB 670
Section 1
Introduction
1.1.4
Related documents
Documents related to REB 670
Identity number
Operators manual
1MRK 505 179-UEN
Installation and commissioning manual
1MRK 505 180-UEN
Technical reference manual
1MRK 505 178-UEN
Application manual
1MRK 505 181-UEN
Buyers guide
1MRK 505 182-BEN
Connection and Installation components
1MRK 013 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST
1MRK 512 001-BEN
Accessories for IED 670
1MRK 514 012-BEN
Getting started guide IED 670
1MRK 500 080-UEN
SPA and LON signal list for IED 670, ver. 1.1
1MRK 500 083-WEN
IEC 61850 Data objects list for IED 670, ver. 1.1
1MRK 500 084-WEN
Generic IEC 61850 IED Connectivity package
1KHA001027-UEN
Protection and Control IED Manager PCM 600 Installation sheet
1MRS755552
Engineering guide IED 670 products
1MRK 511 179-UEN
Latest versions of the described documentation can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation
1.1.5
Revision notes
Revision
B
REB 670
Description
No functionality added. Minor changes made in content due to problem reports.
Application manual
11
12
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
Section 2

About this chapter
This chapter describes the overall procedure regarding the engineering process of an
IED.
2.1
Introduction
The IED 670 includes all the necessary functions to build any application.
The functions are available in a software library and there is a basic library of
functions always included in any supply that are sufficient for most applications.
For special applications there is a number of software options which must be ordered
separately.
The function library with available basic functions and options are shown in figure
below.
To allow applications on different voltage levels and station arrangements there is
also a choice of hardware to be included. The IED can be ordered in 1/1 resp 1/2 size
19 rack with 6U height cases and with a small or medium size HMI as a local user
interface.
The cases can be mounted in 19 rack, flushed or wall mounted as preferred.
The engineering is done with use of the PCM 600 engineering toolbox.
Install the PCM 600 toolbox with the connectivity package for IED 670 series and
open it from the Start menu or from the short-cut on the desktop.
The PCM 600 platform includes following components:
REB 670
Application Configuration tool

Signal matrix tool
Parameter setting tool
Disturbance recorder tools for upload and viewing
Graphical Mimic editing tool
Signal monitoring tool
Event viewer tool
Application manual
13
Section 2
2.1.1
The interface between Signal matrix and Configuration tool

The complete configuration of an IED 670 includes both the configuration with the
graphic configuration tool and the configuration of the hardware done with the Signal
Matrix Tool SMT.
The Application configuration tool is used to set up the included hardware structure
and the software functions.
The hardware is set-up under the Edit/Function selector menu where for each location
the physical analog and digital IO is defined. The figure 1 shows an example from
this set-up.
Figure 1:
The Function selector options allows definition of the specific

hardware.
The hardware also includes e.g. the configurable LEDs and the remote end line data
communication module LDCM. These are also important parts of the physical
interface and will be shown with the signal matrix tool.
The graphical configuration includes a number of virtual elements forming the
interface between the software functions and the hardware. These function blocks are
configured at all interface points where a physical IO is foreseen to be required.
These virtual IO blocks are:
14
Analog pre-processing function block SMAI

Virtual binary input function block SMBI
Virtual binary output function block SMBO
Application manual
REB 670
Section 2
Figure 2 shows an example for RET 670 of these function blocks configured for use
in the signal matrix tool.
en05000530.vsd
Figure 2:
Virtual IO blocks SMBI and SMBO configured in an application

configuration
These function blocks will, as the graphical configuration has been compiled, showup in the signal matrix tool when this has been opened. The use of the Signal Matrix
tool is described below.
2.1.1.1
The configurable LEDs.

The fifteen configurable LEDs can be connected to virtual inputs or virtual outputs
only with the signal matrix tool This means that signals foreseen to be used on an
LED such as group signals must be connected through an OR function block to a
virtual output for use by the LED. Naturally the same signal can be connected to a
physical output e.g. for SCADA signaling. The six first LEDs are red and the
remaining nine are yellow.
REB 670
Application manual
15
Section 2
2.1.1.2
The analog preprocessing function block (SMAI).

This function block is vital for the IED 670 functionality. Interfaces both to local
analog inputs as well as remote analog inputs through the LDCM communication
module are connected through this function block. The signals from this block is
connected to the different applications. Some important comments for the
understanding of the function:
16
The function block can be used for voltage inputs or current inputs. Which of the
two is defined as a setting parameter (TYPE input) on the function block.
The output AI3P is a general output for all of the phases. It is normally connected
to the functions. The only difference is the Disturbance recorder block where the
individual channels are connected to individual channels. The four individual
outputs are the three phases and the neutral where the neutral is residually
summated from the phases if no physical connection is made to the fourth input
with the signal matrix tool. If the physical connection is made the physical input
is used instead. When e.g. a neutral overcurrent protection is connected to the
function block output AI3P it will measure the fourth neutral channel. For each
application it can then be decided if this is the residual sum or e.g. if a neutral
current transformer is connected there.
The physical inputs can be connected phase-phase instead of phase to neutral,
where acceptable. The setting of the pre-processing block (under Settings/
GeneralSettings/Analog modules/3PhaseAnalogGroup) Connection Type must
then be set to Phase to phase. The pre-processing block will then use the physical
values as phase to phase values and calculate the phase to neutral values.
The name of the pre-processing block and the names of the four inputs are the
names shown on the signal matrix tool and the function block name should be
selected for simple understanding what the input means.
Application manual
REB 670
Section 2
en05000531.vsd
Figure 3:
The analog preprocessing block.
The analog pre-processing blocks can also be configured to have the correct frequency
tracking for DFT caculations (i.e. adapt to the signal frequency). This is included in
the SMAI function blocks. Each block in a task time group is provided with a
possibility to keep track of the frequency for adjustment of the fouriers filter to the
correct frequency. In principle each block in the series should have the DFT ref setting
for the group set to preferable group positive sequence voltage input, e.g. if
DFTReference for PR01 is set to AdDFTRefCh7, the PRO7 positive sequence voltage
frequency will then be the frequency reference for group 1. If SMAI block for other
task times (e.g.13-24 resp 25-36) also are included they can be given the same
reference by connecting the output SPFCOUT to input DFTSPSC on the function
blocks SMAI 13 resp 25. Function blocks within these task time groups must then
have setting e.g. DFTReference=ExternalDFTRef.
REB 670
Application manual
17
Section 2
The first function block in the task time group containing the function block sending
the signal must have the setting of the DFT reference output set to e.g.
DFTRefExtOut= AdDFTRefCh7.
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default
value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
2.2
Configuration alternatives
There are four different software alternatives with which the IED can be managed.
The intention is that these configurations shall suit most applications with minor or
no changes.
The configurations are:
Single breaker arrangement. Three phase tripping arrangement.

Single breaker arrangement. Single phase tripping arrangement.
Multi breaker arrangement. Three phase tripping arrangement.
Multi breaker arrangement. Single phase tripping arrangement
The Multi breaker arrangement includes One- and a half, Double breaker and Ring
breaker arrangements.
The number of IO must be ordered to the application where more IO is foreseen for
the Single phase tripping arrangements along with Multi-breaker arrangement.
The basic ordering includes one Binary input module (16 inputs) and one Binary
Output module (24 outputs), sufficient for the default configured IO to trip and close
circuit breaker and with possible communication interface.
Each of the four alternative solutions is of course possible to re-configure to an userdefined configuration.
Optional functions and optional IO ordered will not be configured at delivery. As the
standard delivered hardware only includes one binary input and one binary output
module only the key functions such as tripping are connected to the outputs in the
signal matrix tool.
The required total IO must be calculated and specified at ordering and the IO adapted
with help of the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT).
Typical connection diagrams are provided in following appendices available in
separate documents, refer to section "Related documents"
18
Application manual
REB 670
Section 2
1MRK002801-BA
Single breaker arrangement. Three phase tripping arrangement.
1MRK002801-CA
Single breaker arrangement. Single phase tripping arrangement.
1MRK002801-DA
Multi breaker arrangement. Three phase tripping arrangement.
1MRK002801-EA
Multi breaker arrangement. Single phase tripping arrangement.
The diagrams show an example of how to connect the primary apparatuses to the IED
when also the control functionality is required. It is intended as a reference for the
alternative applications. As there normally is two sub-systems and not always all
functions in both there is a need for exchange of data between the sub-systems. The
configurations are prepared to cover for the most common applications but not all
possibilities.
The Application configuration tool CAP 531, which is part of the PCM600
engineering platform, will further to the four arrangements above include also
alternatives for each of them with all of the software options configured. These can
then be used directly or as assistance where only minor adaptation will be necessary.
The detailed configuration diagrams are available in separate documents, refer to
section "Related documents"
The configurations are as far as found necessary provided with application comments
to explain why the signals have been connected in the special way. This is of course
for the special application features created not standard functionality.
2.3
Adapting a configuration to satisfy special

needs
It is recognized that each application is unique. The IED thus offers full flexibility
and simple changes and adjustments can easily be made to the delivered
configuration. Note also that special user configurations will be supported and IED
can thus be delivered with your specific configuration. ABB is of course glad to assist
in developing the adapted configuration.
When the IED has been received, or before from the configuration templates, there
are two possibilities to adapt to the specific needs.
2.3.1
Signal Matrix Tool (SMT)

The PCM 600 engineering platform includes a Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). From this
tool inputs and outputs are available and can be tied together in the desirable way.
For example. if more signal outputs are required, outputs from functions can be
connected to the physical IO with the signal matrix tool.
The signal matrix tool uses information from the compiled application configuration
performed with CAP 531. At saving the information will be sent to the SMT tool.
REB 670
Application manual
19
Section 2
Open the Signal Matrix Tool by a right click on the IED in the Plant structure of PCM
600.
The physical IO will show up on the horizontal axis and the virtual IO on the vertical
axis. The user has then full freedom for each application to connect the virtual signal
from the graphical configuration to analog or digital IO. The physical IO is set up
under Application configuration tool in menu Edit/Function selector.
In this menu the included IO boards is edited and must match the ordered hardware.
It is commonly required that this menu is edited, the configuration compiled and
downloaded and then the PST tool can be used to connect the physical inputs with
the virtual IO.
This is done by entering an X at the connection point between the two.
One virtual signal on the vertical axis can be connected to several physical binary IO.
One analog input may also be connected to several preprocessing elements for the
analog signals.
Figure 4:
20
Example (RET 670) from signal matrix tool tabs for binary input defines the connection between
the physical and virtual IO.
Application manual
REB 670
Section 2
This gives the user flexibility to connect any signal he needs to an IO without doing
any changes in the graphical configuration. To allow full flexibility a number of
logically prepared signals has also been generated.
2.3.2
Application configuration tool CAP 531

The application configuration tool allows free configuration of the IED with
additional use of any logic element to create special logic e.g. for Auto Switching of
Disconnectors in Multi-breaker arrangements. The logic is created by inserting logic
blocks and connecting them together.
Interface elements to make signals available in the signal matrix tool can also be
added so that in future applications the same configuration can be used and the
adaptation made with the signal matrix tool.
en05000532.vsd
Figure 5:
A typical view from the application configuration tool showing an

added AND element during wiring.
2.4
Preparing a specific application configuration of

the IED
2.4.1
Configuring an IED with CAP531

The application configuration tool can be utilized to prepare an adapted IED with
special functions when required. Here we are giving some basic guidelines of how to
prepare a configuration.
It is advisable to start from one of the four basic configurations and delete and add
function blocks and connections in the selected configuration, closest to the
application. Refer to the Help in CAP 531 for more information. For the basic
configuration available in the ordered IED and the alternative configurations available
as templates refer to the chapter "Configuration".
The PCM 600 toolbox with the configuration tool CAP 531 shall be installed prior
to the below sequence.
REB 670
Application manual
21
Section 2
Procedure
1.
Open the configuration program CAP 531 under the PCM 600 platform by
opening Start/Programs/ABB/PCM 600.
The below view will show up.
Figure 6:
2.
3.
22
Open view for PCM 600
Start the configuration tool under the menu or by clicking the wrench symbol.
In the configuration tool open the template to start from under Edit. Note that
the IED has default configuration as ordered, open the correct or a more suitable
alternative template.
Default password is abb
Information on how to log on as an administrators is available in Operator's
manual. Please refer to section "Related documents".
The template will be installed and you can see the worksheets used in the
template.
Open the worksheets to be addition. Check in the configuration diagrams and
verify what you need to change e.g. logic added or IO signals modification.
Following guidelines can be given.
Application manual
REB 670
Section 2
New function blocks are added by selecting the function from the function
library. It is also possible to copy an existing one by marking it and copying it
using Ctrl+C.
The following view is shown.
Figure 7:
4.
5.
Adding a new function block
The new function block is selected and added to the worksheet. Note that all
inputs needs to be connected either with a signal or with a True (On) or False
(Off) signal.
Click the input and take key v or click the var symbol to add a variable on
an input or output.
Type the name you want to use for the signal. Type True or False for fixed On
or Off.
This is defined on the outputs On-Off for binary status on the
Fixed signals function block. The designations there must be
used for fixed binary status.
6.
REB 670
If the input shall be connected to the output on a function close by, take the line
tool and connect the two.
In case the connection inputs and outputs are in different sheets, variables names
will be used and with the same variable name you connect inputs and outputs.
An output can be connected to several inputs, e.g. on IO boards, on Trip function
block, on an OR, AND or TIMER function block etc.
Inputs cannot be connected to several places without an OR gate.
When you select your function blocks e.g. logic elements to build a logic you
must, for high speed circuits, keep track of the processing order. The processing
number is shown on each function block. A sequence should have raising task
numbers not to loose one processor loop, e.g. 1, 3, 8 or even 100 ms.
Application manual
23
Section 2
7.
8.
9.
2.4.2
You can copy and paste variables and function blocks/logic elements. You will
at pasting of e.g. an OR gate be requested to select the new one with the correct
sequence number.
When you are satisfied with the logic you have created, save, close and click on
the IED symbol and Compile the configuration.
You will then get warnings and errors for all mistakes. All errors must be
corrected, warnings can be checked to see if they are acceptable, mostly due to
connection of function blocks with different cycle times.
Click on the Errors and Warnings in the Error list to directly open the worksheet
where the problem is found. Correct all mistakes, save and compile again.
When no errors occur, download the configuration to the IED.
You must have the correct IP address and you must have either a straight
Ethernet cable with a HUB in between or a crossed Ethernet cable when you
are directly connected PC-IED.
Using the Signal monitoring tool (SMT)

The Signal Monitoring Tool is opened by right clicking and selecting the tool. It gives
access to measured values from Binary Inputs, Binary Outputs and Measuring
function blocks (MMXU). The status update can with a menu symbol be updated.
2.4.3
Using the Event viewer tool

The Event List tool gives access to the locally stored Event lists. It gives access both
to the internal signal event list and to the Disturbance report event list where the last
1000 events are stored in a FIFO (First-In-First-Out) list.
2.5
Setting of the IED

The IED are set using the PCM 600 setting tool. The IED is delivered with a default
setting where many parameters are selected to be one of the most likely or suitable
settings. However of course all important settings such as currents, impedances and
times always need to be set.
To simplify the use the tool has a normal user view and an advanced user view. The
normal user does not need to set parameters defined as parameters for the advanced
user. Switching is simply done from the symbols on the toolbar.
Setting can be done locally from the HMI or from the engineering tool. The settings
are always under password control and the user must log-in with an authority level
to match the settings to be changed.
The IED has the settings available in six setting groups and switching between these
setting groups can be performed either from physical IO or from a SA system or the
SCADA system over the communication link. The special function block
ACTGROUP is used for this purpose and this switching is not password controlled.
24
Application manual
REB 670
Section 2
The function block includes a definition how many setting groups are used to prevent
switching to a not set group.
The local setting can be blocked after commissioning by activating a digital input or
from SA system as defined in the configuration. Default there is a software switch
which can be set to block the setting from the HMI.
Figure 8:
A typical view from the PCM 600 setting tool
A special function block is included for block of setting changes,

locally of from the tool. This should be activated from a physical input
at the end of commissioning to prevent changes of setting in a
commissioned station as setting changes requires new
commissioning. If setting changes are required these should be
prepared in a separate setting group and tested and activated by a
setting group switching.
2.6
Authorization
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED 670 and the tools that are
accessing the IED 670 are protected, subject of authorization handling. The concept
of authorization, as it is implemented in the IED 670 and the associated tools is based
on the following facts:
REB 670
Application manual
25
Section 2
There are two types of points of access to the IED 670:
local, through the local HMI

remote, through the communication ports
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different
areas of the IED and tools functionality; the pre-defined user types are defined
as follows:
User type
Access rights
Guest
Read only
SuperUser
Full access
SPAGuest
Read only + control
SystemOperator
Control from LHMI, no bypass
ProtectionEngineer
All settings
DesignEngineer
Application configuration (including SMT, GDE and CMT)
UserAdministrator
User and password administration for the IED
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the User Management
Tool (UMT) within PCM 600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the LHMI of
the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on the IED LHMI.
2.6.1
Authorization handling in the tool

Upon the creation of an IED in the Plant Structure, the User Management Tool is
immediately accessible, by right clicking with the mouse on that specific IED name:
26
Application manual
REB 670
Section 2
Figure 9:
Right-clicking to get the User Management Tool IED Users.
By left-clicking on the IED Users submenu, the tool will open in the right-side
panel:
REB 670
Application manual
27
Section 2
Figure 10:
User Manager Tool opened in the right-side panel.
By default, the IEDs are delivered so that users are not required to log on to operate
the IED. The default user is the SuperUser. Before doing any changes to the User
Management in the IED it is recommendable that the administrator uploads the Users
and Groups existent in the IED.
If situation requires so, one can restore the factory settings, overwriting all existing
settings in the User Management Tool database.
Even if the administrator empties the tool database, the users
previously defined are still in the IED. They cannot be erased by
downloading the empty list into the IED (the tool wont download an
empty list), so it is strongly recommended that before you create any
user you create one that belongs to the SuperUser group.
If the administrator marks the check box User must logon to this IED, then the
fields under the User Management tab are becoming accessible and one can add,
delete and edit users.
To add a new user, the administrator will press the button that is marked with a black
arrow, see figure 11 on the User subtab:
28
Application manual
REB 670
Section 2
Figure 11:
User subtab and creation of a new user.
Upon pressing this button, a window will appear, enabling the administrator to enter
details about the user, assign an access password and (after pressing Next and
advancing to the next window) assign the user to a group:
Figure 12:
REB 670
Enter details about the user.
Application manual
29
Section 2
Figure 13:
Assign the user to a group.
Once the new user is created, it will appear in the list of users. Once in the list, there
are several operations that can be performed on the users, shown in figure 14
Figure 14:
Operations on users in the users list.
No. Description
1
Delete selected user
Change password
Add another group to the user permissions
The Group subtab is displaying all the pre-defined groups and gives short details
of the permissions allowed to the members of a particular group:
30
Application manual
REB 670
Section 2
Figure 15:
The Groups subtab.
It also allows the administrator to add another (already created) user to a group, in
the same way it could assign one more group to an user, on the Users subtab.
The Functions subtab is a descriptional area, showing in detail what Read/Write
permissions has each user group, in respect to various tools and components.
Finally, after the desired users are created and permissions assigned to them by means
of user groups, the whole list must be downloaded in the IED, in the same way as
from the other tools:
No. Description
REB 670
Upload from IED
Download to IED
Application manual
31
Section 2
2.6.2
Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the superuser. No LogOn is required to operate the IED
until a user has been created with the UMT(User Management Tool). See Application
manual for more details.
Once a user is created and downloaded into the IED, that user can perform a LogOn,
introducing the password assigned in the tool.
If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will cause the display to show a message
box saying: No user defined!
If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Settings
\General Settings\HMI\Screen\ Display Timeout ) elapses, the IED will return to a
Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 60 minutes
at delivery.
If there are one or more users created with the UMT and downloaded into the IED,
then, when a user intentionally attempts a LogOn or when the user attempts to perform
an operation that is password protected, the LogOn window will appear
The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the E key, one
can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and down
arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E key again.
When it comes to password, upon pressing the E key, the following character will
show up: $. The user must scroll for every letter in the pasword. After all the letters
are introduced (passwords are case sensitive!) choose OK and press E key again.
If everything is O.K. at a voluntary LogOn the LHMI returns to the Authorization
screen. If the LogOn is OK, when required to change for example a password
protected setting, the LHMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the LogOn has
failed, then the LogOn window will pop-up again, until either the user makes it right
or presses Cancel.
2.7
Blocking of setting after commissioning of the

IED
It is important to ensure that a commissioned station may not be changed without a
new commissioning. Settings or configurations may not be changed without a new
commissioning with a new test record. To prevent changes a CHANGE LOCK
function block is used and activated when commissioning is finalized. This block is
preferably enabled by a field contact input from a key switch. This can be done by
mapping the ChangeLock input to a binary input in the relay, which is energized by
the key switch input or a disconnecting terminal link when commissioning is
finalized, see figure 16..
32
Application manual
REB 670
Section 2
Alternatively it can be arranged with an internal blocking e.g. by a General switch

which can be controlled from the HMI and switched On when commissioning is
finalized. It should require a special knowledge to open up the change possibility so
it advisable to use this function block.
Refer to below figure.
+
Disconnectable terminal
or key-switch
ChangeLock
en05000754.vsd
Figure 16:
Blocking of setting
For example, the COMBIFLEX key selector or an FT switch can be used for this
purpose.
2.8
How to use the configurable logics blocks

The IED has a very powerful logic capability.
Logic blocks of each type are available in different task times and task orders. This
allows the user to define own logic with all the logic elements and function in the
correct sequence. At creating the logic the elements sequence number and task times
should always be checked and logic components with the suitable values selected.
An example of a logic with increasing sequence number throughout the logic.
en05000537.vsd
Figure 17:
REB 670
It is important to ensure that the task numbers are in sequence to

have a fast processing of logic.
Application manual
33
Section 2
2.9
Some application ideas

The advanced logic capabilities and the flexible functions give the user a possibility
to manage any type of application.
Below some examples are given to show the possibilities.
2.9.1
Voltage selection
The Busbar voltage must in many cases be used as reference for line or bay protection.
Examples are:
Line distance protection where the busbar is provided with three phase voltage
transformers and the lines with only single-phase sets for Synchronism check
reference.
The Synchronism check function in IED 670 has a built-in voltage
selection.
Bus voltage protection e.g. Over- and Undervoltage, Over- and Underfrequency
protection functions in the bay.
Voltage reference for metering functions - where three phase voltage transformers
does not exist on the object.
A voltage selection can be created in IED 670 with a user defined logic where
positions of disconnectors (and breakers) are used to create the required voltage
selection.
An example is shown in figure 18 where the voltage transformers for a double bus
system are connected to the line protection function, which may be line distance relays
or voltage or frequency relays.
Supervision of the fuse/MCB failures can be fed through the same logic and connected
to e.g. block operation of undervoltage functions.
It is also a possible to block functions when both disconnectors are open.
34
Application manual
REB 670
Section 2
Figure 18:
2.9.2
The voltage selection logic for busbar voltage transformers in a double bus arrangement.
Automatic opening of a transformer disconnector and closing

the ring breakers
The available function blocks to create user defined logic can be utilized for many
functions. One example is to open the transformer High voltage disconnector at
internal transformer faults in multi-breaker arrangements and then close the ring or
one- and a half breaker diameter.
The logic can include status supervision before the fault was tripped to ensure that
the sequence is only closing apparatuses already closed before the fault, information
about the fault to ensure it was a transformer fault, check that the disconnector is open
before the breaker/s is/are closed and verification that the new status has been reached
before next sequence is started.
Detailed pictures are not shown here for want of space. Please contact ABB for more
details on such special logic schemes.
2.9.3
Automatic load transfer from bus A to bus B

With transformer applications it is sometimes required to automatically transfer the
load from one transformer to the other. It includes closing bus tie and closing
transformer breakers. It mostly also involves switching back after the normal supply
has been restored to the original transformer. The load transfer scheme includes a
combination of advance logic checking apparatus positions and the measurement of
REB 670
Application manual
35
Section 2
bus and transformer voltage and the use of Synchronism check device to control the
closing.
An advanced alternative exists for generating stations where the unit transformer
supplies will need to synchronize at switching and this synchronizing is done on a
decaying bus voltage on voltage level as well as frequency level depending on the
available synchronous and asynchronous machines maintaining the bus voltage.
It shall be noticed that the exchange of information between IEDs of the two
transformers can be with peer- to-peer communication across IEC61850-8-1 or over
LON bus as alternative to a hardwire connection. With the fast Goose IO transfer
times are in the level 4 ms which is sufficient also for this type of logic. Detailed
pictures are not shown here for want of space. Please contact ABB for more details
on such special logic schemes.
2.10
Testing of the IED

The testing requirement is minimized with the use of an advanced internal self
supervision. This in, combination with the numerical design and the use of measured
values in the substation control, means that the need of scheduled maintenance testing
does not exist. However, during commissioning, changes in the system with setting
or configuration changes etc. there is a need of simple access to test the IED 670.
The test interface is preferably done with test switches from the ABB FT Switch or
COMBITEST test system. These COMBITEST test switches and test handles or
plugs provide a high amount of IO allowing test of integrated IEDs such as the IED
670 family.
Test switch contacts should be provided on selected inputs and outputs to allow
verification of setting values such as current, voltage, impedance and set timers. Due
to the high amount of functionality some interfaces must be switched off in software.
It is then important to ensure that e.g. times to trip can be measured from other signals
with test switches. In the connection diagrams for the four configurations, the typical
location of test switch contacts is indicated. The outputs without test switches must
either be provided with a second test switch or blocked by software. This can be done
e.g. by blocking virtual outputs SMBO with In test condition. The In test is with
COMBTEST test switches RTXP24 provided by contact 29-30 (early closing)
activating a binary input and connected to the test function block. Alternatively a test
switch finger from FT can be wired to the binary input to achieve similar function.
36
Application manual
REB 670
Section 2
2.11
Engineering checklist
2.11.1
How to use the IED in conjunction with PCM 600 toolbox

The below check list gives a short guideline of how to use the protection and control
IED with help of the PCM 600 toolbox. Uploading of disturbance record is not
included below but is available from PCM 600.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the IED configuration.

The IED is available with four alternative configurations as described above.
Select and order the IED which best suits the application.
There are a number of templates including options for your use. Check which
one is the most suitable for your application.
Adjust the configuration if required by adjusting the input and outputs with the
Signal Matrix Tool (SMT) in PCM 600.
If you have added physical IO compared to the default single Binary input
module and Binary output module you need to add this in CAP 531 under Edit/
Function selector. This is required to have the physical IO showing up in the
SMT tool. Also decide on how many setting groups you will be using.
Select the number of setting groups in CAP 531 on the Activate setting group
function block.
If more logic adjustments are necessary open the configuration tool CAP 531
and perform the changes, add logic gates, change connections, add connections
etc.
Save the IED, compile and download to the relay.
At compilations you can get warnings and errors. Warnings are
normal as e.g. warnings for different cycle times connected
which is bound to happen. Errors are defined as mistakes
needing to be corrected. Click the error in the error list, this will
open up the location on the worksheet with the error and allow
you to find the mistake.
6.
7.
8.
Set the IED with use of the PCM 600 Parameter Setting Tool PST.
Adjust the setting to the values suitable for your application.
Remember to also do the general settings. General setting values have only one
set and are the basic parameters such as CT and VT ratios etc.
Download to the IED, you can download from any level in your structure but
ensure to download all parts.
The active setting group function block ACGR has a setting
parameter where the number of setting groups in use can be set.
This is important and will minimize the risk of someone
switching to a setting group which has not been verified at
commissioning. The default setting is use of one group and this
REB 670
Application manual
37
Section 2
setting will also decide how many setting groups are initiated in
the parameter setting menu.
9.
Test the IED. Use the Debug tool in the CAP 531 configuration tool to see online the status of digital signals.
This simplifies the evaluation. Note that faults need to be put on continuously
to follow a fault signal as the debug update time is on second level.
10. Check also Measurements/Functions where each function measured result can
be seen.
This shows mistakes in CT or VT settings, mistakes in setting function ON-OFF
etc. If values do not show up the most probably reason is that it is OFF, secondly
it can be incorrect configured. If the function is ON, open the CAP, not in debug
mode, and upload options from the relay.
11. Click the Red-Green Leaf and update the function block from the occurring list.
You will notice if e.g. the function has not been ordered as it will not show up
as available.
12. Save, Compile and download again.
If that does not take care of the problem, contact ABB SA-T Supportline.
Exercise caution when high currents are applied which might
thermally stress the relay.
38
Application manual
REB 670
Section 3
Requirements
Section 3
Requirements
About this chapter
This chapter describes current and voltage transformer requirements.
3.1
Current transformer requirements

The performance of a protection function will depend on the quality of the measured
current signal. Saturation of the current transformer (CT) will cause distortion of the
current signal and can result in a failure to operate or cause unwanted operations of
some functions. Consequently CT saturation can have an influence on both the
dependability and the security of the protection. This protection IED has been
designed to permit heavy CT saturation with maintained correct operation.
3.1.1
Current transformer classification

To guarantee correct operation, the current transformers (CTs) must be able to
correctly reproduce the current for a minimum time before the CT will begin to
saturate. To fulfil the requirement on a specified time to saturation the CTs must fulfil
the requirements of a minimum secondary e.m.f. that is specified below.
There are several different ways to specify CTs. Conventional magnetic core CTs are
usually specified and manufactured according to some international or national
standards, which specify different protection classes as well. There are many different
standards and a lot of classes but fundamentally there are three different types of CTs:
High remanence type CT

Low remanence type CT
Non remanence type CT
The high remanence type has no limit for the remanent flux. This CT has a magnetic
core without any airgap and a remanent flux might remain almost infinite time. In
this type of transformers the remanence can be up to around 80% of the saturation
flux. Typical examples of high remanence type CT are class P, PX, TPS, TPX
according to IEC, class P, X according to BS (old British Standard) and nongapped
class C, K according to ANSI/IEEE.
The low remanence type has a specified limit for the remanent flux. This CT is made
with a small airgap to reduce the remanence to a level that does not exceed 10% of
the saturation flux. The small airgap has only very limited influence on the other
properties of the CT. Class PR, TPY according to IEC are low remanence type CTs.
REB 670
Application manual
39
Section 3
Requirements
The non remanence type CT has practically negligible level of remanent flux. This
type of CT has relatively big airgaps in order to reduce the remanence to practically
zero level. In the same time, these airgaps reduce the influence of the DC-component
from the primary fault current. The airgaps will also decrease the measuring accuracy
in the non-saturated region of operation. Class TPZ according to IEC is a non
remanence type CT.
Different standards and classes specify the saturation e.m.f. in different ways but it
is possible to approximately compare values from different classes. The rated
equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 60044 6 standard is
used to specify the CT requirements for IED 670. The requirements are also specified
according to other standards.
3.1.2
Conditions
The requirements are a result of investigations performed in our network simulator.
The current transformer models are representative for current transformers of high
remanence and low remanence type. The results may not always be valid for non
remanence type CTs (TPZ).
The performances of the protection functions have been checked in the range from
symmetrical to fully asymmetrical fault currents. Primary time constants of at least
120 ms have been considered at the tests. The current requirements below are thus
applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.
Depending on the protection function phase-to-earth, phase-to-phase and three-phase
faults have been tested for different relevant fault positions e.g. close in forward and
reverse faults, zone 1 reach faults, internal and external faults. The dependability and
security of the protection was verified by checking e.g. time delays, unwanted
operations, directionality, overreach and stability.
The remanence in the current transformer core can cause unwanted operations or
minor additional time delays for some protection functions. As unwanted operations
are not acceptable at all maximum remanence has been considered for fault cases
critical for the security, e.g. faults in reverse direction and external faults. Because of
the almost negligible risk of additional time delays and the non-existent risk of failure
to operate the remanence have not been considered for the dependability cases. The
requirements below are therefore fully valid for all normal applications.
It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence
to avoid the minor risk of an additional time delay. They depend on the performance
and economy requirements. When current transformers of low remanence type (e.g.
TPY, PR) are used, normally no additional margin is needed. For current transformers
of high remanence type (e.g. P, PX, TPS, TPX) the small probability of fully
asymmetrical faults, together with high remanence in the same direction as the flux
generated by the fault, has to be kept in mind at the decision of an additional margin.
Fully asymmetrical fault current will be achieved when the fault occurs at
approximately zero voltage (0). Investigations have shown that 95% of the faults in
40
Application manual
REB 670
Section 3
Requirements
the network will occur when the voltage is between 40 and 90. In addition fully
asymmetrical fault current will not exist in all phases at the same time.
3.1.3
Fault current
The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for
faults in different positions. Maximum fault current will occur for three-phase faults
or single-phase-to-earth faults. The current for a single phase-to-earth fault will
exceed the current for a three-phase fault when the zero sequence impedance in the
total fault loop is less than the positive sequence impedance.
When calculating the current transformer requirements, maximum fault current for
the relevant fault position should be used and therefore both fault types have to be
considered.
3.1.4
Secondary wire resistance and additional load

The voltage at the current transformer secondary terminals directly affects the current
transformer saturation. This voltage is developed in a loop containing the secondary
wires and the burden of all relays in the circuit. For earth faults the loop includes both
the phase and neutral wire, normally twice the resistance of the single secondary wire.
For three-phase faults the neutral current is zero and it is just necessary to consider
the resistance up to the point where the phase wires are connected to the common
neutral wire. The most common practice is to use four wires secondary cables so it
normally is sufficient to consider just a single secondary wire for the three-phase case.
The conclusion is that the loop resistance, twice the resistance of the single secondary
wire, must be used in the calculation for phase-to-earth faults and the phase resistance,
the resistance of a single secondary wire, may normally be used in the calculation for
three-phase faults.
As the burden can be considerable different for three-phase faults and phase-toearth faults it is important to consider both cases. Even in a case where the phase-toearth fault current is smaller than the three-phase fault current the phase-to-earth fault
can be dimensioning for the CT depending on the higher burden.
In isolated or high impedance earthed systems the phase-to-earth fault is not the
dimensioning case and therefore the resistance of the single secondary wire always
can be used in the calculation, for this case.
3.1.5
General current transformer requirements

The current transformer ratio is mainly selected based on power system data like e.g.
maximum load. However, it should be verified that the current to the protection is
higher than the minimum operating value for all faults that are to be detected with
the selected CT ratio. The minimum operating current is different for different
functions and normally settable so each function should be checked.
REB 670
Application manual
41
Section 3
Requirements
The current error of the current transformer can limit the possibility to use a very
sensitive setting of a sensitive residual overcurrent protection. If a very sensitive
setting of this function will be used it is recommended that the current transformer
should have an accuracy class which have an current error at rated primary current
that is less than 1% (e.g. 5P). If current transformers with less accuracy are used it
is advisable to check the actual unwanted residual current during the commissioning.
3.1.6
Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements

With regard to saturation of the current transformer all current transformers of high
remanence and low remanence type that fulfill the requirements on the rated
equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal below can be used. The characteristic of the non
remanence type CT (TPZ) is not well defined as far as the phase angle error is
concerned. If no explicit recommendation is given for a specific function we therefore
recommend contacting ABB to confirm that the non remanence type can be used.
The CT requirements for the different functions below are specified as a rated
equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 60044-6 standard.
Requirements for CTs specified in different ways are given at the end of this section.
3.1.6.1
Busbar protection
The main CT requirement for REB 670 is that the CT do not saturate within 2 ms
after fault current zero crossing.
The CT can be of high remanence or low remanence type and they can be used together
within the same zone of protection. Each of them must have a rated equivalent
secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or equal to the required secondary e.m.f.
Ealreq below:
The high remanence type CT must fulfill

E al E alreq = 0.5 I f max
I sn
S
R CT + R L + R2
I pn
Ir
(Equation 1)
The low remanence type CT must fulfill

I sn
S
R CT + R L + R2
I pn
Ir
(Equation 2)
where
Ifmax
Maximum primary fundamental frequency fault current on the busbar (A)
Ipn
The rated primary CT current (A)
Isn
The rated secondary CT current (A)
Table continued on next page
42
Application manual
REB 670
Section 3
Requirements
Ir
The rated current of the protection IED (A)
RCT
The secondary resistance of the CT (W)
RL
The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (W). The loop resistance
containing the phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in solidly earthed
systems. The resistance of a single secondary wire should be used for faults in
high impedance earthed systems.
SR
The burden of an IED 670 current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for
Ir=1 A and SR=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A.
The non remanence type CT

CTs of non remanence type (e.g.TPZ) can be used but in this case the CTs within the
differential zone must be of non remanence type. They must fulfill the same
requirements as for the low remanence type CTs and have a rated equivalent
secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or equal to required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq
below:
3.1.6.2
I sn
S
R CT + R L + R2
I pn
Ir
(Equation 3)
Breaker failure protection

The CTs must have a rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or equal
to the required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:
E al E alreq = 5 I op
Isn
I pn
S
R CT + R L + R2
Ir
(Equation 4)
where:
REB 670
Iop
The primary operate value (A)
Ipn
Isn
Ir
RCT
RL
The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (W). The loop resistance containing
the phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in solidly earthed systems. The resistance
of a single secondary wire should be used for faults in high impedance earthed systems.
SR
The burden of an IED 670 current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1 A and
SR=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A
Application manual
43
Section 3
Requirements
3.1.6.3
Non-directional instantaneous and definitive time, phase and residual

overcurrent protection
The CTs must have a rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or equal
E al E alreq = 1, 5 I op
Isn
S
R CT + R L + R2
I pn
Ir
(Equation 5)
where:
3.1.6.4
Iop
The primary operate value (A)
Ipn
Isn
Ir
RCT
RL
The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (W). The loop resistance containing
the phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in solidly earthed systems. The resistance
of a single secondary wire should be used for faults in high impedance earthed systems.
SR
The burden of an IED 670 current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1 A and
SR=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A
Non-directional inverse time delayed phase and residual overcurrent

protection
The requirement according to Equation 6 and Equation 7 does not need to be fulfilled
if the high set instantaneous or definitive time stage is used. In this case Equation 5
is the only necessary requirement.
If the inverse time delayed function is the only used overcurrent protection function
the CTs must have a rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or equal
E al E alreq = 20 I op
Isn
S
R CT + R L + R2
I pn
Ir
(Equation 6)
where
Iop
The primary current set value of the inverse time function (A)
Ipn
Isn
Ir
44
Application manual
REB 670
Section 3
Requirements
RCT
RL
The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (W). The loop resistance
containing the phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in solidly earthed
systems. The resistance of a single secondary wire should be used for faults in
high impedance earthed systems.
SR
The burden of an IED 670 current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for
Ir=1 A and SR=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A
Independent of the value of Iop the maximum required Eal is specified according to
the following:
E al E alreq max = I k max
Isn
S
R CT + R L + R2
I pn
Ir
(Equation 7)
where
Ikmax
3.1.7
Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for close-in faults (A)
Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other

standards
All kinds of conventional magnetic core CTs are possible to use with REx 670 IEDs
if they fulfill the requirements corresponding to the above specified expressed as the
rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 60044-6 standard. From
different standards and available data for relaying applications it is possible to
approximately calculate a secondary e.m.f. of the CT comparable with Eal. By
comparing this with the required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq it is possible to judge if the
CT fulfills the requirements. The requirements according to some other standards are
specified below.
3.1.7.1
Current transformers according to IEC 60044-1, class P, PR

A CT according to IEC 60044-1 is specified by the secondary limiting e.m.f. E2max.
The value of the E2max is approximately equal to the corresponding Eal according to
IEC 60044-6. Therefore, the CTs according to class P and PR must have a secondary
limiting e.m.f. E2max that fulfills the following:
E 2 max > max imum of E alreq
REB 670
Application manual
(Equation 8)
45
Section 3
Requirements
3.1.7.2
Current transformers according to IEC 60044-1, class PX, IEC

60044-6, class TPS (and old British Standard, class X)
CTs according to these classes are specified approximately in the same way by a rated
knee-point e.m.f. Eknee (Ek for class PX, EkneeBS for class X and the limiting secondary
voltage Ual for TPS). The value of the Eknee is lower than the corresponding Eal
according to IEC 60044-6. It is not possible to give a general relation between the
Eknee and the Eal but normally the Eknee is approximately 80 % of the Eal. Therefore,
the CTs according to class PX, X and TPS must have a rated knee-point e.m.f.
Eknee that fulfills the following:
Eknee Ek EkneeBS Ual > 0.8 (maximum of Ealreq)
3.1.7.3
(Equation 9)
Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE

Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE are partly specified in different ways.
A rated secondary terminal voltage UANSI is specified for a CT of class C. UANSI is
the secondary terminal voltage the CT will deliver to a standard burden at 20 times
rated secondary current without exceeding 10 % ratio correction. There are a number
of standardized UANSI values e.g. UANSI is 400 V for a C400 CT. A corresponding
rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. EalANSI can be estimated as follows:
E a lANSI = 20 I s n R C T + U A NSI = 20 I s n R C T + 20 Is n Z b ANSI
(Equation 10)
where:
ZbANSI
The impedance (i.e. complex quantity) of the standard ANSI burden for the specific C class
(W)
UANSI
The secondary terminal voltage for the specific C class (V)
The CTs according to class C must have a calculated rated equivalent limiting
secondary e.m.f. EalANSI that fulfills the following:
E alANSI > max imum of E alreq
(Equation 11)
A CT according to ANSI/IEEE is also specified by the knee-point voltage

UkneeANSI that is graphically defined from an excitation curve. The knee-point voltage
UkneeANSI normally has a lower value than the knee-point e.m.f. according to IEC and
BS. UkneeANSI can approximately be estimated to 75 % of the corresponding Eal
according to IEC 60044 6. Therefore, the CTs according to ANSI/IEEE must have a
knee-point voltage UkneeANSI that fulfills the following:
EkneeANSI > 0.75 (maximum of Ealreq)
46
Application manual
(Equation 12)
REB 670
Section 3
Requirements
3.2
SNTP server requirements

The SNTP server to be used shall be connected to the local network, i.e. not more
than 4-5 switches/routers away from the IED. The SNTP server shall be dedicated
for its task, or at least equipped with at real-time operating system, i.e. not a PC with
SNTP server software. The SNTP server shall be stable, i.e. either synchronized from
a stable source like GPS, or local i.e. without synchronization. Using a local SNTP
server i.e. without synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant
configuration is not recommended.
REB 670
Application manual
47
48
Section 4
IED application
Section 4
IED application
About this chapter
This chapter describes the use of the included software functions in the IED. The
chapter discuss application possibilities and gives guidelines for calculating settings
for a particular application.
4.1
General IED application

REB 670 is designed for the selective, reliable and fast differential protection of
busbars, T-connections and meshed corners. REB 670 can be used for protection of
single and double busbar with or without transfer bus, double circuit breaker or oneand-half circuit breaker stations. The IED is applicable for the protection of medium
voltage (MV), high voltage (HV) and extra high voltage (EHV) installations at a
power system frequency of 50Hz or 60Hz. The IED can detect all types of internal
phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults in solidly earthed or low impedance
earthed power systems, as well as all internal multi-phase faults in isolated or highimpedance earthed power systems.
REB 670 has very low requirements on the main current transformers (i.e. CTs) and
no interposing current transformers are necessary. For all applications, it is possible
to include and mix main CTs with 1A and 5A rated secondary current within the same
protection zone. Typically, CTs with up to 10:1 ratio difference can be used within
the same differential protection zone. Adjustment for different main CT ratios is
achieved numerically by a parameter setting.
The numerical, low-impedance differential protection function is designed for fast
and selective protection for faults within protected zone. All connected CT inputs are
provided with a restraint feature. The minimum pick-up value for the differential
current is set to give a suitable sensitivity for all internal faults. For busbar protection
applications typical setting value for the minimum differential operating current is
from 50% to 150% of the biggest CT. This setting is made directly in primary amperes.
The operating slope for the differential operating characteristic is fixed to 53% in the
algorithm.
The fast tripping time of the low-impedance differential protection function is
especially advantageous for power system networks with high fault levels or where
fast fault clearance is required for power system stability.
The advanced open CT detection algorithm detects instantly the open CT secondary
circuits and prevents differential protection operation without any need for additional
check zone.
REB 670
Application manual
49
Section 4
IED application
Differential protection zones in REB 670 include a sensitive operational level. This
sensitive operational level is designed to be able to detect internal busbar
earthground faults in low impedance earthed power systems (i.e. power systems
where the earth-fault current is limited to a certain level, typically between 300A and
2000A primary by a neutral point reactor or resistor). Alternatively this sensitive
level can be used when high sensitivity is required from busbar differential protection
(i.e. energizing of the bus via long line).
Overall operating characteristic of the differential function in REB 670 is shown in
the following figure.
Id [Primary Amps]
Sensitive
differential
protection
I in
I d=
Operate
region
Differential protection
operation characteristic
Diff Oper Level
Sensitive Oper Level
Sens Iin Block

s=0.53
Iin [Primary Amps]

en06000142.vsd
Figure 19:
REB 670 operating characteristic
Integrated overall check zone feature, independent from any disconnector position,
is available. It can be used in double busbar stations to secure stability of the busbar
differential protection in case of entirely wrong status indication of busbar
disconnector in any of the feeder bays.
Flexible, software based dynamic Zone Selection enables easy and fast adaptation to
the most common substation arrangements such as single busbar with or without
transfer bus, double busbar with or without transfer bus, one-and-a-half
breakerstations, double busbar-double breaker stations, ring busbars, etc. The
software based dynamic Zone Selections ensures:
50
Dynamic linking of measured CT currents to the appropriate differential

protection zone as required by substation topology
Efficient merging of the two differential zones when required by substation
topology (i.e. load-transfer)
Selective operation of busbar differential protection ensures tripping only of
circuit breakers connected to the faulty zone
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Correct marshaling of backup-trip commands from internally integrated or

external circuit breaker failure protections to all surrounding circuit breakers
Easy incorporation of bus-section and/or bus-coupler bays (i.e. tie-breakers) with
one or two sets of CTs into the protection scheme
Disconnector and/or circuit breaker status supervision
Advanced Zone Selection logic accompanied by optionally available end-fault and/

or circuit breaker failure protections ensure minimum possible tripping time and
selectivity for faults within the blind spot or the end zone between bay CT and bay
circuit breaker. Therefore REB 670 offers best possible coverage for such faults in
feeder and bus-section/bus-coupler bays.
Optionally available circuit breaker failure protection, one for every CT input into
REB 670, offers secure local back-up protection for the circuit breakers in the station.
Optionally available four-stage, non-directional overcurrent protections, one for
every CT input into REB 670, provide remote backup functionality for connected
feeders and remote-end stations.
It is normal practice to have just one set of busbar protection relay per busbar.
Nevertheless some utilities do apply two independent busbar protection relays per
zone of protection. REB 670 IED fits both solutions.
A simplified bus differential protection for multi-phase faults and earth faults can be
obtained by using a single, one-phase REB 670 IED with external auxiliary
summation current transformers.
Serial data communication is via optical connections to ensure immunity against
disturbances.
The wide application flexibility makes this product an excellent choice for both new
installations and the refurbishment of existing installations.
4.2
Analog inputs
4.2.1
Application
In order to get correct measurement results as well as correct protection operations
the analog input channels must be configured and properly set. For power measuring
and all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must
be properly defined. The measuring and protection algorithms in IED 670 are using
primary system quantities and the set values are done in primary quantities as well.
Therefore it is extremely important to properly set the data about the connected current
and voltage transformers.
In order to make Service Values reading easier it is possible to define a reference
PhaseAngleRef. Then this analog channels phase angle will be always fixed to zero
degree and all other angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input.
REB 670
Application manual
51
Section 4
IED application
During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be freely
change in order to facilitate testing and service values reading.
VT inputs are sometimes not available depending on ordered type of
Transformer Input Module (TRM).
4.2.2
Setting guidelines
The available setting parameters related to analog inputs are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration
made in PCM 600.
4.2.2.1
Setting of the phase reference channel

All phase angles are calculated in relation to a defined reference. An appropriate
analog input channel is selected and used as phase reference. The parameter
PhaseAngleRef defines the analog channel that is used as phase angle reference
Example
The setting PhaseAngleRef=7 shall be used if a phase-to-earth voltage (usually the

L1 phase-to-earth voltage connected to VT channel number 7 of the analog card) is
selected to be the phase reference.
Setting of current channels
The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. Unless
indicated otherwise, the main CTs are supposed to be star connected and can be
connected with the star point to the object or from the object. This information must
be set to the IED. The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A positive
value of current, power etc means that the quantity has the direction into the object
and a negative value means direction out from the object. For directional functions
the direction into the object is defined as Forward and the direction out from the object
is defined as Reverse. See figure 20
52
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Reverse
Forward
Forward
Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object
Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"ToObject"
Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"FromObject"
en05000456.vsd
Figure 20:
Internal convention of the directionality in IED 670.
With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CTStarPoint set to FromObject or

ToObject, a positive quantities always flowing towards the object and a direction
defined as Forward always is looking towards the object. The following examples
show the principle.
Example 1
Two IEDs used for protection of two objects
Line
Ip
Transformer
Ip
Ip
Line
Reverse
Is
Transformer
protection
Setting of current input:

Set parameter
CTStarPoint with
Transformer as
reference object.
Correct setting is
"ToObject"
Forward
Is

Set parameter
CTStarPoint with
Transformer as
reference object.
Correct setting is
"ToObject"
Line protection

Set parameter
CTStarPoint with
Line as
reference object.
Correct setting is
"FromObject"
en05000753.vsd
Figure 21:
REB 670
Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters in IED 670
Application manual
53
Section 4
IED application
The figure 21 shows the most normal case where the objects have their own CTs. The
settings for CT direction shall be done according to the figure. To protect the line the
direction of the directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward.
This means that the protection is looking towards the line.
Example 2
Two IEDs used for protection of two objects and sharing a CT
Transformer
Line
Reverse
Transformer
protection

Set parameter
CTStarPoint with
Transformer as
reference object.
Correct setting is
"ToObject"

Set parameter
CTStarPoint with
Transformer as
reference object.
Correct setting is
"ToObject"
Forward
Line protection

Set parameter
CTStarPoint with
Line as
reference object.
Correct setting is
"FromObject"
en05000460.vsd
Figure 22:
Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters in IED 670.
This example is similar to example 1 but the transformer is feeding just one line and
the line protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. The CT
direction is set with different reference objects for the two IEDs though it is the same
current from the same CT that is feeding two IEDs. With these settings the directional
functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward to look towards the line.
Example 3
One IED used to protect two objects
54
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Transformer
Line
Forward
for directional
line functions
Transformer and
Line protection

Set parameter
CTStarPoint with
Transformer as
reference object.
Correct setting is
"ToObject"
Reverse

Set parameter
CTStarPoint with
Transformer as
reference object.
Correct setting is
"ToObject"
en05000461.vsd
Figure 23:
Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters in IED 670
In this example one IED includes both transformer and line protection and the line
protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. For both current input
channels the CT direction is set with the transformer as reference object. This means
that the direction Forward for the line protection is towards the transformer. To look
towards the line the direction of the directional functions of the line protection must
be set to Reverse. The direction Forward/Reverse is related to the reference object
that is the transformer in this case.
When a function is set to Reverse and shall protect an object in reverse direction it
shall be noted that some directional functions are not symmetrical regarding the reach
in forward and reverse direction. It is in first hand the reach of the directional criteria
that can differ. Normally it is not any limitation but it is advisable to have it in mind
and check if it is acceptable for the application in question.
If the IED has a sufficient number of analog current inputs an alternative solution is
shown in figure 24. The same currents are fed to two separate groups of inputs and
the line and transformer protection functions are configured to the different inputs.
The CT direction for the current channels to the line protection is set with the line as
reference object and the directional functions of the line protection shall be set to
Forward to protect the line.
REB 670
Application manual
55
Section 4
IED application
Transformer
Line
Reverse
Transformer and
Line protection
Setting of current input

for transformer functions:
Set parameter
CTStarPoint with
Transformer as
reference object.
Correct setting is
"ToObject"

for transformer functions:
Set parameter
CTStarPoint with
Transformer as
reference object.
Correct setting is
"ToObject"
Forward
for directional
line functions

for line functions:
Set parameter
CTStarPoint with
Line as
reference object.
Correct setting is
"FromObject"
en05000462.vsd
Figure 24:
56
Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters in IED 670.
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Busbar
Busbar
Protection
1
en06000196.vsd
Figure 25:
Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters for REB 670
For busbar protection it is possible to set the CTStarPoint parameters in two ways.
The first solution will be to use busbar as a reference object. In that case for all CT
inputs marked with 1 in figure 25, set CTStarPoint=ToObject, and for all CT inputs
marked with 2 in figure 25, set CTStarPoint=FromObject.
The second solution will be to use all connected bays as reference objects. In that
case for all CT inputs marked with 1 in figure 25, set CTStarPoint=FromObject, and
for all CT inputs marked with 2 in figure 25, set CTStarPoint=ToObject.
Regardless which one of the above two options is selected busbar differential
protection will behave correctly.
REB 670
Application manual
57
Section 4
IED application
The main CT ratios must also be set. This is done by setting the two parameters
CTsec and CTprim for each current channel. For a 1000/1 A CT the following setting
shall be used: CTprim=1000 (value in A) CTsec=1 (value in A).
Examples how to connect, configure and set CT inputs for most

commonly used CT connections
IPri
Figure 26 defines the marking of current transformers terminals commonly used

around the world:
P2
(H2)
P1
(H1)
ISec
S2 (X2)
S1 (X1)
S2 (X2)
x
P2
(H2)
a)
S1 (X1)
x
P1
(H1)
b)
c)
en06000641.vsd
Figure 26:
Commonly used markings of CT terminals
Where:
a)
is symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a dot indicates
the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (i.e. positive) polarity
b) and c)
are equivalent symbols and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for CTs. Note that
for this two cases the CT polarity marking is correct!
It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices rated
secondary current of a CT has typically one of the following values:
1A
5A
However in some cases the following rated secondary currents are as well used:
2A
10A
IED 670 fully supports all of these rated secondary values.

It is recommended to:
58
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
use 1A rated CT input into IED 670 in order to connect CTs with
1A and 2A secondary rating
use 5A rated CT input into IED 670 in order to connect CTs with
5A and 10A secondary rating
Example how to connect starwye connected three-phase CT set to IED

670
Figure 27 gives an example how to connect the star connected three-phase CT set to
IED 670. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make
this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED
670.
L3
IED 670
IL3
L2
IL2
IL1
L1
3
1
IL1
CT 600/5
Star Connected
4
1
IL2
IL3
IR
#3Ph I Star
AI01 (I)
3
4
AI02 (I)
5
6
AI03 (I)
7
8
AI04 (I)
9
10
AI05 (I)
11
12
AI06 (I)
#IL1
#IL2
#IL3
#IR
#2
Protected Object
en06000642.vsd
Figure 27:
Star connected three-phase CT set with star point towards the protected object
Where:
1)
shows how to connect three individual phase currents from star connected three-phase CT
set to three CT inputs in IED 670.
2)
shows how to connect residual/neutral current from the three-phase CT set to the fourth inputs
in IED 670. It shall be noted that if this connection is not made the IED 670 will still calculate
this current internally by vectorial summation of the three individual phase currents.
REB 670
Application manual
59
Section 4
IED application
3)
is TRM module where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these
current inputs the following setting values shall be entered.
CTprim=600A
CTsec=5A
CTStarPoint=ToObject
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set
in this example will have no influence on the measured currents (i.e. currents are already
measured towards the protected object).
4)
are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect these three current
inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 6). Depending on type
of functions which need this current information, more then one preprocessing block might
be connected in parallel to these three CT inputs.
5)
is a connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect the residual/neutral
current input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 6). Note that this
connection in SMT shall not be done if the residual/neutral current is not connected to IED
670. In that case the pre-processing block will calculate it by vectorial summation of the three
individual phase currents.
6)
Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:
fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

harmonic content for all four input channels
positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions
within IED 670, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration
tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.
Another alternative is to have the star point of the three-phase CT set as shown in
figure 28:
60
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
L2
L1
L3
IED 670
IL3
IL2
IL1
6
3
IR
IL3
IL2
CT 800/1
Star Connected
IL1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
#3Ph I Star
AI01 (I)
#IL1
#IL2
#IL3
AI02 (I)
#IR
#2
AI03 (I)
AI04 (I)
AI05 (I)
AI06 (I)
Protected Object
en06000644.vsd
Figure 28:
Star connected three-phase CT set with star point from the protected
object
Please note that in this case everything is done in a similar way as in the above
described example, except that for all used current inputs on the TRM the following
setting parameters shall be entered:
CTprim=800A
CTsec=1A
CTStarPoint=FromObject
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter
as set in this example will invert the measured currents (i.e. turn the currents by 180)
in order to insure that the within IED 670 the currents are measured towards the
protected object.
Example how to connect delta connected three-phase CT set to IED

670
Figure 29 gives an example how to connect the delta connected three-phase CT set
to IED 670. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make
670.
REB 670
Application manual
61
Section 4
IED application
L1
L2
L3
IED 670
IL3
IL2
IL1
5
2
3
1
CT 600/5
in Delta
DAB Connected
IL1-IL2
IL2-IL3
IL3-IL1
1
2
AI01 (I)
#IL1-IL2
3
4
AI02 (I)
#IL2-IL3
#IL3-IL1
5
6
#3Ph I Delta
AI03 (I)
#Not used
#2
7
8
AI04 (I)
9
10
AI05 (I)
11
12
AI06 (I)
Protected Object
en06000645.vsd
Figure 29:
Delta DAB connected three-phase CT set

Where:
1)
shows how to connect three individual phase currents from delta connected three-phase CT
set to three CT inputs in IED 670.
2)
CTprim=600/1.732=346A
CTsec=5A
62
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
3)
are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect these three current
of functions which need this current information, more then one preprocessing block might
be connected in parallel to these three CT inputs.
4)
shows that the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block shall not be connected
in SMT.
5)

quantities)
set accordingly.
Another alternative is ti have the delta connected CT set as shown in figure 30:
L2
L1
L3
IED 670
IL3
IL2
IL1
5
2
3
CT 800/1
in Delta
DCA Connected
IL1-IL3
IL2-IL1
IL3-IL2
1
2
AI01 (I)
3
4
5
6
AI02 (I)
AI03 (I)
#3Ph I Delta
#IL1-IL2
#IL2-IL3
#IL3-IL1
#Not used
#2
7
8
AI04 (I)
4
9
10
AI05 (I)
11
12
AI06 (I)
Protected Object
en06000646.vsd
Figure 30:
Delta DAC connected three-phase CT set
Please note that in this case everything is done in a similar way as in the above
described example, except that for all used current inputs on the TRM the following
setting parameters shall be entered:
REB 670
Application manual
63
Section 4
IED application
CTprim=800/1.732=462A
CTsec=1A
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter
as set in this example will have no influence on the measured currents (i.e. currents
are already measured towards the protected object).
Example how to connect single-phase CT to IED 670
Figure 31 gives an example how to connect the single-phase CT to IED 670. It as

well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement
available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED 670.
IED 670
Protected Object
2
1
2
L1
L2
L3
AI01 (I)
3
4
AI02 (I)
5
6
AI03 (I)
CT 1000/1
1
INP
AI04 (I)
#Not used
#Not used
9
10
#NP Current
AI05 (I)
#Not used
#INP
11
INP
12
#2
AI06 (I)
INP
en06000647.vsd
Figure 31:
64
Connections for single-phase CT input
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Where:
1)
shows how to connect single-phase CT input in IED 670.
2)
For connection a) shown in figure 31:
CTprim=1000A
CTsec=1A
For connection b) shown in figure 31:
CTprim=1000A
CTsec=1A
in this example will invert the measured currents (i.e. turn the currents by 180o) in order to
insure that the within IED 670 the currents are measured towards the protected object.
3)
shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not
connected in SMT tool.
4)
shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect this CT input to
the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5).
5)

quantities)
set accordingly.
Setting of voltage channels
As the IED uses primary system quantities the main VT ratios must be known. This
is done by setting the two parameters VTsec and VTprim for each voltage channel.
The phase-to-phase value can be used even if each channel is connected to a phaseto-earth voltage from the VT.
Example
Consider a VT with the following data:
132kV 110V
3
3
REB 670
Application manual
(Equation 13)
65
Section 4
IED application
The following setting should be used: VTprim=132 (value in kV) VTsec=110 (value
in V)
Examples how to connect, configure and set VT inputs for most

commonly used VT connections
Figure 32 defines the marking of voltage transformers terminals commonly used

around the world.
UPri
USec
a)
A
(H1)
a
(X1)
A
(H1)
da
(X1)
A
(H1)
a
(X1)
N
(H2)
n
(X2)
N
(H2)
dn
(X2)
B
(H2)
b
(X2)
b)
c)
d)
en06000591.vsd
Figure 32:
Commonly used markings of VT terminals
Where:
a)
is symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a dot indicates
the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (i.e. positive) polarity
b)
is equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-earth
connected VT
c)
is equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for open delta
connected VT
d)
is equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-phase
connected VT
It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices rated
secondary voltage of a VT has typically one of the following values:
100 V
110 V
115 V
120 V
IED 670 fully supports all of these values and most of them will be shown in the
following examples.
Examples how to connect three phase-to-earthground connected VTs

to IED 670
Figure 33 gives an example how to connect the three phase-to ground connected VTs
670.
66
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
L1
IED 670
L2
L3
66kV
3
66kV
3
2
3
1
110V
3
13
14
AI07 (I)
#3Ph-E VTs
15
16
17
AI08 (U)
18
AI09 (U)
#UL2
19
20
110V
3
#UL3
#Not used
AI10 (U)
#1
21
22
AI11 (U)
23
24
66kV
3
#UL1
AI12 (U)
110V
3
en06000599.vsd
Figure 33:
Three phase-to-ground connected VTs

Where:
1)
shows how to connect three secondary phase-to-earth voltages to three VT inputs in IED 670
2)
is TRM module where these three voltage inputs are located. It shall be noted that for these
three voltage inputs the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim=66 kV
VTsec= 110 V
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio
of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual VT.
66
110
66
=
3
110
3
REB 670
Application manual
67
Section 4
IED application
3)
are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect these three voltage
of functions which need this voltage information, more then one preprocessing block might be
connected in parallel to these three VT inputs
4)
shows that in this example the fourth (i.e. residual) input channel of the preprocessing block
is not connected in SMT tool. Thus the preprocessing block will automatically calculate 3Uo
inside by vectorial sum from the three phase to ground voltages connected to the first three
input channels of the same preprocessing block. Alternatively the fourth input channel can be
connected to open delta VT input, as shown in figure 35.
5)

quantities)
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
IED 670, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool.
For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
However the following settings shall be set as shown here:
VBase=66 kV (i.e. rated Ph-Ph voltage)
set accordingly.
Example how to connect two phase-to-phase connected VTs to IED

670
Figure 34 gives an example how to connect the two phase-to-phase connected VTs
670. It shall be noted that this VT connection is only used on lower voltage levels
(i.e. rated primary voltage below 40 kV).
68
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
L1
L2
L3
13.8kV
120V
13.8kV
IED 670
120V
5
3
13
14
AI07 (I)
15
16
#3Ph-Ph VTs
AI08 (U)
#UL1L2
#UL2L3
17
18
AI09 (U)
20
#1
AI10 (U)
21
22
#UL3L1
#Not Used
19
AI11 (U)
23
24
AI12 (U)
en06000600.vsd
Figure 34:
Two phase-to-phase connected VTs

Where:
1)
shows how to connect secondary side of two phase-to-phase VTs to three VT inputs in IED
670
2)
is TRM module where these three voltage inputs are located. It shall be noted that for these
three voltage inputs the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim=13.8 kV
VTsec=120 V
Please note that inside IED 670 only ratio of these two parameters is used.
REB 670
Application manual
69
Section 4
IED application
3)
are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect these three
voltage inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 5). Depending
on type of functions which need this voltage information, more then one preprocessing block
might be connected in parallel to these three VT inputs
4)
shows that in this example the fourth (i.e. residual) input channel of the preprocessing block
is not connected in SMT tool
5)

quantities)
However the following settings shall be set as shown here:
ConnectionType=Ph-Ph
VBase=13.8 kV
set accordingly.
Example how to connect the open delta VT to IED 670 for high
impedance earthedgrounded or unearthedungrounded
Figure 35 gives an example how to connect the open delta VT to IED 670 for high
impedance grounded or ungrounded power systems. It shall be noted that this type
of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional to 3Uo3Vo to the IED.
In case of a solid ground fault close to the VT location the primary value of
3Uo3Vo will be equal to:
3Uo =
3 U Ph - Ph = 3 U Ph - E
(Equation 15)
The primary rated voltage of such VT is always equal to UPh-E. Therefore, three series
connected VT secondary windings will give the secondary voltage equal to three
times the individual VT secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of
such open delta VTs quite often has a secondary rated voltage equal to one third of
the rated phase-to-phase VT secondary voltage (i.e. 110/3V in this particular
example). Figure 35 as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order
to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions
within IED 670.
70
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
L1
IED 670
L2
L3
6.6kV
3
2
13
14
110V
3
AI07 (I)
15
16
AI08 (U)
17
18
6.6kV
3
110V
3
AI09 (U)
19
20
AI10 (U)
22
#Not Used
#Not Used
21
+3Uo
#3Uo Voltage
AI11 (U)
#Not Used
#3Uo
23
24
#1
AI12 (U)
6.6kV
3
110V
3
en06000601.vsd
Figure 35:
Open delta connected VT in high impedance earthed power system

Where:
1)
shows how to connect the secondary side of open delta VT to one VT input in IED 670.
Please note that +3Uo shall be connected to the IED!
2)
is TRM module where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input
the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim =
VT sec = 3
3 6.6 = 11.43kV
110
3
= 110V
of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open delta VT.
3 6.6
110
6.6
=
3
110
REB 670
Application manual
71
Section 4
IED application
3)
4)
shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect this voltage input
to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5).
5)

quantities)
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall
be set accordingly.
Example how to connect the open delta VT to IED 670 for low
impedance earthedgrounded or solidly earthedgrounded power
systems
Figure 36 gives an example how to connect the open delta VT to IED 670 for low
impedance grounded or solidly grounded power systems. It shall be noted that this
type of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional to 3Uo to the IED.
In case of a solid ground fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Uo will
be equal to:
3Uo =
U Ph - Ph
3
= U Ph - E
(Equation 19)
The primary rated voltage of such VT is always equal to UPh-E Therefore, three series
connected VT secondary windings will give the secondary voltage equal only to one
individual VT secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of such open
delta VTs quite often has a secondary rated voltage close to rated phase-to-phase VT
secondary voltage (i.e. 115V or (115/1.732)V as in this particular example). Figure
36 as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED
670.
72
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
L1
IED 670
L2
L3
138 kV
3
138kV
3
2
13
14
115V
3
AI07 (I)
15
16
17
18
115V
3
19
20
AI08 (U)
AI09 (U)
#3Uo Voltage
#Not used
AI10 (U)
#Not used
21
+3Uo
22
#Not used
AI11 (U)
#3Uo
23
24
#1
AI12 (U)
138 kV
3
115V
3
en06000602.vsd
Figure 36:
Open delta connected VT in low impedance earthed power system

Where:
1)
shows how to connect the secondary side of open delta VT to one VT input in IED 670.
Please note that +3Uo shall be connected to the IED!
2)
is TRM module where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage
input the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim =
VT sec =
138
3
115
3
= 138kV
= 115V
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the
ratio of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open delta VT.
138
115
138
=
3
115
3
REB 670
Application manual
73
Section 4
IED application
3)
4)
shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect this voltage
input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5).
5)
preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental
frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as
reference for sequence quantities)
within IED 670, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the
configuration tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to
the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only
for IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters
DFTReference shall be set accordingly.
Example how to connect the neutral point VT to IED 670
Figure 37 gives an example how to connect the neutral point VT to IED 670. It shall
be noted that this type of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional
toUo to the IED.
In case of a solid ground fault in high impedance grounded or ungrounded systems
the primary value of Uo voltage will be equal to:
Uo =
Vo =
U Ph - Ph
3
VPh - Ph
3
= U Ph - E
= VPh - Gnd
(Equation 23)
Figure 37 as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED
670.
74
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
IED 670
Protected Object
2
13
14
L1
L2
L3
AI07 (I)
15
16
AI08 (I)
17
18
19
20
AI09 (I)
3
AI10 (U)
#Not used
#Not used
21
22
#NP Voltage
AI11 (U)
#Not used
#UNP
23
Uo
24
#1
AI12 (U)
6.6 kV
3
Figure 37:
100V
en06000603.vsd
Neutral point connected VT

Where:
1)
shows how to connect the secondary side of neutral point VT to one VT input in IED 670.
Please note that +Uo shall be connected to the IED!
2)
is TRM module where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input
the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim =
6.6
3
= 3.81kV
VT sec = 100V
of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of the neutral point VT.
REB 670
Application manual
75
Section 4
IED application
3)
4)
shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect this voltage input
to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5).
5)
preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:

quantities)
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
IED 670, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool.
For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
set accordingly.
4.2.3
Setting parameters
The available setting parameters related to analog inputs are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration
made in PCM 600.
Table 1:
Parameter
PhaseAngleRef
Table 2:
Parameter
General settings for the AISERVAL (AISV-) function

Range
1 - 24
Step
1
Default
1
Unit
Description
Ch
Reference channel
for phase angle
presentation
Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN12I (TA40-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec1
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec2
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
76
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
CTprim2
Range
1 - 99999
Step
1
3000
Description
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec3
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec4
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec5
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec6
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec7
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim7
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint8
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec8
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim8
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
REB 670
Application manual
77
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CTStarPoint9
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec9
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim9
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint10
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec10
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim10
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint11
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec11
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim11
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint12
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec12
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim12
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
4.3
Local human-machine interface
4.3.1
Human machine interface

The local human machine interface is available in a small, and a medium sized
model. The principle difference between the two is the size of the LCD. The small
size LCD can display seven line of text and the medium size LCD can display the
single line diagram with up to 15 objects on each page.
Up to 12 SLD pages can be defined, depending on the product capability.
The local human machine interface is equipped with an LCD that is used among other
things to locally display the following crucial information:
78
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Connection of each bay with respect to the two differential protection zones and
the check zone. The user can freely set in PST the individual bay names in order
to make easy identification of each primary bay for station personnel
Status of each individual primary switchgear device (i.e. open, closed, 00 as
intermediate and 11 as bad state). The user can freely set in PCM 600 the
individual primary switchgear object names in order to make easy identification
of each switchgear device for station personnel
The local human machine interface is equipped with an LCD that can display the
single line diagram with up to 15 objects.
The local human-machine interface is simple and easy to understand the whole front
plate is divided into zones, each of them with a well-defined functionality:
Status indication LEDs

Alarm indication LEDs which consists of 15 LEDs (6 red and 9 yellow) with
user printable label. All LEDs are configurable from the PCM 600 tool
Liquid crystal display (LCD)
Keypad with push buttons for control and navigation purposes, switch for
selection between local and remote control and reset
An isolated RJ45 communication port
Figure 38:
REB 670
Example of medium graphic HMI
Application manual
79
Section 4
IED application
Figure 39:
Bay to zone connection example
1 User settable bay name

2 Internally used bay FB
3 Connections to internal zones
80
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Figure 40:
Example of status of primary switchgear objects
1 User settable switchgear names

2 Switchgear object status
4.3.2
LHMI related functions
4.3.2.1
Introduction
The adaptation of the LHMI to the application and user preferences is made with:
function block LHMI (LocalHMI)

function block HLED (LEDMonitor)
setting parameters
4.3.2.2
General setting parameters
REB 670
Application manual
81
Section 4
IED application
Table 3:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the localHMI (LHM1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Language
English
OptionalLanguage
English
Local HMI language
DisplayTimeout
10 - 120
10
60
Min
Local HMI display

timeout
AutoRepeat
Off
On
On
Activation of autorepeat (On) or not

(Off)
ContrastLevel
-10 - 20
Contrast level for

display
DefaultScreen
0-0
Default screen
EvListSrtOrder
Latest on top
Oldest on top
Latest on top
Sort order of event list
SymbolFont
IEC
ANSI
IEC
Symbol font for Single

Line Diagram
4.3.3
Indication LEDs
4.3.3.1
Introduction
The function block HLED (LEDMonitor) controls and supplies information about
the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of HLED are
configured with the PCM 600 tool. The input signal for each LED is selected
individually with the PCM 600 Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). LEDs (number 16) for
trip indications are red and LEDs (number 715) for start indications are yellow.
Each indication LED on the LHMI can be set individually to operate in six different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or
restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as
signalling system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality.
The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flickering (-F). For details, refer to
Technical reference manual.
4.3.3.2
Setting parameters
Table 4:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation mode for

the LED function
tRestart
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.0
Defines the
disturbance length
tMax
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.0
Maximum time for the

definition of a
disturbance
82
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SeqTypeLED1
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 1
SeqTypeLED2
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 2
SeqTypeLED3
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 3
SeqTypeLED4
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 4
SeqTypeLED5
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 5
SeqTypeLED6
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 6
SeqTypeLED7
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 7
SeqTypeLED8
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
sequence type for

LED 8
SeqTypeLED9
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 9
REB 670
Application manual
83
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SeqTypeLED10
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 10
SeqTypeLED11
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 11
SeqTypeLED12
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 12
SeqTypeLED13
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 13
SeqTypeLED14
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 14
SeqTypeLED15
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for

LED 15
4.4
Basic IED functions
4.4.1
Self supervision with internal event list
4.4.1.1
Application
The protection and control IEDs have a complex design with many included
functions. The included self-supervision function and the INTernal signals function
block provide good supervision of the IED. The fault signals make it easier to analyze
and locate a fault.
Both hardware and software supervision is included and it is also possible to indicate
possible faults through a hardware contact on the power supply module and/or
through the software communication.
84
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Internal events are generated by the built-in supervisory functions. The supervisory
functions supervise the status of the various modules in the IED and, in case of failure,
a corresponding event is generated. Similarly, when the failure is corrected, a
corresponding event is generated.
Apart from the built-in supervision of the various modules, events are also generated
when the status changes for the:
built-in real time clock (in operation/out of order).

external time synchronization (in operation/out of order).
Events are also generated:
whenever any setting in the IED is changed.
The internal events are time tagged with a resolution of 1 ms and stored in a list. The
list can store up to 40 events. The list is based on the FIFO principle, that is, when it
is full, the oldest event is overwritten. The list cannot be cleared and its content cannot
be modified.
The list of internal events provides valuable information, which can be used during
commissioning and fault tracing.
The information can only be retrieved with the aid of a Station Monitoring System
(SMS). The PC can be connected either to the port at the front or at the rear of the
IED.
4.4.1.2
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
4.4.2
Time synchronization
4.4.2.1
Application
Use time synchronization to achieve a common time base for the IEDs in a protection
and control system. This makes comparison of events and disturbance data between
all IEDs in the system possible.
Time-tagging of internal events and disturbances are an excellent help when
evaluating faults. Without time synchronization, only the events within the IED can
be compared to one another. With time synchronization, events and disturbances
within the entire station, and even between line ends, can be compared at evaluation.
In the IED 670 IED, the internal time can be synchronized from a number of sources:
REB 670
Application manual
85
Section 4
IED application
BIN (Binary Minute Pulse)

GPS
SNTP
Out of these, LON and SPA contains two types of synchronization messages:
Coarse time messages are sent every minute and contain complete date and time,
i.e. year, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond.
Fine time messages are sent every second and comprises only seconds and
milliseconds.
The setting tells the IED which of these that shall be used to synchronize the IED.
It is possible to set several time-sources, i.e. for instance both SNTP and GPS, and
in that case the IED will automatically choose the time-source that will provide the
best accuracy. At a given point in time, only one time-source will be used.
4.4.2.2
Setting guidelines
System time
The time is set with years, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond.
Synchronization
The setting parameters for the real-time clock with external time synchronization
(TIME) are set via the local HMI or the PCM 600 tool.
TimeSynch
When the source of time synchronization is selected on the local HMI, the parameter
is called TimeSynch. The time synchronization source can also be set from the PCM
600 tool. The setting alternatives are:
FineSyncSource which can have the following values:
Off
SPA
LON
BIN (Binary Minute Pulse)
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
CoarseSyncSrc which can have the following values:
86
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Off
SPA
LON
SNTP
DNP
The function input to be used for minute-pulse synchronization is called TIMEMINSYNC.

The system time can be set manually, either via the local HMI or via any of the
communication ports. The time synchronization fine tunes the clock (seconds and
milliseconds).
4.4.2.3
Setting parameters
Path in local HMI: Setting/Time
Path in PCM 600: Settings/Time/Synchronization
Table 5:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CoarseSyncSrc
Off
SPA
LON
SNTP
Off
Coarse time
synchronization
source
FineSyncSource
Off
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
Off
Fine time
synchronization
source
SyncMaster
Off
SNTP-Server
Off
Activate IEDas
synchronization
master
TimeAdjustRate
Slow
Fast
Fast
Adjust rate for time

synchronization
Table 6:
Parameter
REB 670
Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function
General settings for the TimeSynchBIN (TBIN-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ModulePosition
3 - 16
Hardware position of
IO module for time
synchronization
BinaryInput
1 - 16
Binary input number

for time
synchronization
BinDetection
PositiveEdge
NegativeEdge
PositiveEdge
Positive or negative
edge detection
Application manual
87
Section 4
IED application
Table 7:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ServerIP-Add
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Server IP-address
RedServIP-Add
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Redundant server IPaddress
Table 8:
Parameter
88
General settings for the TimeSynchSNTP (TSNT-) function
General settings for the DaySumDSTBegin (TSTB-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
March
Month in year when

daylight time starts
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Day in week when

WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
Week in month when

UTCTimeOfDay
0 - 86400
3600
UTC Time of day in

seconds when
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 9:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
October
Month in year when

daylight time ends
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Day in week when

daylight time ends
WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
Week in month when

daylight time ends
UTCTimeOfDay
0 - 86400
3600
UTC Time of day in

seconds when
daylight time ends
Table 10:
Parameter
NoHalfHourUTC
Table 11:
Parameter
REB 670
General settings for the DaySumTimeEnd (TSTE-) function
General settings for the TimeZone (TZON-) function

Range
-24 - 24
Step
1
Default
0
Unit
-
Description
Number of half-hours
from UTC
Basic general settings for the TimeSynchIRIGB (TIRI-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SynchType
BNC
Opto
Opto
Type of
synchronization
TimeDomain
LocalTime
UTC
LocalTime
Time domain
Encoding
IRIG-B
1344
1344TZ
IRIG-B
Type of encoding
TimeZoneAs1344
MinusTZ
PlusTZ
PlusTZ
Time zone as in 1344

standard
Application manual
89
Section 4
IED application
4.4.3
Parameter setting groups
4.4.3.1
Application
Six sets of settings are available to optimize IED operation for different system
conditions. By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the
human-machine interface or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable
IED that can cope with a variety of system scenarios.
Different conditions in networks with different voltage levels require highly adaptable
protection and control units to best provide for dependability, security and selectivity
requirements. Protection units operate with a higher degree of availability, especially,
if the setting values of their parameters are continuously optimized according to the
conditions in the power system.
Operational departments can plan for different operating conditions in the primary
equipment. The protection engineer can prepare the necessary optimized and pretested settings in advance for different protection functions. Six different groups of
setting parameters are available in the IED. Any of them can be activated through the
different programmable binary inputs by means of external or internal control signals.
A function block, SGC, (available in CAP 531) defines how many setting groups are
used. Setting is done with parameter MAXSETGR and shall be set to the required
value for each application. Only the number of setting groups set will be available in
PST for activation with the ACGR function block.
4.4.3.2
Setting guidelines
The setting ActiveSetGrp, which is set via from the local HMI or from the PCM600
tool, is used to select which parameter group to be active. The active group can also
be selected with configured input to the function block SGC.
The length of the pulse, sent out by the output signal SETCHGD when an active group
has changed, is set with the parameter t.
The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use
to switch between.
4.4.3.3
Setting parameters
Table 12:
Parameter
t
90
General settings for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function

Range
0.0 - 10.0
Application manual
Step
0.1
Default
1.0
Unit
s
Description
Pulse length of pulse
when setting changed
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 13:
Parameter
General settings for the NoOfSetGrp (SGC--) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ActiveSetGrp
SettingGroup1
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
SettingGroup1
ActiveSettingGroup
NoOfSetGrp
1-6
No
Number of possible
setting groups to
switch between
4.4.4
Test mode functionality
4.4.4.1
Application
The protection and control IEDs have a complex configuration with many included
functions. To make the testing procedure easier, the IEDs include the feature to
individually block a single, several or all functions.
This means that it is possible to see when a function is activated or trips. It also enables
the user to follow the operation of several related functions to check correct
functionality and to check parts of the configuration etc.
4.4.4.2
Setting guidelines
Remember always that there are two possible ways to place the IED in the Test
mode: On state. If, at the end of one test, you took off the IED from the Test mode,
but the functions are still shown being in the test mode, check your configuration
you might have the input on the TEST function block activated.
4.4.4.3
Setting parameters
Table 14:
Parameter
REB 670
Basic general settings for the Test (TEST-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
TestMode
Off
On
Off
Test mode in
operation (On) or not
(Off)
EventDisable
Off
On
Off
Event disable during

testmode
CmdTestBit
Off
On
Off
Command bit for test

required or not during
testmode
Application manual
91
Section 4
IED application
4.4.5
IED identifiers
4.4.5.1
Application
The IED identifier function is divided into two parts. One part handles factory defined
settings and the other part handles customer specific settings.
Factory defined settings
The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very
helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different
Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be
changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are found in the
local HMI under:
Diagnostics/IED status/Product Identifiers
The following identifiers are available:
IEDType
ProductDef
Describes the firmware version. Example: 1.4.51

Firmware versions numbers are running independently from the release
production numbers. For every release numbers (like 1.1.r01) there can be
one or more firmware versions, depending on the small issues corrected in
between releases.
IEDMainFunType
Describes the release number, from the production. Example: 1.1.r01
FirmwareVer
Describes the type of the IED (like REL, REC or RET). Example: REL670
Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128

(meaning line protection).
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
Customer specific settings
The customer specific settings are used to give the IED an unique name and address.
The settings are used by a central control system, for instance micro scada, to
communicate with the IED. The customer specific identifiers are found in the local
HMI under:
Settings/General settings/Power system/Identifiers
The settings can also be made from the PCM600 tool. For more information about
the available identifiers, refer to section "Setting parameters".
92
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.4.5.2
Setting parameters
Table 15:
Parameter
General settings for the TerminalID (TEID-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
StationName
0 - 18
Station name
Station name
StationNumber
0 - 99999
Station number
ObjectName
0 - 18
Object name
Object name
ObjectNumber
0 - 99999
Object number
UnitName
0 - 18
Unit name
Unit name
UnitNumber
0 - 99999
Unit number
4.4.6
Rated system frequency (RFR)
4.4.6.1
Application
The rated system frequency is set under General settings/Power system/Primary
Values in PCM 600 parameter setting tree.
4.4.6.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the instantaneous non-directional phase overcurrent protection
functions are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM
600).
Set the system rated frequency. Refer to section "Signal matrix for analog inputs
(SMAI)" for description on frequency tracking.
4.4.6.3
Setting parameters
Table 16:
Parameter
Frequency
General settings for the RatedFreq (RFR--) function

Range
50.0 - 60.0
Step
Default
Unit
10.0
60.0
Hz
4.4.7
Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)
4.4.7.1
Application
Description
Rated system
frequency
The SMBI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal
Matrix Tool (see the overview of the engineering process in chapter "Engineering of
the IED"). It represents the way binary inputs are brought in for one IED 670
configuration.
REB 670
Application manual
93
Section 4
IED application
4.4.7.2
Setting guidelines
There are no setting parameters for the SMBI available to the user in PST. However,
the user must give a name to the SMBI instance and the SMBI inputs, directly in the
CAP tool. These names will define the function block in the Signal Matrix Tool.
4.4.7.3
Setting parameters
4.4.8
Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)
4.4.8.1
Application
The SMBO function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the
Signal Matrix Tool (see the overview of the engineering process in chapter
"Engineering of the IED"). It represents the way binary outputs are sent from one IED
670 configuration.
4.4.8.2
Setting guidelines
There are no setting parameters for the SMBO available to the user in PST. However,
the user must give a name to the SMBO instance and the SMBO outputs, directly in
the CAP tool. These names will define the function block in the Signal Matrix Tool.
4.4.8.3
Setting parameters
4.4.9
Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)
4.4.9.1
Application
The SMMI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the
Signal Matrix Tool (please see the overview of the engineering process in chapter
"Engineering of the IED"). It represents the way milliamp (mA) inputs are brought
in for one IED 670 configuration.
4.4.9.2
Setting guidelines
There are no setting parameters for the SMMI available to the user in PST. However,
the user must give a name to the SMMI instance and the SMMI inputs, directly in the
CAP tool.
94
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.4.9.3
Setting parameters
4.4.10
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)
4.4.10.1
Application
The SMAI function block (or the pre-processing function block PreProc, as it is also
named) is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (see
the overview of the engineering process in chapter "Engineering of the IED"). It
represents the way analog inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.
4.4.10.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI) functions are set via
the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager (PCM 600).
Every SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and one
neutral value), either voltage or current. The outputs of the SMAI are giving
information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS
value, frequency and frequency derivates, etc. 244 values in total). Besides the block
group name, the analog inputs type (voltage or current) and the analog input names
that can be set directly in CAP, the user has several settings available in PST:
DFTRefExtOut: Parameter valid for function block PR01, PR13, PR25 only.
Reference DFT block for external output (SPFCOUT function output).
DFTReference: Reference DFT block for that specific instance of the SMAI.
These DFT reference block settings decide which DFT block will be used as reference
in the calculation of frequency and other values (Internal DFTRef will use set system
frequency. GrpnAdDFTRef will use calculated frequency from the selected group
block, ExternalDFTRef will use input DFTSPFC as frequency reference.)
ConnectionType: Connection type for that specific instance (n) of the SMAI (if it is
Ph-N or Ph-Ph). Depending on connection type setting the not connected Ph-N or
Ph-Ph outputs will be calculated.
Negation: If the user wants to negate the 3ph signal, it is possible to choose to negate
only the phase signals Negate3Ph, only the neutral signal NegateN or both Negate3Ph
+N; negation means rotation with 180 of the vectors.
UBase: Base voltage setting (for each instance n).
MinValFreqMeas: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is
calculated, expressed as percent of UBase (for each instance n).
REB 670
Application manual
95
Section 4
IED application
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default

value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
Examples of adaptive frequency tracking
Task time group 1
SMAI instance 3 phase group
PR01
1
PR02
2
PR03
3
PR04
4
PR05
5
PR06
6
PR07
7
PR08
8
PR09
9
PR10
10
PR11
11
PR12
12
Task time group 2
PR13
1
PR14
2
PR15
3
PR16
4
PR17
5
PR18
6
PR19
7
PR20
8
PR21
9
PR22
10
PR23
11
PR24
12
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh4
Task time group 3

PR25
1
PR26
2
PR27
3
PR28
4
PR29
5
PR30
6
PR31
7
PR32
8
PR33
9
PR34
10
PR35
11
PR36
12
en07000197.vsd
Figure 41:
SMAI instances as organized in different task time groups and the

corresponding parameter numbers
The examples shows a situation with adaptive frequency tracking with one reference
selected for all instances. In practice each instance can be adapted to the needs of the
actual application.
Example 1
96
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
PR13SMAI
PR01SMAI
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI4NAME
TYPE
SYNCOUT
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
NOSMPLCY
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI4NAME
TYPE
SYNCOUT
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
NOSMPLCY
PR25SMAI
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI4NAME
TYPE
SYNCOUT
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
NOSMPLCY
07000198.vsd
Figure 42:
Configuration for using an instance in task time group 1 as DFT

reference
Assume instance PR07 in task time group 1 has been selected in the configuration to
control the frequency tracking. Observe that the selected reference instance must be
a voltage type.
For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 41 for numbering):
PR01: DFTRefExtOut = AdDFTRefCh7 to route PR07 reference to the SPFCOUT
output, DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh7 for PR01 to use PR07 as reference (see
Figure 42) PR02 PR12: DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh7 for PR02 PR12 to use
PR07 as reference.
For task time group 2 this gives the following settings:
PR13 PR24: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference
(PR07)
(PR07)
Example 2
REB 670
Application manual
97
Section 4
IED application
PR01SMAI
PR13SMAI
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI4NAME
TYPE
SYNCOUT
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
NOSMPLCY
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI4NAME
TYPE
SYNCOUT
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
NOSMPLCY
PR25SMAI
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI4NAME
TYPE
SYNCOUT
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
NOSMPLCY
07000199.vsd
Figure 43:
Configuration for using an instance in task time group 2 as DFT

reference.
Assume instance PR16 in task time group 2 has been selected in the configuration to
control the frequency tracking for all instances. Observe that the selected reference
instance must be a voltage type
For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 41 for numbering):
(PR16)
PR13: DFTRefExtOut = AdDFTRefCh4 to route PR16 reference to the SPFCOUT
output, DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh4 for PR13 to use PR16 as reference (see
Figure 43) PR14 PR24: DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh4 to use DFTSPFC input as
reference (PR16)
(PR16)
4.4.10.3
Setting parameters
98
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 17:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DFTRefExtOut
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference for

external output
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
Input connection type
TYPE
1-2
Ch
1=Voltage,2=Current
Table 18:
Parameter
REB 670
Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function
Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Negation
Off
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Off
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
Limit for frequency

calculation in % of
UBase
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base Voltage
Application manual
99
Section 4
IED application
Table 19:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
Input connection type
TYPE
1-2
Ch
1=Voltage,2=Current
Table 20:
Parameter
Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Negation
Off
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Off
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
Limit for frequency

calculation in % of
UBase
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base Voltage
4.4.11
Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)
4.4.11.1
Application
The analog summation block SUM3Ph function block is used in order to get the sum
of two sets of 3 ph analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that
might need it.
4.4.11.2
Setting guidelines
The summation block receives the 3ph signals from the SMAI blocks. The summation
block has several settings.
SummationType: Summation type (Group 1+ Group2, Group 1 Group 2, Group 2Group 1 or (Group1 + Group 2)).
DFTReference: The reference DFT block (InternalDFT Ref, Grp1AdDFTRef or
External DFT ref) as above.
100
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
FreqMeasMinVal: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is
calculated, expressed as percent of UBase (for each instance n).
UBase: Base voltage setting (for each instance n).
4.4.11.3
Setting parameters
Table 21:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SummationType
Group1+Group2
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
(Group1+Group2)
Group1+Group2
Summation type
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
Table 22:
Parameter
Advanced general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
FreqMeasMinVal
5 - 200
10
Amplitude limit for

frequency calculation
in % of Ubase
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage
4.4.12
Authority status (AUTS)
4.4.12.1
Application
The AUTS function block (or the authority status function block) is an indication
function block, which informs about two events related to the IED and the user
authorization:
the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
The two outputs of the AUTS function block can be used in the configuration for
different indication and alarming reasons, or can be sent to the station control for the
same purpose.
REB 670
Application manual
101
Section 4
IED application
4.4.12.2
Setting parameters
4.4.13
Goose binary receive
4.4.13.1
Setting parameters
Table 23:
Basic general settings for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function
Parameter
Operation
Range
Off
On
Step
-
Default
Unit
Off
4.5
4.5.1
Busbar differential protection (PDIF, 87B)
Description
Operation Off/On
Busbar differential protection, 3-phase version

Function block name:
BTHx
BTZA, BTZB
BTCZ
BTZI
IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
3Id/I
ANSI number: 87B

IEC 61850 logical node name:
BUTPTRC
BZNTPDIF
BCZTPDIF
BZITGGIO
Busbar differential protection, 1-phase version

Function block name:
BSxx
BSZA, BSZB
BSCZ
BSZI
Id/I
ANSI number: 87B

BUSPTRC
BZNSPDIF
BCZSPDIF
BZISGGIO
102
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Switch status monitoring

Function block name: SSxx--
ANSI number:
SWSGGIO
4.5.1.1
Basic applications
General
Basic types of applications for REB 670 IED are shown and described in this chapter.
For these applications usually three phase version of the IED, with two differential
zone and four (or even eight) 3-phase CT inputs, is used.
Meshed corner application and T-connection application
The REB 670 general differential function is suitable for application on mesh-corner
arrangements. Mesh corners might have four or even up to six CT inputs and are
basically simple single busbar arrangements. A similar application will occur when
a T-protection is required for one-and-half breaker or ring busbar arrangements.
xx06000009.vsd
Figure 44:
4.5.1.2
Example of REB application on T-connection
Busbar protection applications

General
A busbar protection is a device which protects busbars against short-circuits and

earth-faults. In the early development of electricity systems, no separate protection
device was used for busbar protection. Remote end line protections were used as main
protection for busbar faults. With the increased short-circuit power in the network
separate differential relays for busbar protection have to be installed in order to limit
the damage caused by the primary fault currents. In the same time, it is also a must
to secure the network stability, as a delayed tripping for busbar faults can also lead
to network instability, pole slip of near-by generators and even total system collapse.
For bus zone protection applications, it is extremely important to have good security
since an unwanted operation might have severe consequences. The unwanted
operation of the bus differential relay will have the similar effect from the operational
REB 670
Application manual
103
Section 4
IED application
point of view as simultaneous faults on all power system elements connected to the
bus. On the other hand, the relay has to be dependable as well. Failure to operate or
even slow operation of the differential relay, in case of an actual internal fault, can
have serious consequences. Human injuries, power system blackout, transient
instability or considerable damage to the surrounding substation equipment and the
close-by generators are some of the possible outcomes.
Therefore the busbar protection must fulfill the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Must be absolutely stable during all external faults. External faults are much
more common than internal faults. The magnitude of external faults can be equal
to the stations maximum short circuit capacity. Heavy CT-saturation due to high
DC components and/or remanence at external faults must not lead to
maloperation of the busbar differential protection. The security against
misoperation must be extremely high due to the heavy impact on the overall
network service.
Must have as short tripping time as possible in order to minimize the damage,
minimize the danger and possible injury to the people who might be working in
the station at the moment of internal fault, and secure the network stability.
Must be able to detect and securely operate for internal faults even with heavy
CT saturation. The protection must also be sensitive enough to operate for
minimum fault currents, which sometimes can be lower than the maximum load
currents.
Must be able to selectively detect faults and trip only the faulty part of the busbar
system.
Must be secure against maloperation due to auxiliary contact failure, possible
human mistakes and faults in the secondary circuits etc.
Distinctive features of busbar protection schemes
A busbar protection scheme design, depends very much on the substation

arrangement. Complexity of the scheme can drastically vary from station to station.
Typical applications problems, for the most common busbar protection schemes, are
described in this chapter.
The basic concept for any differential relay is that the sum of all currents, which flow
to and from the protection zone, must be equal to zero. If this is not the case, an internal
fault has occurred. This is practically a direct use of well known Kirchhoffss first law.
However, busbar differential relays do not measure directly the primary currents in
the high voltage conductors, but the secondary currents of magnetic core current
transformers (i.e. CTs), which are installed in all high-voltage bays connected to the
busbar.
Therefore, the busbar differential relay is unique in this respect, that usually quite a
few CTs, often with very different ratios and classes, are connected to the same
differential protection zone. Because the magnetic core current transformers are nonlinear measuring devices, under high current conditions in the primary CT circuits
the individual secondary CT currents can be drastically different from the original
primary currents. This is caused by CT saturation, a phenomenon that is well known
104
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
to protection engineers. During the time when any of the current transformer
connected to the differential relay is saturated, the sum of all CT secondary currents
will not be equal to zero and relay will measure false differential current. This
phenomenon is especially predominant for busbar differential protection applications,
because it has the strong tendency to cause unwanted operation of the differential
relay.
Remanence in the magnetic core of a current transformer is an additional factor, which
can influence the secondary CT current. It can improve or reduce the capability of
the current transformer to properly transfer the primary current to the secondary side.
However, the CT remanence is a random parameter and it is not possible in practice
to precisely predict it.
Another, and maybe less known, transient phenomenon appears in the CT secondary
circuit at the instant when a high primary current is interrupted. It is particularly
dominant if the HV circuit breaker chops the primary current before its natural zero
crossing. This phenomenon is manifested as an exponentially decaying dc current
component in the CT secondary circuit. This secondary dc current has no
corresponding primary current in the power system. The phenomenon can be simply
explained as a discharge of the magnetic energy stored in the magnetic core of the
current transformer during the high primary current condition. Depending on the type
and design of the current transformer this discharging current can have a time constant
in the order of a hundred milliseconds.
Consequently, all these phenomena have to be considered during the design stage of
a busbar differential relay in order to prevent the unwanted operation of the relay
during external fault conditions.
The analogue generation of the busbar differential relays (i.e.RADHA, RADSS, REB
103) generally solves all these problems caused by the CT non-linear characteristics
by using the galvanic connection between the secondary circuits of all CTs connected
to the protected zone. These relays are designed in such a way that the current
distribution through the relay differential branch during all transient conditions
caused by non-linearity of the CTs will not cause the unwanted operation of the
differential relay. In order to obtain the required secondary CT current distribution,
the resistive burden in the individual CT secondary circuits must be kept below the
pre-calculated value in order to guaranty the stability of the relay.
In new numerical protection relays, all CT and VT inputs are galvanically separated
from each other. All analog input quantities are sampled with a constant sampling
rate and these discreet values are then transferred to corresponding numerical values
(i.e. AD conversion). After these conversions, only the numbers are used in the
protection algorithms. Therefore, for the modern numerical differential relays the
secondary CT circuit resistance might not be a decisive factor any more.
The important factor for the numerical differential relay is the time available to the
relay to make the measurements before the CT saturation, which will enable the relay
to take the necessary corrective actions. This practically means that the relay has to
be able to make the measurement and the decision during the short period of time,
within each power system cycle, when the CTs are not saturated. From the practical
REB 670
Application manual
105
Section 4
IED application
experience, obtained from heavy current testing, this time, even under extremely
heavy CT saturation, is for practical CTs around two milliseconds. Because of this,
it was decided to take this time as the design criterion in REB 670 IED, for the
minimum acceptable time before saturation of a practical magnetic core CT. Thus,
the CT requirements for REB 670 IED are kept to an absolute minimum. Refer to
section "Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements" for more details.
However, if the necessary preventive action has to be taken for every single CT input
connected to the differential relay, the relay algorithm would be quite complex. Thus,
it was decided to re-use the ABB excellent experience from the analog percentage
restrained differential protection relay (i.e. RADSS and REB 103), and use only the
following three quantities:
1.
2.
3.
incoming current (i.e. sum of all currents which are entering the protection zone)
outgoing current (i.e. sum of all currents which are leaving the protection zone)
differential current (i.e. sum of all currents connected to the protection zone)
as inputs into the differential algorithm in the numerical relay design.

These three quantities can be easily calculated numerically from the raw sample
values (i.e. twenty times within each power system cycle in REB 670) from all analog
CT inputs connected to the differential zone. At the same time, they have extremely
valuable physical meaning, which clearly describes the condition of the protected
zone during all operating conditions.
By using the properties of only these three quantities, a new patented differential
algorithm has been formed in REB 670 IED. This differential algorithm is completely
stable for all external faults. All problems caused by the non-linearity of the CTs are
solved in an innovative numerical way. In the same time, very fast tripping time,
down to 10 ms, can be commonly obtained for heavy internal faults.
Please refer to Technical Reference Manual for more details about the working
principles of the Differential Function algorithm.
Zone selection (CT switching)
The so-called CT switching (i.e. zone selection) is required in situation when one
particular circuit (i.e. bay) can be connected to different busbars by individual
disconnectors. Typical example is a station with double busbars with or without
transfer bus as shown in figure "" and figure "", where any feeder bay can be
connected to any of the two buses. In such cases the status of all busbar disconnectors
and all transfer disconnectors shall be given to the BBP.
Traditionally the CT switching has been done in CT secondary circuits. However
with REB 670 this is not the case. All necessary zone selection (i.e. CT switching) is
done in software. Therefore the CT secondary circuits are always intact and without
any auxiliary relay contacts.
In order to provide proper zone selection (i.e. busbar replica) the position information
from all relevant primary switches (i.e. disconnectors and/or circuit breakers) must
be given to the REB 670. This is typically done by connecting two auxiliary contacts
106
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
(i.e. normaly open and normaly closed aux contacts) from each primary switch to the
REB 670 binary inputs (i.e. optocouplers). In REB 670 configuration one
SwitchStatus function block shall be associated with each primary switching device.
This block is then used internally to derive the primary object status and then pass
this information to the BBP internal Zone Selection logic.
Auxiliary contact requirement and evaluation

Auxiliary contact requirements for disconnectors and circuit breakers
The position of the primary switching object is typically obtained via two auxiliary
contacts of the primary apparatus. The first auxiliary contact indicates that primary
device is closed. In protection literature it is called by different names as stated below:
Normally open auxiliary contact

a contact (i.e. 52a)
closed
The second auxiliary contact indicates that primary device is open. In protection
literature it is called by different names as stated below:
Normally closed auxiliary contact

b contact (i.e. 52b)
open
Typically both contacts are used to provide position indication and supervision for
busbar protection.
Minimum contact requirements
The minimum requirement for the busbar replica is the record of the disconnector
position by using just one auxiliary contact, either NO or NC type. However recording
a pair of auxiliary contacts, representing the OPEN and CLOSE position, offer
additional features which can improve the reliability of the bus replica including
supervision possibilities.
Auxiliary contact evaluation logic
In IED 670 two logic schemes can be found.

Scheme1_RADSS "If not OPEN then CLOSED"
As the name of the scheme suggests, only when the auxiliary contacts signal clean
open position ("normally open auxiliary (NO) contact input" = inactive and "normally
closed auxiliary (NC) contact input" = active), the disconnector is taken to be open.
For all other signal combinations the disconnector is considered to be closed. This
scheme does not pose any special requirements to the auxiliary contact timing. Only
the disconnector NC contact must open before the disconnector main contact is within
arcing distance. The time during which the OPEN and CLOSED signal inputs
disagree (i.e. both binary inputs are active or both are inactive) is monitored by the
isolator supervision function. The maximum time allowed before an alarm is given
can be set according to the disconnector timing.
REB 670
Application manual
107
Section 4
IED application
Scheme2_INX "Closed or open if clear indication available otherwise last
position saved"
As the name of the scheme suggests, only when the auxiliary contacts signal clean
OPEN or clean CLOSED position disconnector is considered to be open respectively
closed. However this poses the stringent requirements on the auxiliary contacts that
the CLOSED signal must become active a certain time (>150 ms) before current starts
flowing e.g. through arcing. Otherwise this current will not be taken into account in
the BBP and this can result in a maloperation. Therefore, good timing of two auxiliary
contacts is definitely required.
The time during which the OPEN and CLOSED signals disagree (i.e. both binary
inputs are active or both are inactive) is monitored by the isolator supervision function
for both of the above two schemes. The maximum time allowed before an alarm is
given can be set according to the disconnector timing.
Table 24 and the following two figures summarize the properties of these two
schemes.
Table 24:
Treatment of primary object auxiliary contact status within BBP in REB 670
Primary equipment
Normally
Normally
Open auxiliary Closed
contact status auxiliary
(i.e. closed contact status
or a contact) (i.e. open or
b contact)
108
Status in BBP
when
Scheme 1
RADSS
is selected
when
Scheme 2
INX
is selected
Alarm facility
Alarm after
settable time
delay
Information
visible on builtin front HMI
open
open
closed
Last position
saved
yes
intermediate
_00
open
closed
open
open
no
open
closed
open
closed
closed
no
closed
closed
closed
closed
closed
yes
badState_11
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
arcing possible
closed
open
BBP
N.O.
input closed
1
0
N.C.
input open
1
0
current
assignment
1
0
1)
1)
1) disconnector supervision running

en06000084.vsd
Figure 45:
Scheme_1 RADSS
2)
arcing possible
closed
open
BBP
N.O.
input closed
1
0
N.C.
input open
1
0
current
assignment
1
0
1)
1)
1) disconnector supervision running

2) BI closed should change before arcing distance
en06000085.vsd
Figure 46:
Scheme2_INX
Circuit breaker replica

The circuit breaker position from a bay shall be given to the busbar protection when
the position of this particular breaker can influence the busbar protection operation.
Typical examples are Blind Spot protection in Bus-section and Bus-coupler bays or
End Fault Protection in feeder bays. In both cases the measuring range of a BBP is
limited by the CT location. By additionally recording the CB position of a feeder or
a coupler the zone between the CT and the CB can be better protected while CB is
open. However in such cases it is of utmost importance to connect the CB closing
command to the BBP in order to include again the CT current to the BBP zones in
time. It is as strongly recommended to always use Scheme1_RADSS for all CBs
positions connected to IED 670 in order to minimize any risk of possible problems
due to late inclusion of CT current to the relevant differential zones.
REB 670
Application manual
109
Section 4
IED application
Line disconnector replica
The line disconnector position from a feeder bay might be required for BBP under
certain circumstances. Typical example is when the line disconnector QB9 and
associated earthing switch are located between CT and protected busbar as indicated
in figure 47.
ZA
ZB
QB1
QB2
QA1
QC1
QB9
BI1
en06000086.vsd
Figure 47:
Feeder bay layout when line disconnector position might be required

for BBP
Such feeder set-up can be often found in GIS stations where cable CTs are used for
busbar protection. If in such feeder the line disconnector QB9 is open and then
immediately the earthing switch QC1 is closed before the busbar disconnectors
QB1 & QB2 are open there is a danger to get current unbalance into the zone
differential measurement under following circumstances:
In case of parallel lines zero sequence mutual coupling can induce zero sequence
current into the grounded line especially during external earth-faults.
In case of cable feeder the stored energy in the cable will be discharged through
the earthing switch at the moment of its closing.
In order to avoid such problems for BBP the status of line disconnector can be
monitored by BBP and CT measurement can be disconnected from both differential
zones as soon line disconnector is open. Similar functionality can be obtained by
instead monitoring the position of feeder breaker QA1. In such case the breaker
closing signal shall be connected to BBP as well.
Zone selection features
The REB 670 IED offers an extremely effective solution for stations where zone
selection (i.e. CT switching) is required. This is possible due to the software facility,
which gives full and easy control over all CT inputs connected to the IED. The
philosophy is to allow every CT input to be individually controlled by a setting
parameter. This parameter called ZoneSel can be individually configured for every
CT input, which is available within REB 670 IED. This parameter, for every bay, can
be set to only one of the following five alternatives:
110
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FIXEDtoZA
FIXEDtoZB
FIXEDtoZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSel is set to FIXEDtoZA, then this
CT input will be only included to the differential zone A. This setting is typically
used for simple single zone application such as: single busbar staions, one-and-a-half
breaker stations or double breaker stations.
If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSel is set to FIXEDtoZB, then this
CT input will be only included to the differential zone B. This setting is typically used
for applications such as: one-and-a-half breaker stations or double breaker stations.
If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSel is set to FIXEDtoZA&-ZB, then
this CT input will be included to the differential zone A, but its inverted current value
will be as well included to the differential zone B. This setting is typically used for
bus coupler or bus section bays when only one current transformer is available see
figure 49.
If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSel is set to Ctrl_Includes, then this
CT input will be:
included to the differential zone A when input signal CTRLZA on corresponding

bay block is given logical value one and it will be excluded from the differential
zone A when input signal CTRLZA on corresponding bay block is given logical
value zero.
included to the differential zone B when input signal CTRLZB on corresponding
bay block is given logical value one and it will be excluded from the differential
zone B when input signal CTRLZB on corresponding bay block is given logical
value zero.
This setting is typically used for feeder bays in double busbar stations in order to form
proper busbar disconnector replica. It is especially suitable when normally open and
normally closed (i.e. a and b) auxiliary contacts from the busbar disconnectors are
available to the IED 670.
If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSel is set to Ctrl_Excludes, then
this CT input will be:
REB 670
excluded from the differential zone A when input signal CTRLZA on

corresponding bay block is given logical value one and it will be included to the
differential zone A when input signal CTRLZA on corresponding bay block is
given logical value zero
excluded from the differential zone B when input signal CTRLZB on
corresponding bay block is given logical value one and it will be included to the
Application manual
111
Section 4
IED application
differential zone B when input signal CTRLZB on corresponding bay block is

given logical value zero
This setting is typically used for feeder bays in double busbar single breaker stations
in order to form proper busbar disconnector replica. It is especially suitable when
only normally closed (i.e. b) auxiliary contact from the busbar disconnector(s) is
available to the REB 670. For more information please refer to figure 68.
In applications where zone selection (i.e. CT switching) is required (for example
double or multiple busbar stations) all CTs will be permanently connected to the
analogue input module(s) of REB 670 IED, as shown in figure 67. Therefore, all
necessary switching of currents will be performed in internal software logic.
CT disconnection for bus section and bus coupler current transformer

cores
In practice there are three different solutions for bus section or bus coupler bay layout.
First solution is with two sets of main CTs, which are located on both sides of the
circuit breaker, see figure 48.
ZA
ZB
BS
8
en01000013.vsd
Figure 48:
Example of station with two sets of main CTs in the bus-section bay
This is the most expensive, but good solution for busbar protection. Two differential
zones overlapping across the bus-section or bus-coupler circuit breaker. All faults in
the overlapping zone will be instantly tripped by both zones irrespective of the section/
coupler circuit breaker status. However with modern busbar protection such as REB
670 it is possible to disconnect both CTs from the relevant zones when the bus-section
or bus-coupler circuit breaker is open. This will insure that if internal fault happen,
in the overlapping zone, while breaker is open, only the faulty zone will be tripped
while other busbar section will remain in service. However, due to low probability
of such fault happening, while the breaker is open, such special considerations are
typically not included in the busbar protection scheme for this type of stations. In
such application the bus section or bus coupler current transformers shall be wired
112
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
just to two separate current input of the REB 670 IED. Then in the parameter setting
tool (i.e. PST) for the corresponding bays the parameter ZoneSel shall be set to
FIXEDtoZA in one bay and FIXEDtoZB in another bay. This will insure that these
currents are given to both differential zones.
When live tank circuit breakers are used, owing to the high cost of the HV current
transformer often only one current transformer is available in bus-section or buscoupler bay. The suggested solution in such applications is shown in figure 49.
ZA
ZB
BS
Blind Zone
8
en01000014.vsd
Figure 49:
Example of station with just one main CT in the bus-section bay
For this type of solution just one main CT is located on only one side of the circuit
breaker. Thus, there is no zone overlapping across the section/coupler circuit breaker
as shown in figure 48. A blind spot exists between the current transformer and the
circuit breaker in the bus section or bus-coupler bay as shown in figure 49.
For an internal fault in the blind spot, the differential zone ZA will unnecessarily
operate and open the bus section breaker and all other feeder breakers associated with
it. Nevertheless the fault will still exists on other busbar section, but it is outside the
current transformer in the bus section bay and hence outside the zone ZB (i.e. it is
external fault for zone ZB). Similar problem will also exist if section/coupler circuit
breaker was open before the internal fault in the blind zone. Therefore, the busbar
protection scheme does not protect the complete busbar.
In order to improve the busbar protection scheme with this type of station layout, it
is often required to disconnect the bus-section or bus-coupler CT from the two
differential zones as soon as the bus-section or bus-coupler circuit breaker is opened.
This arrangement can be easily achieved within REB 670. In such application the bus
section or bus coupler current transformer shall be wired just to one current input of
the REB 670 IED. Then in the parameter setting tool (i.e. PST) for the corresponding
bay parameter ZoneSel shall be set to FIXEDtoZA&-ZB. This will insure that this
current is given to both differential zones. In order to disconnect this current from
both zones, when the coupler/section breaker is open additional logic as shown in
REB 670
Application manual
113
Section 4
IED application
figure 50 have to be done in REB 670 configuration. The following two binary inputs
are at least necessary in order to guaranty proper operation of such logic:
Normally closed contact of the bus section or bus coupler circuit breaker
Signal from the bus section or bus coupler circuit breaker closing circuit that
somebody wants to close the breaker
This solution does not depend on contact timing between the main contacts and
auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker. It directly follows the philosophy used for
RADSS/REB 103 schemes used for similar applications before. Principle connection
between the bus-coupler CB normally closed auxiliary contact (b-contact), REB 670
and internal configuration logic, see figure 50
Zone A
Zone B
REB 670
QB1
QB2
b
t=1s
t
QA1
&
BI1
2400/1
CB Closing
Signal
Bxxx
BLKTR
CTRLZA
BIM
External or Internal
Bus-Coupler BFP
Backup Trip Command
Bus-Coupler
Bay
CTRLZB
CT Input
TRM
A/D
CONNZB
ZEROCUR
TRZONE
TRBAY
I3PB1
Bus-Coupler Backup
OC Trip
TRIP
CONNZA
BOM
Parameter ZoneSel must

be set to "FixedToZA&-ZB"
tZeroCurrent=150ms
Other
Equipment
BBP & BFP trip command to Bus-Coupler breaker
en06000155.vsd
Figure 50:
Bus coupler bay with one CT and b aux. contact only from CB.
This scheme will disconnect the section/coupler CTs after about 80 ms (pre-set time
under parameter setting tZeroCurrent in the relevant bay function block) from the
moment of opening of the section/coupler CB (i.e. from the moment when auxiliary
b contact makes). Nevertheless this time delay is absolutely necessary in order to
prevent racing between the opening of the main breaker contact and disconnection of
the CT from the differential zones. This scheme will as well disconnect the CT in
case of the operation of any of the two internal differential zones used in the scheme.
This will secure the delayed (about 150 ms) clearing and tripping of the internal fault
within the blind zone even in case of section/coupler circuit breaker failure during
114
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
such fault. This facility will improve the performance of the busbar protection scheme
when one CT is located on only one side of the bus-section / bus-coupler circuit
breaker.
With GIS or live tank circuit breakers, owing to high cost of HV CT installations,
sometimes no current transformers are available in bus-section or bus-coupler bay.
This is the third solution shown in figure 51
ZA
10
BS
ZB
10
en04000283.vsd
Figure 51:
Example of station without main CTs in the bus-section bay
In such case two separate zones can be maintained only while bus coupler breaker is
open. As soon as bus coupler breaker is going to be closed the zone interconnection
feature in REB 670 must be activated and complete busbars will be automatically
protected with just one overall differential zone.
Since there are no current transformer in the bus coupler bay, there is no need to
allocate internal bay function block for the bus coupler bay. However some additional
configuration logic is required to obtain automatic zone interconnection activation
when bus coupler breaker shall be closed. Example of such logic, see figure 52.
REB 670
Application manual
115
Section 4
IED application
Zone A
QB1
BC CB
closing
switch
Zone B
QB2
REB 670
BOM
BIM
ZI
tOFF=1.0s
t
&
EXTSTART ACTIVE
ALARM
QA1
Indication that
Zone interconnection
is active
Bus coupler
en06000137.vsd
Figure 52:
Configuration logic for bus coupler without main CTs
End fault protection
When Live tank CBs or GIS are involved, there is a physical separation between the
CT and the CB. End Fault Protection is related to primary faults between main CT
and CB in a feeder bay. Therefore it is directly related to the position of the main CT
in feeder bay. Three CT positions in feeder bays are typically used in power systems
around the world, as shown in figure 53.
Busbar
Protection
BI1
Feeder
Protection
Busbar
Protection
Busbar
Protection
QA1
QA1
BI1
Feeder
Protection
BI1
Feeder
Protection
BI1
QA1
1
B
en06000138.vsd
Figure 53:
Typical CT locations in a feeder bay
where:
A
= two CTs are available one on each side of the feeder circuit breaker
= one CT is available on the line side of the feeder circuit breaker
= one CT is available on the bus side of the feeder circuit breaker
= End fault region
In figure 53/A where two CTs are available in a feeder bay the end fault protection
is not an issue. The busbar and feeder protection zones overlap across feeder circuit
116
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
breaker and all faults between these two CTs will be instantly detected and tripped
by both protection schemes. As a consequence of such fault both busbar and feeder
will be disconnected from the power system.
In figure 53/B where one CT is available on the line side of the feeder circuit breaker
the primary fault between CT and CB will cause certain problems. Typically such
fault will be detected and tripped by busbar protection. However to completely clear
such fault the remote feeder end CB must be tripped as well. It shall be noted that for
the feeder protection such fault will be either a reverse fault (i.e. distance protection
used for feeder protection) or external fault (i.e. line/transformer differential
protection used for feeder protection).
In figure 53/C where one CT is available on the bus side of the feeder circuit breaker
the primary fault between CT and CB will cause problem as well. Typically such fault
will be detected and tripped by feeder protection. However to completely clear such
fault the associated busbar section must be tripped as well. It shall be noted that the
busbar differential protection will classify such fault as external and without any
additional measures the busbar protection will remain stable.
In other to better understand end fault protection applications within busbar
protection, the figure 54 is used.
ZA
BI1
BI1
QA1
QA1
1
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
4
3
xx06000139.vsd
Figure 54:
Busbar protection measuring and fault clearing boundaries
where:
1
is Busbar Protection measuring boundary determined by feeder CT locations
is Busbar Protection internal fault clearing boundary determined by feeder CB locations
is End fault region for feeders as shown in figure 53/B
is End fault region for feeders as shown in figure 53/C
In figure 54 single busbar station is shown. Two feeders on the left-hand side have
CTs on the line side of the breaker. The two feeders on the right-hand side of the
busbar have CTs on the busbar side of the breaker. It is assumed that busbar protection
is connected to all four set of CTs in this station.
REB 670
Application manual
117
Section 4
IED application
Due to CT location in feeder bays, busbar protection will detect all primary faults
located within measuring boundary determined by CT locations, see figure 54.
However its operation will only completely clear faults within clearing boundary
determined by CB locations as shown in figure 54. Obviously, the primary faults inbetween these two boundaries do pose certain practical problems.
First of all it shall be noted that there is no ideal solution for faults within end zone
region in a feeder bay when the feeder breaker is closed. Such faults, within end fault
region, will be then cleared with additional time delay either by operation of local
backup protection (i.e. feeder circuit breaker failure protection) or by operation of
remote backup protection (i.e. remote ends zone 2 distance protection).
However, the overall busbar protection behavior can be improved for primary faults
within end fault regions, when feeder breaker is open. Under such circumstances the
following actions can be taken:
For feeders with CT on the line side of the circuit breaker (i.e. two feeders on
the left-hand side in figure 54), the current measurement can be disconnected
from the busbar protection zone some time after feeder CB opening (e.g. 400 ms
for transformer and cable feeders or longest autoreclosing dead time +300 ms
for overhead line feeders). At the same time, appropriately set and fast (i.e.
typically 40 ms time delayed) overcurrent protection shall be enabled to detect
fault within end fault region. Any operation of this overcurrent protection shall
only issue inter-trip command to the remote feeder end CB. Such overcurrent
protection is often called end fault protection in relay literature. It shall be noted
that at the same time busbar protection will remain stable (i.e. selective) for such
fault.
For feeders with CT on the bus side of the circuit breaker (i.e. two feeders on the
right-hand side in figure 54), the current measurement can be disconnected from
the busbar protection zone some time after feeder CB opening (i.e. after 400 ms).
This measure will insure fast busbar protection tripping for faults within end fault
region in that feeder bay, while feeder CB is open.
However, it shall be noted that in order to utilize end fault protection feeder circuit
breaker status and its closing command must be connected to the binary inputs of
busbar protection scheme in order to be available for Zone Selection logic. Please
refer to Zone Selection section for more info.
Within REB 670 above described, end fault protection logic can be easily done with
help of graphical configuration tool. One stage (i.e. 4th stage) from optionally
available overcurrent protection can be used as dedicated end fault protection for
feeders with CT on the line side of the CB.
End fault protection is here explained for simple single busbar station. However the
same principles are applicable to almost all other station layouts. However, under
certain circumstances, for stations with a transfer bus more extensive logic for end
fault protection implementation might be required.
118
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Zone interconnection (Load transfer)
In double busbar stations or double busbar with transfer bus stations it is common
requirement to use the possibility of zone interconnection of load current in any feeder
bay from one busbar to the other. The sequence of operation during zone
interconnection is normally as the following:
bus coupler bay is closed (i.e. CB and both disconnectors).

feeder bay busbar disconnector to the busbar not already in service is then closed.
The switchgear interlocking system shall allow this only when the bus coupler
breaker is already closed. Depending on the thermal capacity of the feeder busbar
disconnectors (QB1 and QB2) the opening of the bus coupler circuit breaker is
sometimes interlocked while both busbar disconnectors within one of the feeder
bays are closed.
opening of the feeder bay busbar disconnector originally closed. The load is now
transferred from one to other bus.
opening of bus coupler CB.
The zone interconnection has to be taken into consideration for the busbar differential
protection scheme, as the two busbar zones are interconnected together via two
disconnectors. The primary current split between the two busbars is not known and
the two separate measuring zones cannot be maintained.
In conventional, analog busbar protection systems the solutions have been to, by
extensive zone switching relays, disconnect one zone (normally zone B) and to
connect all feeders to other zone (normally zone A). At the same time the current
from the bus-coupler bay, which just circulates between two zones, must be
disconnected from the measuring differential zone.
Similar situation regarding busbar protection can occur between two single busbar
sections interconnected via sectionalizing disconnector, as shown in figure "". When
sectionalizer is closed then two separate protection zones becomes one and busbar
protection must be able to dynamically handle this.
Due to the numerical design the REB 670 IED can manage these situation in an elegant
and simple way. Internal feature called ZoneInterconnection will be used to handle
both situations. This feature can be activated either externally via binary input or
derived internally by built-in logic. Internally, this zone switching feature will be
activated if the following conditions are met:
bays have parameter ZoneSel set to either CtrlInclude or CtrlExcludes

internal zone selection logic concludes that this particular bay shall be
simultaneously connected to both internal differential zones
This situation only means that for this particular bay both busbar disconnectors are
closed and therefore zone interconnection switching is happening in the station.
When zone switching feature is activated inside REB 670 IED, each individual bay
current will behave in the predetermined way as dictated by a parameter setting
REB 670
Application manual
119
Section 4
IED application
ZoneSwitching. This parameter, for every bay, can be set to only one of the following
three alternatives
Force out
Force in
Conditionally
If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSwitching is set to ForceOut, then

this CT input will be disconnected from both the differential zones, regardless of any
other set value or active binary input, while zone switching feature is active within
the REB 670 IED. This setting is typically used for bus coupler bay in double busbar
stations.
If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSwitching is set to ForceIn, then
this CT input will be connected to both the differential zones, regardless of any other
set value or active binary input, while zone switching feature is active within the REB
670 IED. This setting is typically used for all feeders bay in a station with two single
zone interconnected by a sectionalizing disconnector.
If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSwitching is set to
Conditionallly, then this CT input will be connected to both the differential zones
only if it was included to any of the two zones for 2ms before the zone switching
feature was activated. This setting is typically used for all feeders bay in double busbar
stations. With this setting all feeder bays, which were not connected to any of the two
zones before the zone interconnection activation (i.e. out for scheduled maintenance),
will not either be included during zone interconnection.
This practically means that for double busbar station, when zone switching feature is
active, all feeder bays will be connected to both differential zones, while bus coupler
CT will be disconnected from both zones. In this way simple but effective solution
is formed. It is as well important to notice that all necessary changes in the individual
bay tripping arrangements will be automatically performed within REB 670 internal
logic.
A dedicated binary signal will be immediately activated in the internal logic when
zone interconnection feature is activated. If this feature is active longer than the preset time separate alarm binary signal is activated, in order to alarm the station
personnel about such operating conditions. ZoneInterconnection feature can be
disabled by a parameter setting for substation arrangements where it is not required
i.e. single busbar stations, one-and-half breakerbreaker-and-a-half stations etc.
Discriminating zones (i.e. Zone A and Zone B) in REB 670 includes a sensitive
operational level. This sensitive operational level is designed to be able to detect
busbar earth faults in low impedance earth power systems (i.e. power systems where
the earth-fault current is limited to a certain level, typically between 300 A and 2000
A by neutral point reactor or resistor) or for some other special applications where
increased sensitivity is required. Operation and operating characteristic of the
sensitive differential protection can be set independently from the operating
characteristic of the main differential protection. The sensitive differential level is
blocked as soon as the total incoming current exceeds the pre-set level. By appropriate
120
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
setting then it can be insured that this sensitive level is blocked for external phase to
phase or three phase faults, which can cause CT saturation. Comparison between
these two characteristics is shown in figure 55.
Id [Primary Amps]
Sensitive
differential
protection
I in
I d=
Operate
region
operation characteristic
Diff Oper Level
Sensitive Oper Level
Sens Iin Block

s=0.53
Iin [Primary Amps]

en06000142.vsd
Figure 55:
Differential protection operation characteristic
Additionally the sensitive differential protection can be time delayed and it must be
externally enabled by a binary signal (i.e. from external open delta VT overvoltage
relay or power transformer neutral point overcurrent relay).
The setting parameters for the check zone are set via the local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
In REB 670 such check zone is included. By a parameter settings CheckZoneSel=
NotConnected/Connected can be decided, individually for every bay, if it shall be
connected to the check zone or not. This setting is available in bay function block.
Then for every zone there is a setting parameter CheckZoneSup which can be set to
On or Off. This setting parameter determines if the individual zone shall be supervised
or not by a check zone. This setting is available in both Zone functions. Finally the
check zone shall be enabled (i.e. setting parameter Operation shall be set to On) in
order to fully enable the check zone. Operating characteristics for the check zone can
be set independently from the two discriminating zones.
However it shall be observed that the check zone has slightly different operating
characteristic from the usual discriminating zones. For the check zone the resultant
outgoing current is used as stabilizing current instead of total incoming current in
order to guarantee the check zone operation for all possible operating conditions in
the station. The check zone operating characteristic is shown in figure 56:
REB 670
Application manual
121
Id [Primary Amps]
Section 4
IED application
Operate
region
Oper Level
s=0.0-0.90 (settable)
Iout [Primary Amps]

en06000062.vsd
Figure 56:
Check zone operation characteristic.
It shall be noted that the check zone minimum differential operational level
OperLevel shall be set equal to or less than the corresponding operating level of the
usual discriminating zones.
For substations where traditional CT switching is not required (i.e. single busbar
station or one-and-half breaker station) the check zone shall not be used. For such
applications the check zone shall be disabled by setting check zone setting parameter
Operation to Off.
When CT-circuits are switched depending on the position of the busbar disconnectors
there is a possibility that some of the CT secondary circuits can be open circuited by
a mistake. At the same time this can cause unwanted operation of the differential
protection scheme.
For this reason, a so-called check zone is often required for a traditional highimpedance busbar protection scheme when switching in CT-circuit is done. The check
zone is fixed and has no switching of CTs in any of the outgoing circuits and is not
connected to busbar section and busbar coupler bays. The check zone, will detect
faults anywhere in the substation but can not distinguish in which part of the station
the fault is located. When the check zone detects a fault it gives a release signal to
the busbar protection relays in all individual, discriminating zones. The busbar
protection discriminating zones will than trip the part of the substation that is faulty.
However, this principle creates not only a high cost as separate CT cores are required,
but also a need for extra cabling and a separate check zone differential relay.
With the REB 670 IED, there is no need for an external check zone due to the
following facts:
122
the CT switching for REB 670 IED is made only in software, and CT secondary
current circuits do not include any auxiliary contacts, see figure 67.
the IED is always supplied with a special zone and phase selective Open CT
Detection algorithm, which can instantly block the differential function in case
of an open CT secondary circuits caused by accidents or mistakes.
internal check zone feature is available
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
This means that a very cost effective solution can be achieved with REB 670 IED,
producing extra savings during scheme engineering, installation, commissioning,
service and maintenance.
The pre-configured binary output contacts,are provided in the REB 670 IED in order
to alarm the open CT circuit condition. At the same time, one of the LEDs on the
built-in HMI can be programmed to light up. It shall be noted that the Open CT Circuit
alarm can only be manually reset by one of the three following ways:
1.
2.
3.
By using the reset menu on the built-in HMI

By energizing the dedicated binary input called Reset OCT via communication
links
By energizing the dedicated binary input called Reset OCT via logic done in
REB 670 internal configuration
For more details about the working principles of the Open CT Detection algorithm,
please refer to Technical Reference Manual.
Tripping circuit arrangement
The contact outputs on REB 670 are of medium duty type. It is possible to use them
to directly trip the individual bay circuit breakers. This solution is suitable for all
types of station arrangements. The internal zone selection logic provides individual
bay trip signals in REB 670 internal software and no external relay for this purpose
are required. This arrangement insures correct trip signal distribution to all circuit
breakers in case of busbar protection operation or individual bay breaker failure
protection operation. Breaker fail protection can be internal or external to REB 670
IED.
By a parameter setting it is possible to provide self-rest or latched trip output contacts
from REB 670 IED. However it shall be noted that the latching is electrical (i.e. if dc
supply to the IED is lost the output contacts will reset).
However, sometimes due to a large number of required trip output contacts (i.e. single
pole operated circuit breakers and/or main and backup trip coils), a separate trip repeat
relay unit is applied for the tripping of the circuit breakers in the station. In that case
the tripping arrangement can be done in different ways as described below.
Trip arrangement with one-phase version
When one-phase version of the IED is used it is typically required to have three IEDs
(i.e. one per phase). Thus, when busbar protection in one IED operates the trip
commands will be given to all bays but internal circuit breaker failure function will
be started in the same phase only. In order to secure internal breaker failure starting
in all three phases it is advisable to do the following. Connect Zone A trip signal from
one IED to the external trip input of the Zone A in the other two IEDs. Thus all three
IEDs will then issue trip in Zone A and start internally circuit breaker failure
protection in all three phases.
Please note that:
REB 670
Application manual
123
Section 4
IED application
similar arrangements shall be done for Zone B

this have to be done between all three IEDs (i.e. three times)
Such a scheme can be arranged in one of the following ways:
by wiring between three IEDs

by using GOOSE messages when IEC 61850-8-1 is used
by using LDCM communication module.
IEC 61850
Port (OEM)
It shall be noted that in this case the external trip signal from other two IEDs shall be
arranged via pulse timer in configuration in order to avoid locking of the trip signal
between three IED. Such arrangement via GOOSE is given in figure 57:
ZoneA Trip
IED 670
GOOSE for ZoneA
GOOSE for ZoneB
50 ms
Ext ZoneA Trip
IED 670
IEC 61850
Port (OEM)
Same GOOSE from IED #2

towards IED #1 and IED #3
Switch
50 ms
Ext ZoneB Trip
50 ms
Ext ZoneA Trip
IED 670
IEC 61850
Port (OEM)
Same GOOSE from IED #3

towards IED #1 and IED #2
ZoneB Trip
50 ms
Ext ZoneB Trip
en06000227.vsd
Figure 57:
Principal trip arrangement via GOOSE between three one-phase

IEDs
Centralized trip unit
Tripping is performed directly from REB 670 contacts, which then activate an
auxiliary trip unit, which multiplies the number of required trip contacts. Separate
potential free contacts are provided for each bay and are supplied by the bay auxiliary
voltage and will activate the trip coil of each bay circuit breaker at operation. This
tripping setup is suitable when no individual circuit breaker failure relays or lock-out
of individual bay CB closing coils is required. A suitable external trip unit consists
of a combination of RXMS1/RXMH 2 when heavy duty contacts are required and
only RXMS 1 relays when medium duty contacts are sufficient.
124
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Decentralized trip arrangement
Tripping is performed directly from REB 670 contacts, which then activate dedicated
auxiliary trip unit per bay. This individual auxiliary trip unit can be mounted either
in the busbar protection cubicle or in the individual bay cubicles. This tripping setup
is suitable when individual circuit breaker failure relays exist in all bays. A suitable
external trip unit consists of a combination of RXMS1/RXMH 2 when heavy duty
contacts are required and only RXMS 1 relays when medium duty contacts are
sufficient.
This solution is especially suitable for the station arrangements which requires the
dynamic zone selection logic (i.e. so called CT switching).
Mechanical lock-out function
It is sometimes required to use lock-out relays for busbar protection operation.

REB 670 has built in feature to provide either self-reset or latched tripping in case of
busbar protection operation. Which type of trip signal each zone will issue is
determined by a parameter setting DiffTripOut which can be set either to SelfReset
or Latched. When Latched is selected the trip output from IED 670 will only reset if:
1.
2.
Manual reset command is given to the IED

DC power auxiliary supply to REB 670 is interrupted (i.e. switched-off)
However, if it is required to have mechanically latched tripping and lock-out in the

circuit breaker closing circuit, then it is recommended to use one dedicated lockout
relay for each bay. Such mechanical lock-out trip relays are available in the
COMBIFLEX range (for example RXMVB2 or RXMVB4 bistable relays).
From the application point of view lock-out trip relays might have the following
drawbacks:
The trip contacts will remain closed. If the breaker would fail to open the tripping
coil will be burnt and the DC supply short-circuited.
The trip circuit supervision (TCS) relays will reset and give alarm for a failure
in the trip circuit if the alarm is not opened by the lock-out relay or a double trip
circuit supervision is recommended where the trip circuit is supervised with two
alternatively, TCS relays.
Contact reinforcement with heavy duty relays
There is sometimes a request for heavy duty trip relays. Normally the circuit breaker
trip coils, with a power consumption of 200 to 300 W, are provided with an auxiliary
contact opening the trip circuit immediately at breaker tripping. Therefore, no heavy
duty breaking capacity is required for the tripping relays. Nevertheless heavy duty
trip relays are still often specified to ensure trip circuit opening also if the circuit
breaker fails due to a mechanical failure or a lack of energy for operation. This can
particularly occur during site testing. In this case it is recommended to use
COMBIFLEX RXMH 2 or RXMVB 2 heavy duty relays.
Trip circuit supervision for busbar protection

REB 670
Application manual
125
Section 4
IED application
Trip circuit supervision is mostly required to supervise the trip circuit from the
individual bay relay panel to the circuit breaker. It can be arranged also for the tripping
circuits from the busbar protection.
However, it can be stated that the circuit from a busbar protection trip relay located
in the busbar protection panel is not so essential to supervise as busbar faults are very
rare compared to faults in bays, specially on overhead power lines. Also it is normally
a small risk for faults in the tripping circuit and if there is a fault it affects only one
bay and all other bays are thus correctly tripped meaning that the fault current
disappears or is limited to a low value.
4.5.1.3
Different busbar arrangements

General
Busbar differential protection application principles for typical busbar arrangements

are shown and described in this chapter.
Single busbar arrangements
The simplest form of busbar protection is a one-zone protection for single busbar
configuration, see figure 58. When different CT ratios exist in the bays compensation
is done by setting the CT ratio individually for each bay.
The only requirement for busbar protection is that the protection scheme must have
one differential zone. For any internal fault all circuit breakers must be tripped, which
will cause loss of supply to all loads connected to the station.
ZA
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
xx06000087.vsd
Figure 58:
Example of single busbar section with six feeder bays
With REB 670 this type of busbar arrangement can be very easily protected. The most
common setups with REB 670 IED for this type of station are described in the
following table.
Table 25:
Typical solutions for single busbar arrangement
Version of REB 670 IED
126
Numbers of feeders per

busbar
Number of REB 670

IEDs required for the
scheme
3PH; 2-zones, 4-bays BBP (A20)
1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B20)
12
12
24
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Single busbar arrangements with sectionalizer
This arrangement is very similar to the single busbar arrangement. The sectionalizer
allows the operator to split the station into two separate buses. However switching of
the sectionalizing disconnector have to be done without any load. This means that
one of the two busbars has to be de-energized before any opening or closing of the
sectionalizer.
For this case the protection scheme must have two differential zones, which can be
either split to work independently from each other or switched to one overall
differential zone when sectionalizing disconnector is closed. Nevertheless, when
sectionalizer is closed, for internal fault on any of the two buses all feeder circuit
breakers have to be tripped, which will cause loss of supply to all loads connected to
this station.
QB1
ZA
ZB
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
xx06000012.vsd
Figure 59:
Example of two single busbar sections with bus-sectionalizing

disconnector and eight feeder bays per each busbar section
The most common setups with REB 670 IED for this type of station are described in
the following table.
Table 26:
Typical solutions for stations with two single busbar sections with bus-sectionalizing
disconnector
Total Number of feeders Number of REB 670

in both busbar sections IEDs required for the
scheme
12
12
24
The two differential zones are available in REB 670 IED and the connecting of the
two zones is simply controlled via zone interconnection logic, see section "Zone
interconnection (Load transfer)" for more details. In practice the closed position of
the sectionalizer shall start the zone interconnection logic inside REB 670. All other
thinks (i.e. tripping) will automatically be arranged.
REB 670
Application manual
127
Section 4
IED application
Single busbar arrangements with bus-section breaker
This arrangement is very similar to the single busbar arrangement. The bus-section
breaker allows the operator to split the station into two separate buses under full load.
The requirement for busbar protection scheme is that the scheme must have two
independent differential zones, one for each busbar section. In case of an internal fault
on one of the two sections, bus-section circuit breaker and all feeder circuit breakers
associated with this section have to be tripped, leaving the other busbar section in
normal operation.
ZA
ZB
QA1
BI1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
xx06000088.vsd
Figure 60:
Example of two single busbar sections with bus-section circuit

breaker and eight feeder bays per each busbar section
With REB 670 this type of busbar arrangement can be quite easily protected. The
most common setups with REB 670 IED for this type of station are described in the
following table.
Table 27:
Typical solutions for single busbar arrangements with bus-section breaker
Total number of feeders in Number of REB 670 IEDs

both busbar sections
required for the scheme
3*)/6
1/2
7*)/14
1/2
11*)/22
3/6
11*)/22
3/6
23*)/46
3/6
*) with just one CT input from bus-section bay
For station with just one CT in the bus-section bay, it might be required, depending
on the client requirements, to provide the special scheme for disconnection of bussection CT when the bus-section CB is open. For more information see figure 50.
H-type busbar arrangements
The H-type stations are often used in transmission and sub-transmission networks as
a load-centre substations, see figure 61. These arrangement are very similar to the
single busbar station with sectionalizer or bus-section breaker, but are characterized
by very limited number of feeder bays connected to the station (normally only two
OHL and two transformers).
128
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
01
02
BS
ZA
ZB
03
04
xx06000121.vsd
Figure 61:
Example of H-type station
The requirement for the busbar protection scheme for this type of station may differ
from utility to utility. It is possible to apply just one overall differential zone, which
protects both busbar sections. However, at an internal fault on any of the two buses
all feeder circuit breakers have to be tripped, which will cause loss of supply to all
loads connected to this station. Some utilities prefer to have two differential zones,
one for each bus section.
The most common setups with REB 670 IEDs for this type of station are given in the
following table.
Table 28:
Typical solutions for H-type stations
Number of differential
Number of REB 670
zones/number of feeders IEDs required for the
per zone
scheme
1/4
2/3
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
For station with double zone protection and just one set of CTs in the bus-section bay,
it might be required, depending on the client requirements, to provide the special
REB 670
Application manual
129
Section 4
IED application
scheme for disconnection of bus-section CT when the bus-section CB is open. For

more information see figure 50.
Double circuit breaker busbar arrangement
The circuit breaker, disconnectors and instrument transformers are duplicated for
every feeder, as shown in figure 62figure "".
ZA
ZB
QA1
QA2
QA1
QA2
QA1
QA2
QA1
QA2
QA1
QA2
BI1
BI2
BI1
BI2
BI1
BI2
BI1
BI2
BI1
BI2
xx06000018.vsd
Figure 62:
Example of double breaker station
This is an extremely flexible solution. In normal service all breakers are closed. The
requirement for busbar protection scheme is that the scheme must have two
independent differential zones, one for each busbar. In case of an internal fault on
one of the two buses all circuit breakers associated with the faulty busbar have to be
tripped, but supply to any load will not be interrupted. The tripping logic for the circuit
breaker failure protection must be carefully arranged.
The most common setups with REB 670 IEDs for this type of busbar arrangement
are described in the following table.
Table 29:
Typical solutions for double circuit breaker busbar arrangement
Numbers of feeders per

station
Number of REB 670

scheme
4/8
1/2
6/12
3/6
6/12
3/6
12/24
3/6
A principle overall drawing of how to use REB 670 for this type of station is given
in figure 63.
130
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
REB 670
Bxxx
Zone A
BLKTR
CTRLZA
QA1 Internal BFP

Backup Trip Command
TRM
QA1
Feeder
CTRLZB
TRZONE
CT Input
BI1
1500/1
TRBAY
A/D
BBP &
BFP
TRIP
QA1
TRIP
CONNZA
CONNZB

be set to "FixedToZA"
I3PB1
Other
Equipment
BOM
CT Input
Bxxx
BI2
1500/1
A/D
Other
Equipment
QA2
BLKTR
CTRLZA
CTRLZB
QA2 Internal BFP

Backup Trip Command
TRZONE
TRBAY
Zone B
TRIP
CONNZA
BBP &
BFP
TRIP
QA2
CONNZB

be set to "FixedToZB"
I3PB1
Double
breaker
BFP
Remote
Feeder
End
InterTrip
OR
en06000148.vsd
Figure 63:
Feeder bay in double bus double breaker station
One- and -half circuit breaker
A fewer number of circuit breakers are needed for the same flexibility as for double
circuit breaker busbar arrangement, see figure 64figure "".
ZA
QA1
QA1
BI1
QA2
BI1
QA2
BI2
BI2
BI3
BI3
QA3
QA3
QA1
BI1
QA2
QA1
BI1
QA2
QA1
BI1
QA2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI3
BI3
BI3
QA3
QA3
QA3
ZB
xx06000017.vsd
Figure 64:
REB 670
Example of one-and-half circuit breaker station
Application manual
131
Section 4
IED application
All breakers are normally closed. The requirement for the busbar protection scheme
is that the scheme must have two independent differential zones, one for each busbar.
In case of an internal fault on one of the two buses all circuit breakers associated with
the faulty busbar have to be tripped, but the supply to any load will not be interrupted.
The breaker failure protection tripping logic also needs careful design.
With REB 670 this type of busbar arrangement can be very easily protected. The most
common setups with REB 670 IEDs for this type of station are described in the
following table.
Table 30:
Typical solutions for one-and-half circuit breaker stations when CBF for middle breaker
is not required
Number of diameters in
the station
Number of REB 670

scheme
2/4
1/2
4/8
1/2
6/12
3/6
6/12
3/6
12/24
3/6
A principle overall drawing of how to use REB 670 for one-and-half circuit
breaker station including internal CBF protection for middle breaker is given in
figure 65.
132
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
BFP
Remote
End
InterTrip
Feeder 1
REB 670
OR
Bxxx
Zone A
BLKTR
Feeder 1
BI1
2000/1
CONNZA
CTRLZB
TRM
QA1
TRIP
CTRLZA
QA1 Internal BFP

Backup Trip Command
BBP &
BFP
TRIP
QA1
CONNZB
TRZONE
CT Input
TRBAY
A/D

I3PB1
Other
Equipment
Bxxx
BLKTR
ZERO- CTRLZA
BI2
2000/1
CONNZA
ZERO- CTRLZB
CT Input
QA2
BFP
TRIP
QA2
TRIP
CONNZB
A/D
TRZONE
Other
Equipment
OR

be set to "CtrlIncludes"
and CTConnection="Off"
TRBAY
QA2 Internal BFP

Backup Trip Command
I3PB1
Feeder 2
CT Input
BI3
2000/1
QA3
Bxxx
A/D
Other
Equipment
BLKTR
CTRLZA
CONNZA
CTRLZB
QA3 Internal BFP
Backup Trip Command
CONNZB
TRZONE

TRBAY
Zone B
BBP &
BFP
TRIP
QA3
TRIP
I3PB1
1 breaker
Diameter
BFP
Remote
End
InterBOM
Trip
Feeder 2
OR
en06000149.vsd
Figure 65:
Diameter in one-and-half breaker station with BFP for all three

breakers inside REB 670
Double busbar single breaker arrangement
This type of arrangement is shown in figure 66figure "".

ZA
ZB
QB1
QB2 QB1
QB2
QB1
QB2
QB1
QB2
QB1
QB2
QB1
QB2
BI1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
xx06000014.vsd
Figure 66:
Example of double busbar station
This type of busbar arrangement is very common. It is often preferred for larger
installations. It provides good balance between maintenance work requirements and
security of supply. If needed, two busbars can be split during normal service. The
REB 670
Application manual
133
Section 4
IED application
requirement for busbar protection scheme is that the scheme must have two
one of the two buses, bus-coupler circuit breaker and all feeder circuit breakers
associated with the faulty bus have to be tripped, leaving other busbar still in normal
operation. Provision for zone selection, disconnector replica and zone interconnection
have to be included into the scheme design.
With REB 670 this type of busbar arrangement can be protected as described in the
following table:
Table 31:
Typical solutions for double busbar stations
Number of feeders in the

Number of REB 670
station (excluding bus-coupler IED required for the
bay)
scheme
3*)
7*)
NA
NA
11*)
23*)
*) with just one CT input from bus-coupler bay
For station with just one CT in the bus-coupler bay, it might be required, depending
on the client requirements, to provide the special scheme for disconnection of buscoupler CT when the bus-coupler CB is open. For more info please refer to figure
50.
Some principle overall drawings of how to use REB 670 in this type of station are
given in figure 67 to figure 71.
134
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Disconnector aux. contact timing

(Aux. contact a timing is only crucial when Scheme2_INX is used)
Zone A
Zone B
ba
Main
contact
Aux. a
contact
Aux. b
contact
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed Open
QB1
SSxx
DISABLE
CLOSED
NO
OPEN
NC
ALARM
ba
REB 670
FORCED
QB2
SSxx
DISABLE
CLOSED
NO
OPEN
NC
ALARM
Set Parameter
ZoneSel="CtrlIncludes"
FORCED
BIM
Feeder BFP Backup Trip
Command
Feeder Backup
OC Trip
BI1
1200/1
QB9
A/D
Other
Equipment
BLKTR
CTRLZA
CTRLZB
TRIP
CONNZA
CONNZB
TRZONE
CT Input
QA1
Bxxx
TRBAY
I3PB1
BOM
TRM
Feeder Bay
BBP & BFP trip command to feeder breaker

en06000151.vsd
Figure 67:
REB 670
Feeder bay where a&b aux. contacts are used
Application manual
135
Section 4
IED application
Zone A
Zone B
b
QB1
Disconnector aux. contact timing

Main
Open
Closed
contact
Aux. b
Closed Open
contact
REB 670
b
QB2
Set Parameter
ZoneSel="CtrlExcludes"
BIM
Feeder BFP Backup
Trip Command
Feeder Backup
OC Trip
BI1
1200/1
QB9
A/D
Other
Equipment
BLKTR
CTRLZA
CTRLZB
TRIP
CONNZA
CONNZB
TRZONE
CT Input
QA1
Bxxx
TRBAY
I3PB1
BOM
TRM
BBP & BFP trip command to feeder breaker
Feeder Bay
en06000152.vsd
Figure 68:
136
Feeder bay where b aux. contacts are used
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Zone A
Zone B
REB 670

Bxxx
QB1
BLKTR
QB2
CTRLZA
CTRLZB
Other
Equipment
TRM
TRIP
CONNZA
CONNZB
TRZONE
CT Input
TRBAY
BI1
2400/1
A/D
I3PB1
QA1
BI2
2400/1
OR
Bus-Coupler BFP
Backup Trip Command
Bus-Coupler
Bay
Bxxx
Bus-Coupler Backup
OC Trip
BLKTR
CTRLZA
CTRLZB
TRIP
CONNZA
BOM
CONNZB
TRZONE
CT Input
TRBAY
A/D
I3PB1
Other
Equipment

en06000153.vsd
Figure 69:
REB 670
Bus coupler bay with two sets of CTs
Application manual
137
Section 4
IED application
Zone A
Zone B
REB 670
QB1
CB Closing
Signal
QB2
ba
QA1
t=1s
SSxx
DISABLE
CLOSED
NO
OPEN
NC
ALARM
BI1
2400/1
FORCED
BIM
Bxxx
BLKTR
CTRLZA
CTRLZB
Bus-Coupler BFP
Backup Trip Command
Bus-Coupler
Bay
TRIP
CONNZA
CONNZB
ZEROCUR
TRZONE
TRBAY
I3PB1
BOM
Bus-Coupler Backup
OC Trip
CT Input
TRM
A/D
Parameter ZoneSel must be

set to "FixedToZA&-ZB"
tZeroCurrent=150ms
Other
Equipment
en06000154.vsd
Figure 70:
138
Bus coupler bay with one CT and a&b aux. contact from CB
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Zone A
Zone B
REB 670
QB1
QB2
b
t=1s
t
QA1
&
BI1
2400/1
CB Closing
Signal
Bxxx
BLKTR
CTRLZA
BIM
CTRLZB
Bus-Coupler BFP
Backup Trip Command
Bus-Coupler
Bay
TRIP
CONNZA
CONNZB
ZEROCUR
TRZONE
TRBAY
I3PB1
BOM
Bus-Coupler Backup
OC Trip
CT Input
TRM

be set to "FixedToZA&-ZB"
tZeroCurrent=150ms
A/D
Other
Equipment

en06000155.vsd
Figure 71:
Bus coupler bay with one CT and b aux. contact only from CB
Double busbar arrangements with two bus-section breakers and two

bus-coupler breakers
This type of station is commonly used for GIS installations. It offers high operational
flexibility. For this type of stations, two schemes similar to the double busbar station
scheme can be used.
BI1
QA1
ZA1
ZA2
ZB1
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2
QB1 QB2
BI1
QA1
BI1
QA1
QB1 QB2
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2
QB1 QB2
ZB2
BI1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
QA1
xx06000016.vsd
Figure 72:
Example of typical GIS station layout
With REB 670 this type of arrangement can be protected as described in the following
table.
REB 670
Application manual
139
Section 4
IED application
Table 32:
Possible solutions for a typical GIS station
Number of feeders on
Number of REB 670
each side of the station IEDs required for the
(excluding bus-coupler & scheme
bus-section bays)
NA
NA
5*)
NA
NA
9*)
21*)
*) with just one CT input from bus-coupler bay
Provision for zone selection, disconnector replica and zone interconnection have to
be included into the scheme design.
For station with just one CT in the bus-coupler or bus-section bays, it might be
required, depending on the client requirements, to provide the special scheme for
disconnection of bus-coupler or bus-section CT when the bus-coupler or bus-section
CB is open. For more info please refer to figure 50
Double busbar-single breaker with transfer bus arrangements

This type of arrangement is shown in figure 73figure "".
ZA
ZB
QB1
QB2
QA1
QB7
QB1
QB2
QB7
QA1
BI1
BI1
QB2
QB1
QA1
BI1
QB7
QB20
QB1
QB2
QA1
QB7
QB1
QB2
QB7
QA1
BI1
BI1
xx06000015.vsd
Figure 73:
Example of double busbar-single breaker with transfer bus

arrangement
This type of busbar arrangement is very common in some countries. It provides good
balance between maintenance work requirements and security of supply. If needed,
two busbars can be split during normal service. Additionally any feeder CB can be
taken out for maintenance without interruption of supply to the end customers
connected to this feeder.
The requirement for busbar protection scheme is that the scheme must have two
one of the two buses, bus-coupler circuit breaker and all feeder circuit breakers
associated with the faulty bus have to be tripped, leaving other busbar still in normal
operation. In REB 670, when transfer bus is in operation it will be protected as an
integral part of one of the two internally available zones. Special attention shall be
given that appropriate logic for zone selection is done with help of graphical
140
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
configuration tool. At the same time, load transfer and possible transfer of trip signals
from the feeder under transfer to the transfer circuit breaker shall be arranged in
appropriate way as well. With REB 670 this type of busbar arrangement can be
protected as described in the following table:
Table 33:
Possible solutions for double busbar-single breaker with transfer bus arrangements
Total number of feeder Number of REB 670

bays in the station
(excluding buscoupler & scheme
bus-section bays)
NA
NA
7*)
NA
NA
11*)
23*)
*)
with one set of CTs in bus-coupler bay and separate transfer and bus-coupler breaker
It shall be noted that for station layouts where combined transfer and bus-coupler bay
is used, as for example is shown in figure "", two REB 670 internal bay function
blocks must be allocated to such primary bay, reducing number of available feeder
bays. In such station maximum available number of feeder bays is less for one from
the values shown in table 33, on condition that just one main CT is available from
Bus-Coupler/Transfer bay. For station with just one CT in the bus-coupler bay, it
might be required, depending on the client requirements, to provide the logic scheme
for disconnection of bus-coupler CT when the bus-coupler CB is open. For more info
please refer to figure 50.
Combined busbar arrangements
There are stations which are practically a combination between two normal types of
station arrangements, which are already previously described. Some typical examples
will be shown here:
REB 670
Application manual
141
Section 4
IED application
ZA
QA1
QA1
BI1
QA1
BI1
QA2
BI1
QA2
BI3
BI3
QA3
BI1
QA2
BI2
BI2
QA1
QA3
QA2
QA1
BI1
QA2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI3
BI3
BI3
QA3
QA3
QA3
ZB
QA1
QA2
BI1
BI2
xx06000123.vsd
Figure 74:
Combination between one-and-half and double breaker station

layouts
This type of stations can be encountered very often in practice. Usually the station is
arranged in such a way that double breaker bays can be, at a later stage, transformed
into one-and-half breaker setup. For busbar protection this type of station can be
protected in exactly the same way as one-and-half breaker stations described above.
The same type of REB 670 IEDs can be used, and same limitations regarding the
number of diameters apply.
ZA
ZB
QA1
QA2
QA1
QA2
BI1
BI2
BI1
BI2
QB1 QB2
QB1 QB2
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
xx06000124.vsd
Figure 75:
Combination between double breaker and double busbar station

layouts
In this type of arrangement the double breaker bay has in the same time the role of
the bus-coupler bay for normal double busbar single breaker stations. Therefore, zone
interconnection, zone selection and disconnector replica facilities have to be provided
for all double busbar bays. Because of the very specific requirements on zone
interconnection feature in REB 670, the following should be considered for this type
of application:
142
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
current inputs CT1 and CT2 shall be used for the first double breaker bay.
current inputs CT3 and CT4 shall be used for the second double breaker bay.
current inputs CT5 and CT6 shall be used for the third double breaker bay (only
available in 1ph version).
Accordingly the following solutions are possible with REB 670 IEDs:
Table 34:
Typical solutions for combination between double breaker and double busbar station
layouts
Number of double breaker Number of REB 670

feeders / Number of
double busbar feeders in scheme
the station
NA
NA
2/4
NA
NA
3/6
3/18
ZA
QA1
QA1
BI1
QA2
BI1
QA2
BI2
BI2
BI3
QA3
BI3
QA3
QA1
BI1
QA2
QA1
BI1
QA2
QA1
BI1
QA2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI3
BI3
BI3
QA3
QA3
QA3
ZB
QB1 QB2
QB1 QB2
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
xx06000125.vsd
Figure 76:
Combination between one-and-half breaker and double busbar

station layouts
For this type of busbar arrangement the double busbar bay is usually connected to the
reactive power compensation equipment (i.e. shunt reactor or shunt capacitor). The
diameters in the one-and-half breaker part of the station have at the same time the
role of the bus-coupler bay. Therefore zone interconnection, zone selection and
disconnector replica facilities have to be provided for all double busbar bays.
REB 670
Application manual
143
Section 4
IED application
4.5.1.4
Summation principle
Introduction
A simplified bus differential protection for phase and ground faults can be obtained
by using a single, one-phase REB 670 IED with external auxiliary summation current
transformers. By using this approach, more cost effective bus differential protection
can be obtained. Such a solution makes it feasible to apply bus differential protection
even to medium voltage substations. The principal differences between full, phasesegregated bus differential protection scheme and summation type bus differential
protection scheme with REB 670 are shown in figure 77.
Three one-phase
REB 670 IED
REB 670
REB 670
REB 670
Single one-phase
REB 670 IED
REB 670
with 1A
CT inputs
Auxiliary Summation CT *)
type SLCE 8; 1/1A, 2/1A or 5/1A
Up to 18 pcs
+ auxiliary CTs
*) One SLCE 8 per main CT

en06000126.vsd
Figure 77:
Difference between phase segregated & summation type differential

protection
In the full, phase-segregated design three, one-phase REB 670 IEDs (i.e. one per
phase) are used. However for the summation type only single, one-phase REB 670
IED plus one auxiliary summation CT per each main CT is required. These auxiliary
summation CTs convert each main CT 3-phase currents to a single-phase output
current, which are all measured by one REB 670 IED. The differential calculation is
then made on a single-phase basis. By doing so, this more cost effective bus
differential protection can be applied. Due to this characteristic, this summation type
of bus differential protection with REB 670 can be applied for all types of stations
arrangements as shown section "Different busbar arrangements", for three, one-phase
IEDs.
As an example, the necessary equipment for the summation type, busbar differential
protection for a single busbar station with up to 24 bays, is shown in figure 78.
144
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
LA
LB
IA1
LX
IB1
IX1
Main CTs
A-bus
L1
L2
L3
IA2
L1
L2
L3
L1
IB2
L2
L3
IX2
Summation CTs
CT1
CT2
...
CT24
REB 670
with 1A
CT inputs
en06000127.vsd
Figure 78:
Principle CT connections for the complete station
This summation type bus differential protection still has the same main CT
requirements as outlined in section "Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f.
requirements". Some of these are:
main CT ratio differences can be tolerated up to 10:1 (e.g. 3000/5A CT can be

balanced against CT"s as low as 300/5)
different main CT ratios are compensated numerically by a parameter setting
main CT shall not saturate quicker than 2 ms (please refer to section "Rated
equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements" for detailed CT requirements
regarding main CT knee-point voltage)
However, due to the summation principle this type of busbar protection scheme has
the following limitations:
REB 670
Application manual
145
Section 4
IED application
Only one measuring circuit is utilized for all fault types (i.e. no redundancy for
multi-phase faults)
Primary fault sensitivity varies depending on the type of fault and involved
phase(s), see table 36
The load currents in the healthy phases might produce the stabilizing current
when an internal, single phase to ground fault occurs. However this is in general
no problem for solidly earthed systems with high earth-fault currents
No indication of faulty phase(s) in case of an internal fault
Not possible to fully utilize Open CT detection feature built-in in REB 670 IED
Auxiliary summation CTs for REB 670
Auxiliary Summation Current Transformer (i.e. ASCT in further text) of the type
SLCE 8 is used with the summation principle of REB 670. The principle drawing of
one such ASCT is shown in figure 79.
Auxiliary Summation CT
type SLCE 8; X/1A
P1
N1
S1
P2
P3
N2
N4
P4
P5
N3
S2
P6
en03000118.vsd
Figure 79:
Principle ASCT drawing
The ASCT has three primary windings and one secondary winding. In further text,
turn numbers of these windings will be marked with N1, N2, N3 & N4, respectively
(see figure 79 for more information).
There are three types of ASCT for REB 670:
1.
2.
3.
146
ASCT type with ratio 1/1A, for balanced 3-Ph current input, shall be used with
all main current transformers with 1A rated secondary current (i.e. 2000/1A)
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Please note the following:
main CT rated primary current is not important for ASCT selection

possible main CT ratio differences will be compensated by a parameter setting
in REB 670 IED
rated secondary current of ASCT is 1A for all types. That means that secondary
ASCT winding should be always connected to REB 670 IED with 1A CT inputs,
irrespective of the rated secondary current of the main CT
All of these features simplify the ordering of the ASCTs. Practically, in order to
purchase ASCTs, the only required information is the main CT rated secondary
current (i.e. 1A, 2A or 5A).
Table 35 summarizes the ASCT data:
Table 35:
Auxiliary summation CT data
Type of fault
N1
N2
ASCT SLCE 8;
1/1A
52
52
104
90
33
1.0
ASCT SLCE 8;
5/1A
12
12
24
104
38
1.0
ASCT SLCE 8;
2/1A
26
26
52
90
33
1.0
N3
N4
Ukp [V]
Burden
[VA]
where:
N1, N2, N3 & N4 are ASCT windings turn numbers (see figure 79)
Ukp is knee point voltage, at 1.6T, of the secondary winding with N4 turns
Burden is the total 3Ph load of ASCT imposed to the main CT
Due to ASCT design, the ASCTs for summated bus differential
protection, must always be mounted as close as possible to the REB
670 IED (i.e. in the same protection cubicle).
Possible ASCT connections for REB 670
It is possible to connect the ASCTs for summated bus differential protection with
REB 670:
at the end of the main CT circuit (e.g. beyond the other protective relays, see
figure 80
in series with other secondary equipment when some other relay must be located
at the end of the main CT circuit , see figure 81
End connection is the preferred arrangement as it gives greater sensitivity for

summation type bus differential protection (see table 36 for more information).
REB 670
Application manual
147
Section 4
IED application
However, it should be noted that these two connection types must not be mixed. This
means that within one busbar installation all auxiliary summation CTs have to be
either end-connected or series-connected.
Typical end-connection with ASCT is shown in figure 80.
Main CT
2000/1A or 2000/5A
or 2000/2A
L1
IL1
type SLCE 8;
1/1A or 5/1A or 2/1A
ISUMM
P1
N1
IL2
L2
P2
Other
relays
L3
REB 670 with 1A CTs
S1
X401
5
P3
AI03
N2
IL3
N4
6
P4
P5
N3
IN
S2
P6
en06000128.vsd
Figure 80:
End-connection with ASCT connected to CT3 input of REB 670 IED
It is important to notice that even in the case of 5A or 2A main CTs, secondary current
of the summation CTs shall be connected to REB 670 with 1A CT inputs (see
figure 80). The reason for this is that the rated secondary current of ASCT is always
1A irrespective of the rated secondary current of the main CT.
Please refer to section "SLCE 8/ASCT characteristics for end-connection"for
detailed ASCT current calculations for end-connection.
Typical series-connection with ASCT is shown in figure 81.
148
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Main CT
2000/1A
or 2000/5A
or 2000/2A
L1
L2 L3
Other
relays
type SLCE 8; 1/1 or 5/1A or 2/1A
IL1
P1
N1
P2
P3
IL3
P4
P5
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
ISUMM
S1
N2
N4
N3
S2
REB 670 with 1A CTs

X401
5
A103
P6
Other
relays
IN
en06000129.vsd
Figure 81:
Series-connection with ASCT connected to CT3 input of REB 670

IED
Please refer to section "SLCE 8/ASCT characteristics for series-connection"for

detailed ASCT current calculation for series-connection.
Main CT ratio mismatch correction
As stated before, three types of ASCTs for REB 670 are available. The first type shall
be used for main CTs with 1A rated secondary current. The second type shall be used
for main CTs with 5A rated secondary current. The third type shall be used with 2A
main CTs. However REB 670 with 1A CT inputs is always used. Therefore main CT
ratio shall always be set in such a way that the primary current is entered as for the
main CT, but secondary current is always entered as 1A (i.e. 3000/5 main CT will be
entered as 3000/1 CT in REB 670).
Primary pick-up levels for summation type differential protection with

REB 670
In the REB 670 differential IED, the minimal differential operating current level is
entered directly in primary amperes. However, as stated previously, in case of the
summated differential protection the primary fault sensitivity varies depending on the
type of fault and involved phase(s). The entered value, for the minimal differential
operating current level, will exactly correspond to the REB 670 pickup value in the
event of a 3-phase internal fault. For all other fault types this value must be multiplied
by a coefficient shown in the table 36 in order to calculate the actual primary pickup
value.
REB 670
Application manual
149
Section 4
IED application
Table 36:
Pickup coefficients for Summated Differential Protection with REB 670
Type of fault
L1-Gnd
L2-Gnd
L3-Gnd
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
ASCT end
connected
0.434
0.578
ASCT series
connected
1.732
0.867
L1L2L3
0.867
1.732
1.732
0.867
1.0
0.578
1.732
1.732
0.867
1.0
The coefficients in table 36 are only relevant for ideal internal faults
(i.e. load currents do not exist in the healthy phases).
Example 1:
The minimal differential operating current level in REB 670 IED is set to 1250A. All
ASCTs are series connected. What is the theoretical primary pickup value in case of
L3-Gnd fault?
Answer 1:
According to table 36, pickup coefficient for this type of ASCT connection and this
type of fault is 0.578. Therefore:
I Pickup ( L3 Gnd ) = 0.578 1250 = 722.5A
I Pickup (C - Gnd ) = 0.578 1250 = 722.5 A
(Equation 26)
This means that if 722.5 primary amperes is injected only in phase L3 of any of the
connected main CTs, REB 670 shall display the differential current of 1250A
(primary) and should be on the point of the pickup (i.e. trip).
In addition to BBP differential zones, REB 670 can incorporate other additional
functions and features. If and how they can be used together with summation BBP
design is shown in table 37:
150
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 37:
Internal features
REB 670 Internal Feature
Comment
Busbar Differential Protection
Differential Protection, Sensitive differential protection,

OCT algorithm, Check Zone and Differential Supervision
features in REB 670 will be connected to the summated
bay currents. Therefore they will have different pickup level
depending on the type of fault and involved phase(s). See
table 36 for more info. However, if all these limitations are
acceptable it is still possible to use all these internal busbar
protection features. It shall be noted that OCT operating
logic will not work properly in case of opening or shorting
the main CT secondary leads (i.e. in-between main CT and
ASCT). In case of opening or shorting the ASCT secondary
leads (i.e. in-between ASCT and REB 670) the OCT logic
will operate correctly.
Dynamic Zone Selection feature
Zone Selection feature in REB 670 can be used in the

exactly same way as with phase segregated design. All
built-in features even including BFP protection back-up trip
command routing, EnFP logic etc. can be used in the
exactly same way as for phase segregated design.
RBRF function
Breaker Fail Protection function will be connected to the

summated bay current. Therefore it will have different
pickup level depending on the type of fault and involved
phase(s). See table 36 for more info. It will not be possible
to have individual starting per phase, but only 3-phase
startingcan be effectively used. However if all these
limitations are acceptable it is still possible to use internal
RBRF functions.
POCM function
Overcurrent Protection function will be connected to the

phase(s). See table 36 for more info. Thus it will be very
difficult to insure proper pickup and time grading with
downstream overcurrent protection relays. Hence it will be
quite difficult to use POCM as backup feeder protection
with summation design.
POCM function
End Fault Protection feature will be connected to the

phase(s). See table 36 for more info. However, POCM do
not need any pickup or time coordination with any other
overcurrent protection. Thus if above limitations are
acceptable the POCM can be used with summation design.
RDRE function
Disturbance Recording feature will be connected to the

individual summated bay current. Therefore recorded
currents will not correspond to any actual primary currents.
However such RDRE records can still be used to evaluate
internal BBP, RBRF and POCM protections operation.
RDRE function
Event List feature in REB 670 can be used in the exactly

the same way as with phase segregated design.
REB 670
Application manual
151
Section 4
IED application
REB 670 Internal Feature
Comment
RDRE function
Trip Value Recording feature will be connected to the

individual summated bay current. Therefore recorded trip
current values will not correspond to any actual primary
currents. However such records can still be used to
evaluate internal BBP, RBRF and POCM protections
operation.
Communication
All communication features in REB 670 can be used in the

exactly the same way as with phase segregated design
RREC function
Auto reclosing function in REB 670 can be used in the

exactly same way as with phase segregated design.
SLCE 8/ASCT characteristics for end-connection
Typical ASCT end-connection is shown in figure 80. For this ASCT connection type,
the ampere-turn balance equation has the form according to equation 27:
N4 I SUMM = N1 IL1 + N2 ( IL1 + IL2 ) + N3 ( IL1 + IL2 + IL3 )
(Equation 27)
The relationships between number of turns for this SLCE 8, ASCT for REB 670, is
shown in equation 28, equation 29 and equation 30:
N1 = N2 = N;
(Equation 28)
N3 = 2 N
N4 = k
(Equation 29)
3N
(Equation 30)
where:
k
is a constant, which depends on the type of ASCT

(i.e. k=1, for 1/1A ASCT or k=5 for 5/1A ASCT or k=2 for 2/1A ASCT)
The well-known relationship, between positive, negative and zero sequence current
components and individual phase current quantities is shown in equation 31:
IL1
IL2 = a
IL3
1 I2
I1
I0
(Equation 31)
where:
a
152
is complex constant (i.e. a=-0.5+j0.866).
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
By including equation 28, equation 29, equation 30 and equation 31 into the
equation 27 the equation for the end-connected, ASCT secondary current (i.e.
summated current) can be derived according to equation 32:
1
-j30
j30
I SUMM = --- ( I 1 e
+ I2 e
+ 3 3 I0)
k
(Equation 32)
From equation 32 it is obvious that the ASCT rated ratio is declared for balanced
three phase current system, when only positive sequence current component exist.
For any unbalanced condition (i.e. external or internal fault), both negative and zero
sequence current components will give their own contribution to the summated
current.
SLCE 8/ASCT characteristics for series-connection
Typical ASCT series-connection is shown in figure 81. For this ASCT connection
type, the ampere-turn balance equation has the form according to equation 33:
N4 ISUMM = N1 IL1 N2 IL3 N3 ( IL1 + IL2 + IL3 )
(Equation 33)
The relationships between number of turns for this SLCE 8 ASCT for REB 670, is
shown in equation 34, equation 35, equation 36:
N1 = N2 = N;
(Equation 34)
N3 = 2 N
N4 = k
(Equation 35)
3N
(Equation 36)
where:
k
is a constant, which depends on the type of ASCT

(i.e. k=1, for 1/1A ASCT or k=5 for 5/1A ASCT or k=2 for 2/1A ASCT).
The well-known relationship, between positive, negative and zero sequence current
components and individual phase current quantities is shown in equation 37:
IL1
IL2 = a
IL3
1 I2
I1
I0
(Equation 37)
where:
a
REB 670
is complex constant (i.e. a=-0.5+j0.866).
Application manual
153
Section 4
IED application
By including equation 34, equation 35, equation 36 and equation 37 into the
equation 33 the equation for the series-connected, ASCT secondary current (i.e.
summated current) can be derived according to equation 38:
-j30
j30
1
+ I2 e
+ 2 3 I0)
I SUMM = --- ( I 1 e
k
(Equation 38)
From equation 38 it is obvious that the ASCT rated ratio is declared for balanced
three phase current system, when only positive sequence current component exist.
For any unbalanced condition (i.e. external or internal fault), both negative and zero
sequence current components will give their own contribution to the summated
current.
4.5.1.5
Setting parameters
All general settings for busbar differential protection are only relevant for proper
event reporting via IEC 61850-8-1. They are not important for proper operation of
busbar differential protection.
However, please note that all settings for busbar protection under relevant parameter
setting group are directly related to proper operation of the busbar differential
protection.
Table 38:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the BZNTPDIF_87B (BTZA-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IINL1 db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
IINL1 zeroDb
0 - 100000
500
Values less than this

are forced to zero in
0,001% of range
IINL1 hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
High High limit
IINL1 hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
IINL1 lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Low limit
IINL1 llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
Low Low limit
IINL1 min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
IINL1 max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
IINL1 dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
IINL1 limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
154
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IINL2 db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
IINL2 zeroDb
0 - 100000
500

0,001% of range
IINL2 L2hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
High High limit
IINL2 hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
IINL2 lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Low limit
IINL2 llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
Low Low limit
IINL2 min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
IINL2 max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
IINL2 dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
IINL2 limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
IINL3 db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
IINL3 zeroDb
0 - 100000
500

0,001% of range
IINL3 hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
High High limit
IINL3 hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
IINL3 lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.00
Low limit
IINL3 llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
Low Low limit
IINL3 min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
IINL3 max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
IINL3 dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
IINL3 limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
IDL1 db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
REB 670
Application manual
155
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IDL1 zeroDb
0 - 100000
500

0,001% of range
IDL1 hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
High High limit
IDL1 hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
IDL1 lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Low limit
IDL1 llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
Low Low limit
IDL1 min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
IDL1 max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
IDL1 dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
IDL1 limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
IDL2 db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
IDL2 zeroDb
0 - 100000
500

0,001% of range
IDL2 hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
High High limit
IDL2 hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
IDL2 lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Low limit
IDL2 llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
Low Low limit
IDL2 min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
IDL2 max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
IDL2 dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
IDL2 limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
IDL3 db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
IDL3 zeroDb
0 - 100000
500

0,001% of range
156
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IDL3 hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
High High limit
IDL3 hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
IDL3 lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Low limit
IDL3 llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
Low Low limit
IDL3 min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
IDL3 max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
IDL3 dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
IDL3 limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
Table 39:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the BZNTPDIF_87B (BTZA-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
operation
DiffOperLev
1 - 99999
1000
operation level in
primary amperes
DiffTripOut
SelfReset
Latched
SelfReset
trip output mode
tTripHold
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Differential trip dropoff delay in SelfReset

mode
CheckZoneSup
Off
On
Off
Check zone
supervises differential
protection operation
SlowOCTOper
Off
Block
Supervise
Block
Operation of slow
open CT alarm
FastOCTOper
Off
Block
Supervise
Block
Operation of fast open

CT alarm
OCTOperLev
1 - 99999
200
Open CT operation
level in primary
amperes
tSlowOCT
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
20.00
Time delay for slow

open CT alarm
OCTReleaseLev
1 - 99999
2500
Id level above which

OCT alarm releases
in supervision mode
REB 670
Application manual
157
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IdAlarmLev
1 - 99999
200
Differential current
alarm level in primary
amperes
tIdAlarm
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
Time delay for

Differential Current
Alarm Level in sec.
IinAlarmLev
1 - 99999
3000
Incoming current
amperes
SensDiffOper
Off
On
Off
Sensitive differential
SensOperLev
1 - 99999
200
operation level in
primary amperes
SensIinBlock
1 - 99999
1000
Iin level above which

sensitive diff
protection is blocked
tSensDiff
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Time delay for

sensitive differential
function operation
Table 40:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the BZNSPDIF_87B (BSZA-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IIN db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
IIN zeroDb
0 - 100000
500

0,001% of range
IIN hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
High High limit
IIN hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
IIN lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Low limit
IIN llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
Low Low limit
IIN min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
IIN max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
IIN dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
IIN limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
ID db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
158
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ID zeroDb
0 - 100000
500

0,001% of range
ID hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
High High limit
ID hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
ID lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Low limit
ID llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
Low Low limit
ID min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
ID max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
ID dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
ID limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
Table 41:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the BZNSPDIF_87B (BSZA-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
operation
DiffOperLev
1 - 99999
1000
operation level in
primary amperes
DiffTripOut
SelfReset
Latched
SelfReset
trip output mode
tTripHold
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Differential trip dropoff delay in SelfReset

mode
CheckZoneSup
Off
On
Off
Check zone
supervises differential
SlowOCTOper
Off
Block
Supervise
Block
Operation of slow
open CT alarm
FastOCTOper
Off
Block
Supervise
Block
Operation of fast open

CT alarm
OCTOperLev
1 - 99999
200
Open CT operation
level in primary
amperes
tSlowOCT
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
20.000
Time delay for slow

open CT alarm
REB 670
Application manual
159
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
OCTReleaseLev
1 - 99999
2500
Id level above which

OCT alarm releases
in supervision mode
IdAlarmLev
1 - 99999
200
Differential current
amperes
tIdAlarm
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.000
Time delay for

Differential Current
Alarm Level in sec.
IinAlarmLev
1 - 99999
3000
Incoming current
amperes
SensDiffOper
Off
On
Off
SensOperLev
1 - 99999
200
operation level in
primary amperes
SensIinBlock
1 - 99999
1000
Iin level above which

sensitive diff.
protection is blocked
tSensDiff
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Time delay for

sensitive differential
function operation
Table 42:
Parameter
Step
Description
Basic parameter group settings for the BCZTPDIF_87B (BTCZ-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Check zone operation
OperLevel
1 - 99999
1000

level in primary
amperes
Slope
0.00 - 0.90
0.01
0.15
Check zone slope
Table 43:
Parameter
160
Range
Basic parameter group settings for the BCZSPDIF_87B (BSCZ-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
OperLevel
0 - 99999
1000

level in primary
amperes
Slope
0.00 - 0.90
0.01
0.15
Check zone slope
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 44:
Parameter
SwitchName
Table 45:
Parameter
Range
0 - 13
Step
1
Default
Switch#
Unit
-
Description
User defined name for
switch
Basic parameter group settings for the SWSGGIO_87B (SS01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
OperMode
Off
Scheme1_RADSS
Scheme2_INX
ForceOpen
ForceClosed
Off
Switch operating
mode (Scheme 1,
Scheme 2 or forced)
tAlarm
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
15.00
Alarm time delay for

abnormal aux.
contact status
Table 46:
Parameter
BAY01
Table 47:
Parameter
REB 670
Basic general settings for the SWSGGIO_87B (SS01-) function
General settings for the BUSPTRC_87B (BS01-) function

Range
0 - 13
Step
1
Default
BayName01
Unit
-
Description
bay
Parameter group settings for the BUSPTRC_87B (BS01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CTConnection
Conn Inverted
NotConnected
Connected
Connected
Hardware CT input
connection to the bay
function block
ZoneSel
FixedToZA
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
CtrlIncludes
How bay/CT is
controlled toward the
zones
ZoneSwitching
ForceOut
ForceIn
Conditionally
ForceIn
Bay/CT status during

zone switching
CheckZoneSel
NotConnected
Connected
NotConnected
Bay/CT status for the

check zone
tTripPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Bay trip pulse

duration if zone trips
in SelfReset mode
tZeroCurrent
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Time delay to force

current to zero via
binary signal
tInvertCurrent
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Time delay to invert

current via binary
signal
Application manual
161
Section 4
IED application
Table 48:
Parameter
BAY01
Table 49:
Parameter
Range
0 - 13
Step
1
Default
BayName01
Unit
-
Description
bay
Parameter group settings for the BUSPTRC_87B (BS01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CTConnection
Conn Inverted
NotConnected
Connected
Connected
Hardware CT input
connection to the bay
function block
ZoneSel
FixedToZA
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
CtrlIncludes
How bay/CT is
controlled toward the
zones
ZoneSwitching
ForceOut
ForceIn
Conditionally
ForceIn
Bay/CT status during

zone switching
CheckZoneSel
NotConnected
Connected
NotConnected
Bay/CT status for the

check zone
tTripPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Bay trip pulse

duration if zone trips
in SelfReset mode
tZeroCurrent
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Time delay to force

current to zero via
binary signal
tInvertCurrent
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Time delay to invert

current via binary
signal
Table 50:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the BZITGGIO_87B (BTZI-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Load Transfer/Zone
Interconnection
operation
tAlarm
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
300.00
Time delayed alarm

for too long Load
Transfer/Zone
Intercon
Table 51:
Parameter
162
General settings for the BUSPTRC_87B (BS01-) function
Basic parameter group settings for the BZISGGIO_87B (BSZI-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Load Transfer/Zone
Interconnection
operation
tAlarm
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
300.00
Time delayed alarm

for too long Load
Transfer/Zone
Intercon.
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.6
Current protection
4.6.1
Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Function block name: TOCx-
ANSI number: 51
OC4PTOC
4.6.1.1
3I>
4
4
alt
Application
The phase overcurrent protection function is used in several applications in the power
system. Some applications are:
Short circuit protection of feeders in distribution and subtransmission systems.

Normally these feeders have radial structure.
Back-up short circuit protection of transmission lines.
Back-up short circuit protection of power transformers
Short circuit protection of different kinds of equipment connected to the power
system such as; shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors, motors and others.
Back-up short circuit protection of power generators.
If VT inputs are not available or not connected, function parameter
DirModex shall be left to default value, Non-directional.
In many applications several steps with different current pick up levels and time
delays are needed. TOC can have up to four different, individual settable, steps. The
flexibility of each step of the TOC function is great. The following options are
possible:
Non-directional / Directional function: In most applications the non-directional
functionality is used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from
the protected object itself. In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance,
the directional function can be necessary.
Choice of delay time characteristics: There are several types of delay time
characteristics available such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time
delay characteristics. The selectivity between different overcurrent protections is
normally enabled by co-ordination between the function time delays of the different
protections. To enable optimal co-ordination all overcurrent relays, to be co-ordinated
against each other, should have the same time delay characteristic. Therefore a wide
REB 670
Application manual
163
Section 4
IED application
range of standardised inverse time characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI. It is
also possible to tailor make the inverse time characteristic.
Normally it is required that the phase overcurrent function shall reset as fast as
possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases
some sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset characteristics
can be used.
For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current pick-up
level for some time. A typical case is when the protection will measure the current to
a large motor. At the start up sequence of a motor the start current can be significantly
larger than the rated current of the motor. Therefore there is a possibility to give a
setting of a multiplication factor to the current pick-up level. This multiplication factor
is activated from a binary input signal to the function.
Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This
phenomenon is due to saturation of the transformer magnetic core during parts of the
period. There is a risk that inrush current will reach levels above the pick-up current
of the phase overcurrent protection. The inrush current has a large second harmonic
content. This can be used to avoid unwanted operation of the protection. Therefore
the TOC function have a possibility of second harmonic restrain if the level of this
harmonic current reaches a value above a set percentage of the fundamental current.
The phase overcurrent protection is often used as protection for two and three phase
short circuits. In some cases it is not wanted to detect single-phase earth faults by the
phase overcurrent protection. This fault type is detected and cleared after operation
of earth fault protection. Therefore it is possible to make a choice how many phases,
at minimum, that have to have current above the pick-up level, to enable operation.
If set 1 of 3 it is sufficient to have high current in one phase only. If set 2 of 3 or
3 of 3 single-phase earth faults are not detected.
4.6.1.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the four step phase overcurrent protection function (TOC) are set
via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
The following settings can be done for the four step phase overcurrent protection.
MeasType: Selection of discrete Fourier filtered (DFT) or true RMS filtered (RMS)
signals Operation: Off/On
IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting.
It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the current of
the protected object.
UBase: Base voltage level in kV. This voltage is give as a phase-to-phase voltage and
this is the reference for voltage related settings of the function. Normally the setting
should be chosen to the rated phase-to-phase voltage of the voltage transformer
feeding the protection IED.
164
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
AngleRCA: Protection characteristic angle set in degrees. If the angle of the fault loop
current has the angle RCA the direction to fault is forward.
AngleROA: Angle value, given in degrees, to define the angle sector of the directional
function, see figure 82.
IminOpPhSel: Minimum current for phase selection set in % of IBase. This setting
should be less than the lowest step setting. Default setting is 7%.
StartPhSel: Number of phases, with high current, required for operation. The setting
possibilities are: 1 of 3, 2 of 3 and 3 of 3. Default setting is 1 of 3.
2ndHarmStab: Operate level of 2nd harmonic current restrain set in % of the
fundamental current. The setting range is 5-100% I steps of 1%. Default setting is
20%.
HarmRestrain: Off/On, enables blocking from harmonic restrain.
Reverse
Uref
RCA
ROA
ROA
Forward
Idir
en05000745.vsd
Figure 82:
REB 670
Directional function characteristic
Application manual
165
Section 4
IED application
Settings for each step (x = 1-4)
DirModex: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are off/nondirectional/

forward/reverse.
Characteristx: Selection of time delay characteristic for step x. Definite time delay
and different types of inverse time delay characteristics are available according to
table 52.
Table 52:
Inverse time delay characteristics
Curve name
Curve index No.
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
10
IEC Inverse
11
IEC Extremely Inverse
12
IEC Short Time Inverse
13
IEC Long Time Inverse
14
IEC Definite Time
15
User Programmable
17
ASEA RI
18
RXIDG (logarithmic)
19
The different characteristics are described in the Technical reference manual.

Ix>: Operation phase current level for step x given in % of IBase.
tx: Definite time delay for step x. Used if definite time characteristic is chosen. Setting
range: 0.000-60.000 s in step of 0.001 s
kx: Time multiplier for the dependent (inverse) characteristic.
IxMult: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal
(enableMultiplier) is activated the current operation level is increase by this setting
constant. Setting range: 1.0-10.0
txMin: Minimum operation time for IEC inverse time characteristics. At high currents
the inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this
166
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting. Setting
range: 0.000-60.000 s in step of 0.001 s.
In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be
set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse curve
for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the
operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.
ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. By
choosing setting the possibilities are according to table 53.
Table 53:
Reset possibilities
Curve name
Curve index no.
Instantaneous
IEC Reset (constant time)
ANSI Reset (inverse time)
The delay characteristics are described in the Technical reference manual. There
are some restrictions regarding the choice of reset delay.
For the independent time delay characteristics (type 5 and 15) the possible delay time
settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics (type 1-4 and 6-8) all three types of reset
time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset)
and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time).
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics (type 9-14) the possible delay time settings
are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three
types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set
constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current
dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given.
HarmRestrainx: Enable block of step x from the harmonic restrain function (2nd
harmonic). This function should be used when there is a risk if power transformer
inrush currents might cause unwanted trip. Can be set Off/On.
tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse time
characteristic curve (Curve type = 17). See equation 39 for the time characteristic
equation.
+ B IxMult
t [s] =
i p
-C
in >
REB 670
Application manual
(Equation 39)
167
Section 4
IED application
For more information, please refer to the Technical reference manual.

tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse reset time
characteristic curve (Reset Curve type = 3). Further description can be found in the
4.6.1.3
Setting parameters
Table 54:
Parameter
MeasType
Table 55:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function

Range
DFT
RMS
Step
-
Default
DFT
Unit
-
Description
Selection between
DFT and RMS
measurement
Basic parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage
AngleRCA
40 - 65
55
Deg
Relay characteristic
angle (RCA)
AngleROA
40 - 89
80
Deg
Relay operation angle

(ROA)
StartPhSel
Not Used
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Number of phases
required for op (1 of 3,
2 of 3, 3 of 3)
DirMode1
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 1 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
Characterist1
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time
delay curve type for
step 1
168
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
I1>
1 - 2500
1000
%IB
Phase current
operate level for step1
in % of IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Definitive time delay

of step 1
k1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
Time multiplier for the

inverse time delay for
step 1
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 1
I1Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
Multiplier for current

operate level for step
1
DirMode2
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 2 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
Characterist2
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time
step 2
I2>
1 - 2500
500
%IB
Phase current
in % of IBase
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400

of step 2
k2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

step 2
I2Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

2
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 2
DirMode3
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 3 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
REB 670
Application manual
169
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Characterist3
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time
step 3
I3>
1 - 2500
250
%IB
Phase current
in % of IBase
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800

of step 3
k3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

step 3
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 3
I3Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

3
DirMode4
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 4 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
Characterist4
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time
step 4
I4>
1 - 2500
175
%IB
Phase current
in % of IBase
170
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000

of step 4
k4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

step 4
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 4
I4Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

4
Table 56:
Parameter
Range
Step
Description
Advanced parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IMinOpPhSel
1 - 100
%IB
Minimum current for

phase selection in %
of IBase
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
20
%IB
Operate level of 2nd

harm restrain op in %
of Fundamental
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for step 1
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
Reset time delay used

in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
REB 670
Application manual
171
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
HarmRestrain1
Off
On
Off
Enable block of step 1

from harmonic
restrain
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

curve step 2
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
HarmRestrain2
Off
On
Off

from harmonic
restrain
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
tReset3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

curve step 3
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
172
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
HarmRestrain3
Off
On
Off
Enable block of step3

from harmonic
restrain
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
tReset4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

curve step 4
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
REB 670
Application manual
173
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
4.6.2
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
HarmRestrain4
Off
On
Off

from harmonic
restrain
Four step single phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51)

Function block name: OCx-
ANSI number: 51
PH4SPOCM
4.6.2.1
I>
4
4
alt
Application
The phase overcurrent protection function is used in several applications in the power
system. Some applications are:
Short circuit protection of feeders in distribution and subtransmission systems.

Normally these feeders have radial structure.
Back-up short circuit protection of transmission lines.
Back-up short circuit protection of power transformers
Short circuit protection of different kinds of equipment connected to the power
system such as; shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors, motors and others.
Back-up short circuit protection of power generators.
The single phase overcurrent protection is used in IEDs having only input from one
phase, for example busbar protection for large busbars (with many bays).
In many applications several steps with different current pick up levels and time
delays are needed. OC can have up to four different, individual settable, steps. The
flexibility of each step of the OC function is great. The following options are possible:
Choice of delay time characteristics: There are several types of delay time
characteristics available such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time
delay characteristics. The selectivity between different overcurrent protections is
normally enabled by co-ordination between the function time delays of the different
protections. To enable optimal co-ordination all overcurrent relays, to be co-ordinated
174
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
against each other, should have the same time delay characteristic. Therefore a wide
range of standardised inverse time characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI. It is
also possible to tailor make the inverse time characteristic.
Normally it is required that the phase overcurrent function shall reset as fast as
possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases
some sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset characteristics
can be used.
For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current pick-up
level for some time. A typical case is when the protection will measure the current to
a large motor. At the start up sequence of a motor the start current can be significantly
larger then the rated current of the motor. Therefore there is a possibility to give a
setting of a multiplication factor to the current pick-up level. This multiplication factor
is activated from a binary input signal to the function.
Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This
phenomenon is due to saturation of the transformer magnetic core during parts of the
period. There is a risk that inrush current will reach levels above the pick-up current
of the phase overcurrent protection. The inrush current has a large second harmonic
content. This can be used to avoid unwanted operation of the protection. Therefore
the TOC function have a possibility of second harmonic restrain if the level of this
harmonic current reaches a value above a set percentage of the fundamental current.
4.6.2.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the four step phase overcurrent protection function (OC) are set
via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
The following settings can be done for the four step phase overcurrent protection.
Operation: Off/On
It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the protected
object.
2ndHarmStab: Operate level of 2nd harmonic current restrain set in % of the
fundamental current. The setting range is 5-100% I steps of 1%. Default setting is
20%.
HarmRestrainx: Disabled/Enabled, enables blocking from harmonic restrain.
Settings for each step (x = 1-4)
Characteristx: Selection of time delay characteristic for step x. Definite time delay
and different types of inverse time delay characteristics are available according to
table 57.
REB 670
Application manual
175
Section 4
IED application
Table 57:
Inverse time delay characteristics
Curve name
Curve index No.
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
10
IEC Inverse
11
IEC Extremely Inverse
12
IEC Short Time Inverse
13
IEC Long Time Inverse
14
IEC Definite Time
15
User Programmable
17
ASEA RI
18
RXIDG (logarithmic)
19
The different characteristics are described in the Technical reference manual.

Ix>: Operation phase current level for step x given in % of IBase.
tx: Definite time delay for step x. Used if definite time characteristic is chosen. Setting
range: 0.000-60.000 s in step of 0.001 s
kx: Time multiplier for the dependent (inverse) characteristic.
InxMult: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal
(enableMultiplier) is activated the current operation level is increase by this setting
constant. Setting range: 1.0-10.0
txMin: Minimum operation time for IEC inverse time characteristics. At high currents
the inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this
parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting. Setting
range: 0.000-60.000 s in step of 0.001 s.
ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. By
choosing setting the possibilities are according to table 58.
176
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 58:
Reset possibilities
Curve name
Curve index no.
Instantaneous
IEC Reset (constant time)
ANSI Reset (inverse time)
The delay characteristics are described in the Technical reference manual. There
are some restrictions regarding the choice of reset delay.
For the independent time delay characteristics (type 5 and 15) the possible delay time
settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics (type 1-4 and 6-8) all three types of reset
time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset)
and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time).
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics (type 9-14) the possible delay time settings
are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three
types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set
constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current
dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given.
HarmRestrainx: Enable block of step x from the harmonic restrain function (2nd
harmonic). This function should be used when there is a risk if power transformer
inrush currents might cause unwanted trip. Can be set Off/On.
tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse time
characteristic curve (Curve type = 17). See equation 40 for the time characteristic
equation.
A
IxMult
+
t [s] =
B
i p
-C
in >
(Equation 40)
For more information, please refer to the Technical reference manual.

tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse reset time
characteristic curve (Reset Curve type = 3). Further description can be found in the
Second harmonic restrain
If a power transformer is energized there is a risk that the transformer core will saturate
during part of the period, resulting in an inrush transformer current. This will give a
declining residual current in the network, as the inrush current is deviating between
REB 670
Application manual
177
Section 4
IED application
the phases. There is a risk that the phase overcurrent function will give an unwanted
trip. The inrush current has a relatively large ratio of 2nd harmonic component. This
component can be used to create a restrain signal to prevent this unwanted function.
The settings for the 2nd harmonic restrain are described below.
2ndHarmStab: The rate of second harmonic current content for activation of the
2nd harmonic restrain signal, to block chosen steps. The setting is given in % of the
fundamental frequency residual current. The setting range is 5-100% in step of 1%.
The default setting is 20%.
HarmRestrainx: This parameter can be set Off/On, disable or enable the 2nd harmonic
restrain.
The four-step phase overcurrent protection can be used in different ways, depending
on the application where the protection is used. A general description is given below.
The pick up current setting inverse time protection or the lowest current step constant
inverse time protection must be given a current setting so that the highest possible
load current does not cause protection operation. Here consideration also has to be
taken to the protection reset current, so that a short peak of overcurrent does not cause
operation of the protection even when the overcurrent has ceased. This phenomenon
is described in figure 83.
Current I
Line phase current

Pick-up current
Reset current
The relay does not reset
Time t
en05000203.vsd
Figure 83:
Pick up and reset current for an overcurrent protection
The lowest setting value can be written according to equation 41.
178
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
I pu 1.2
I max
k
(Equation 41)
where:
1.2
is a safety factor,
is the resetting ratio of the protection, and
Imax
is the maximum load current.
The maximum load current on the line has to be estimated. From operation statistics
the load current up to the present situation can be found. The current setting must be
valid also for some years ahead. It is, in most cases, realistic that the setting values
are updated not more often than once every five years. In many cases this time interval
is still longer. Investigate the maximum load current that different equipment on the
line can withstand. Study components such as line conductors, current transformers,
circuit breakers, and disconnectors. The manufacturer of the equipment normally
gives the maximum thermal load current of the equipment.
There is also a demand that all faults, within the zone that the protection shall cover,
must be detected by the phase overcurrent protection. The minimum fault current
Iscmin, to be detected by the protection, must be calculated. Taking this value as a
base, the highest pick up current setting can be written according to equation 42.
I pu 0.7 I sc min
(Equation 42)
where:
0.7
is a safety factor and
Iscmin
is the smallest fault current to be detected by the overcurrent protection.
As a summary the pick up current shall be chosen within the interval stated in
equation 43.
1.2
I max
I pu 0.7 I sc min
k
(Equation 43)
The high current function of the overcurrent protection, which only has a short delay
of the operation, must be given a current setting so that the protection is selective to
other protection in the power system. It is desirable to have a rapid tripping of faults
within as large portion as possible of the part of the power system to be protected by
the protection (primary protected zone). A fault current calculation gives the largest
current of faults, Iscmax, at the most remote part of the primary protected zone.
Considerations have to be made to the risk of transient overreach, due to a possible
REB 670
Application manual
179
Section 4
IED application
DC component of the short circuit current. The lowest current setting of the most
rapid stage, of the phase overcurrent protection, can be written according to
I high 1.2 kt I sc max
(Equation 44)
where:
1.2
is a safety factor,
kt
is a factor that takes care of the transient overreach due to the DC component of the fault current
and can be considered to be less than 1.1
Iscmax
is the largest fault current at a fault at the most remote point of the primary protection zone.
The operate times of the phase overcurrent protection has to be chosen so that the
fault time is so short so that equipment will not be destroyed due to thermal overload,
at the same time as selectivity is assured. For overcurrent protection, in a radial fed
network, the time setting can be chosen in a graphical way. This is mostly used in the
case of inverse time overcurrent protection. In the figure below is shown how the
time-versus-current curves are plotted in a diagram. The time setting is chosen to get
the shortest fault time with maintained selectivity. Selectivity is assured if the time
difference between the curves is larger than a critical time difference.
en05000204.wmf
Figure 84:
180
Fault time with maintained selectivity
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
The operation time can be set individually for each overcurrent protection. To assure
selectivity between different protective protections, in the radial network, there have
to be a minimum time difference Dt between the time delays of two protections. The
minimum time difference can be determined for different cases. To determine the
shortest possible time difference between we must have knowledge about operation
time of protections, breaker opening time and protection resetting time. These time
delays can vary significantly between different pieces of equipment. The following
time delays can be estimated:
protection operation time:
15-60 ms
protection resetting time:
15-60 ms
Breaker opening time:
20-120 ms
Example
Assume two substations A and B directly connected to each other via one line, as
shown in the figure below. We study a fault located at another line from the station
B. The fault current to the overcurrent protection of IED B1 has a magnitude so that
the protection will have instantaneous function. The overcurrent protection of IED
A1 must have a delayed function. The sequence of events during the fault can be
described using a time axis, see figure 85.
A1
B1
I>
I>
Feeder
Time axis
t=0
t=t1
t=t2
t=t3
The fault
occurs
Protection
B1 trips
Breaker at
B1 opens
Protection
A1 resets
en05000205.vsd
Figure 85:
Sequence of events during fault
where:
REB 670
t=0
is the fault occurs,
t=t1
is the trip signal from the overcurrent protection at IED B1 is sent. Operation time of this
protection is t1,
t=t2
is the circuit breaker at IED B1 opens. The circuit breaker opening time is t2 - t1 and
Application manual
181
Section 4
IED application
t=t3
is the overcurrent protection at IED A1 resets. The protection resetting time is t3 - t2.
To ensure that the overcurrent protection at IED A1, is selective to the overcurrent
protection at IED B1, the minimum time difference must be larger that the time t3.
There are uncertainties in the values of protection operation time, breaker opening
time and protection resetting time. Therefor a safety margin has to be included. With
normal values the needed time difference can be calculated according to
equation 45.
Dt 40 ms + 100 ms + 40 ms + 40 ms = 220 ms
(Equation 45)
where it is considered that:

the operation time of overcurrent protection B1 is 40 ms
4.6.2.3
the breaker open time
is 100 ms
the resetting time of protection A1
is 40 ms and
the additional margin
is 40 ms
Setting parameters
Table 59:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the PH4SPOCM_51 (OC01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for

current values in A
OpStep1
Off
On
On
Operation over
current step 1 Off / On
Characterist1
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time
step 1
I1>
1 - 2500
1000
%IB
Operate phase
current level for step1
in % of IBase
182
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
t1
Range
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
0.000
Description
Independent
(defenitive) time delay
of step 1
k1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

dependent time delay
for step 1
I1Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
Multiplier for operate

current level for step 1
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves for step 1
OPStep2
Off
On
On
Operation over
Characterist2
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
IEC Reset
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time
step 2
I2>
1 - 2500
500
%IB
Operate phase
in %of IBase
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Independent
(defenitive) time delay
of step 2
k2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

for step 2
I2Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
Multiplier for scaling

the current setting
value for step 2
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves for step 2
OpStep3
Off
On
On
Operation over
REB 670
Application manual
183
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Characterist3
ANSI Ext. inv.

ReportEvents
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time
step 3
I3>
1 - 2500
250
%IB
Operate phase
in %of Ibase
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
Independent
(definitive) time delay
for step 3
k3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

for step 3
I3Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

the current setting
value for step 3
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves for step 3
OpStep4
Off
On
On
Operation over
Characterist4
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time
step 4
I4>
1 - 2500
175
%IB
Operate phase
in % of IBase
184
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Independent
(definitive) time delay
of step4
k4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

for step 4
I4Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

the current setting
value for step 4
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves for step 4
Table 60:
Parameter
Range
Step
Description
Advanced parameter group settings for the PH4SPOCM_51 (OC01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
20
%IB
Operate level of 2nd

harm restrain op in %
of Fundamental
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for step
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

curve step 1
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
REB 670
Application manual
185
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
HarmRestrain1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled

from harmonic
restrain
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

curve step 2
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
HarmRestrain2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled

from harmonic
restrain
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
tReset3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

curve step 3
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
186
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Step
Default
tBCrv3
Range
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Unit
-
Description
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
HarmRestrain3
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enable block of step3

from harmonic
restrain
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
tReset4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

curve step 4
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
REB 670
Application manual
187
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
4.6.3
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
HarmRestrain4
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enable block of Step

4 from harmonic
restrain
Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Function block name: BFPx-
ANSI number: 50BF

CCRBRF
4.6.3.1
3I>BF
Application
In the design of the fault clearance system the N-1 criterion is often used. This means
that a fault shall be cleared even if any component in the fault clearance system is
faulty. One necessary component in the fault clearance system is the circuit breaker.
It is from practical and economical reason not feasible to duplicate the circuit breaker
for the protected component. Instead a breaker failure protection is used.
The breaker protection function will issue a back-up trip command to adjacent circuit
breakers in case of failure to trip of the normal circuit breaker for the protected
component. The detection of failure to break the current through the breaker is made
by means of current measurement or as detection of remaining trip signal
(unconditional).
The breaker failure protection can also give a re-trip. This means that a second trip
signal is sent to the protected circuit breaker. The re-trip function can be used to
increase the probability of operation of the breaker, or it can be used to avoid backup trip of many breakers in case of mistakes during relay maintenance and test.
4.6.3.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the breaker failure protection function (BFP) are set via the local
HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
188
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
The following settings can be done for the breaker failure protection.
Operation: Off/On
It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the current
transformer where the current measurement is made.
FunctionMode: This parameter can be set Current/Contact. This states the way the
detection of failure of the breaker is performed. In the mode current the current
measurement is used for the detection. In the mode Contact the long duration of
start signal (trip) is used as indicator of failure of the breaker. The mode Current and
Contact means that both ways of detections are activated. Contact mode can be usable
in applications where the fault current through the circuit breaker is small. This can
be the case for some generator protection application (for example reverse power
protection) or in case of line ends with weak end infeed.
BuTripMode: Back-up trip mode is given to state sufficient current criteria to detect
failure to break. For Current operation 2 out of 4 means that at least 2 currents, of the
three phase currents and the residual current, shall be high to indicate breaker failure.
1 out of 3 means that at least 1 current of the three phase currents shall be high to
indicate breaker failure. 1 out of 4 means that at least 1 current of the three phase
currents or the residual current shall be high to indicate breaker failure. In most
applications 1 out of 3 is sufficient. For Contact operation means back-up trip is done
when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used).
RetripMode: This setting states how the re-trip function shall operate. Retrip Off
means that the re-trip function is not activated. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position
check) and Current means that a phase current must be larger than the operate level
to allow re-trip. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check) and Contact means
re-trip is done when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used). No CB Pos
Check means re-trip is done without check of breaker position.
IP>: Current level for detection of breaker failure, set in % of IBase. This parameter
should be set so that faults with small fault current can be detected. The setting can
be chosen in accordance with the most sensitive protection function to start the breaker
failure protection. Typical setting is 10% of IBase.
I>BlkCont: If any contact based detection of breaker failure is used this function can
be blocked if any phase current is larger than this setting level. If the
FunctionMode is set Current and Contact breaker failure for high current faults are
safely detected by the current measurement function. To increase security the contact
based function should be disabled for high currents. The setting can be given within
the range 5 200% of IBase.
IN>: Residual current level for detection of breaker failure set in % of IBase. In high
impedance earthed systems the residual current at phase to earth faults are normally
much smaller than the short circuit currents. In order to detect breaker failure at singlephase earth faults in these systems it is necessary to measure the residual current
separately. Also in effectively earthed systems the setting of the earth fault current
REB 670
Application manual
189
Section 4
IED application
protection can be chosen to relatively low current level. The BuTripMode is set 1 out
of 4. The current setting should be chosen in accordance to the setting of the sensitive
earth fault protection. The setting can be given within he range 2 200 % of IBase.
t1: Time delay of the re-trip. The setting can be given within the range 0 60 s in
steps of 0.001 s. Typical setting is 0 50 ms.
t2: Time delay of the back-up trip. The choice of this setting is made as short as
possible at the same time as unwanted operation must be avoided. Typical setting is
90 150 ms (also dependent of re-trip timer).
The minimum time delay for the re-trip can be estimated as:
t 2 t1 + tcbopen + t BFP _ reset + t margin
(Equation 46)
where:
tcbopen
is the maximum opening time for the circuit breaker
tBFP_reset
is the maximum time for breaker failure protection to detect correct breaker function (the current
criteria reset)
tmargin
is a safety margin
It is often required that the total fault clearance time shall be less than a given critical
time. This time is often dependent of the ability to maintain transient stability in case
of a fault close to a power plant.
Protection
operate time
Normal tcbopen
The fault
occurs
Retrip delay t1
tcbopen after re-trip

tBFPreset
Margin
Minimum back-up trip delay t2
Critical fault clearance time for stability
Time
Trip and Start
BFP
en05000479.vsd
Figure 86:
190
Time sequence
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
t2MPh: Time delay of the back-up trip at multi-phase start. The critical fault clearance
time is often shorter in case of multi-phase faults, compared to single phase to earth
faults. Therefore there is a possibility to reduce the back-up trip delay for multi-phase
faults. Typical setting is 90 150 ms.
t3: Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip TRBU2. In some applications
there might be a requirement to have separated back-up trip functions, tripping
different back-up circuit breakers.
tCBAlarm: Time delay for alarm in case of indication of faulty circuit breaker. There
is a binary input CBFLT from the circuit breaker. This signal is activated when
internal supervision in the circuit breaker detect that the circuit breaker is unable to
clear fault. This could be the case when gas pressure is low in a SF6 circuit breaker,
of others. After the set time an alarm is given, so that actions can be done to repair
the circuit breaker. The time delay for back-up trip is bypassed when the CBFLT is
active. Typical setting is 2.0 seconds.
tPulse: Trip pulse duration. This setting must be larger than the critical impulse time
of circuit breakers to be tripped from the breaker failure protection. Typical setting
is 200 ms.
4.6.3.3
Setting parameters
Table 61:
Parameter
REB 670
Basic parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
FunctionMode
Current
Contact
Current&Contact
Current
Detection principle for

back-up trip
BuTripMode
2 out of 4
1 out of 3
1 out of 4
1 out of 3
Back-up trip mode
RetripMode
Retrip Off
CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
Retrip Off
Operation mode of retrip logic
IP>
5 - 200
10
%IB
Operate phase
current level in % of
IBase
IN>
2 - 200
10
%IB
Operate residual
current level in % of
IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of re-trip
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Time delay of back-up

trip
t2MPh
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Time delay of back-up

trip at multi-phase
start
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Trip pulse duration
Application manual
191
Section 4
IED application
Table 62:
Parameter
4.6.4
Advanced parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
I>BlkCont
5 - 200
20
%IB
Current for blocking of

CB contact operation
in % of IBase
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.030
Additional time delay

to t2 for a second
back-up trip
tCBAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Time delay for CB

faulty signal
Breaker failure protection, single phase version (RBRF,

50BF)
Function block name: BFx-
ANSI number: 50BF

CCSRBRF
4.6.4.1
I>BF
Application
In the design of the fault clearance system the N-1 criterion is often used. This means
that a fault shall be cleared even if any component in the fault clearance system is
faulty. One necessary component in the fault clearance system is the circuit breaker.
It is from practical and economical reason not feasible to duplicate the circuit breaker
for the protected component. Instead a breaker failure protection is used.
The breaker failure protection function will issue a back-up trip command to adjacent
circuit breakers in case of failure to trip of the normal circuit breaker for the
protected component. The detection of failure to break the current through the breaker
is made by means of current measurement or as detection of remaining trip signal
(unconditional).
The breaker failure protection can also give a re-trip. This means that a second trip
signal is sent to the protected circuit breaker. The re-trip function can be used to
increase the probability of operation of the breaker, or it can be used to avoid backup trip of many breakers in case of mistakes during relay maintenance and test.
4.6.4.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the breaker failure protection function (BFP) are set via the local
The following settings can be done for the breaker failure protection.
192
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Operation: Off/On
It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the current
transformer where the current measurement is made.
FunctionMode: This parameter can be set Current/Contact. This states the way the
detection of failure of the breaker is performed. In the mode current the current
measurement is used for the detection. In the mode Contact the long duration of
start signal (trip) is used as indicator of failure of the breaker. The mode Current and
Contact means that both ways of detections are activated. Contact mode can be usable
in applications where the fault current through the circuit breaker is small. This can
be the case for some generator protection application (for example reverse power
protection) or in case of line ends with weak end infeed.
RetripMode: This setting states how the re-trip function shall operate. Retrip Off
means that the re-trip function is not activated. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position
check) and Current means that a phase current must be larger than the operate level
to allow re-trip. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check) and Conntact means
retrip is done when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used). No CB Pos
Check means re-trip is done without check of breaker position.
IP>: Current level for detection of breaker failure, set in % of IBase. This parameter
should be set so that faults with small fault current can be detected. The setting can
be chosen in accordance with the most sensitive protection function to start the breaker
failure protection. Typical setting is 10% of IBase.
I>BlkCont: If any contact based detection of breaker failure is used this function can
be blocked if the current is larger than this setting level. If the FunctionMode is set
Current and Contact breaker failure for high current faults are safely detected by the
current measurement function. To increase security the contact based function should
be disabled for high currents. The setting can be given within the range 5 200% of
IBase.
t1: Time delay of the re-trip. The setting can be given within the range 0 60 s in
steps of 0.001 s. Typical setting is 0 50 ms.
t2: Time delay of the back-up trip. The choice of this setting is made as short as
possible at the same time as unwanted operation must be avoided. Typical setting i
90 150 ms (also dependent of re-trip timer).
The minimum time delay for the re-trip can be estimated as:
t 2 t1 + tcbopen + t BFP _ reset + t margin
REB 670
Application manual
(Equation 47)
193
Section 4
IED application
where:
tcbopen
is the maximum opening time for the circuit breaker
tBFP_reset
is the maximum time for breaker failure protection to detect correct breaker function (the current
criteria reset)
tmargin
is a safety margin
It is often required that the total fault clearance time shall be less than a given critical
time. This time is often dependent of the ability to maintain transient stability in case
of a fault close to a power plant.
Protection
operate time
Normal tcbopen
The fault
occurs
Retrip delay t1
tcbopen after re-trip

tBFPreset
Margin
Minimum back-up trip delay t2
Critical fault clearance time for stability
Time
Trip and Start
BFP
en05000479.vsd
Figure 87:
Time sequence
t3: Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip TRBU2. In some applications
there might be a requirement to have separated back-up trip functions, tripping
different back-up circuit breakers.
tCBAlarm: Time delay for alarm in case of indication of faulty circuit breaker. There
is a binary input CBFLT from the circuit breaker. This signal is activated when
internal supervision in the circuit breaker detect that the circuit breaker is unable to
clear fault. This could be the case when gas pressure is low in a SF6 circuit breaker,
of others. After the set time an alarm is given, so that actions can be done to repair
the circuit breaker. The time delay for back-up trip is bypassed when the CBFLT is
active. Typical setting is 2.0 seconds.
tPulse: Trip pulse duration. This setting must be larger than the critical impulse time
of circuit breakers to be tripped from the breaker failure protection. Typical setting
is 200 ms.
194
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.6.4.3
Setting parameters
Table 63:
Parameter
Basic parameter group settings for the CCSRBRF_50BF (BF01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Mode Off /

On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for

current level settings
FunctionMode
Current
Contact
Current&Contact
Current
Detection for trip

Current/Contact/
Current&Contact
RetripMode
Retrip Off
I> Check
No I> Check
Retrip Off
Operation mode of retrip logic: OFF /I>

check/ No I> check
IP>
5 - 200
10
%IB
Operate level in % of
IBase
I>BlkCont
5 - 200
20
%IB
Current for blocking of

CB contact operation
in % of IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Delay for re-trip
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Delay of back-up trip
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.030
Additional delay to t2
for a second back-up
trip
tCBAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Delay for CB faulty

signal
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Trip pulse duration
4.7
Control
4.7.1
Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Function block name: ARx--
ANSI number: 79
SMBRREC
4.7.1.1
O->I
Application
In certain countries is standard practice to provid delayed restoration after busbar
protection (BBP) operation for internal fault, reason being that even many busbar
REB 670
Application manual
195
Section 4
IED application
faults are of the transient natures (i.e. animals, birds, storm, flying objects, etc.). In
such applications typically one pre-selected feeder is automatically closed with
certain time delay in order to try to re-energize the faulty bus. Typically the longest
overhead line is selected in order to limit the fault current in case of permanent busbar
fault. If the first feeder is successfully closed, all other feeder which have been
connected to the same bus, are automatically put back into service. Sensitive
differential protection level available in REB 670 can be used during such operation,
if increased sensitivity from BBP is required. Such busbar restoration logic can be
implemented in REB 670 graphical configuration tool by using optionally available
autoreclosing functions and built-in logical gates. Two autoreclosing functions are
available, one for each zone.
Automatic reclosing is a well-established method for the restoration of service in a
power system after a transient line fault. The majority of line faults are flashover arcs,
which are transient by nature. When the power line is switched off by the operation
of line protection and line breakers, the arc de-ionizes and recovers its ability to
withstand voltage at a somewhat variable rate. Thus a certain dead time with a deenergized line is necessary. Line service can then be resumed by automatic reclosing
of the line breakers. The dead time selected should be long enough to ensure a high
probability of arc de-ionization and successful reclosing.
For individual line breakers, auto-reclosing equipment or functions, the autoreclosing open time is used to determine line dead time. When simultaneous
tripping and reclosing at the two line ends occurs, auto-reclosing open time is
approximately equal to the line dead time. If the open time and dead time differ
then the line will be energized until the breakers at both ends have opened.
196
Application manual
REB 670
Resets
Operates
Fault
Resets
Operates
Line
protection
Instant of fault
Section 4
IED application
Operate time
Operate time
Closed
Circuit
breaker
Open
Close command
Contact closed
Fault duration
Reclaim time
Reclosing
command
Set AR open time

Start AR
Auto-reclosing
function
AR open time for breaker
Break time
AR reset
Fault duration
Closing time
Are extinguishers
Contacts separated
Trip command
Break time
en04000146.vsd
Figure 88:
Single-shot automatic reclosing at a permanent fault
Single-phase tripping and single-phase automatic reclosing is a way of limiting the

effect of a single-phase line fault on power system operation. Especially at higher
voltage levels, the majority of faults are of single-phase type (around 90%). To
maintain system stability in power systems with limited meshing or parallel routing
single phase auto reclosing is of particular value. During the single phase dead time
the system is still capable of transmitting load on the two healthy phases and the
system is still synchronized. It requires that each phase breaker operates individually,
which is usually the case for higher transmission voltages.
A somewhat longer dead time may be required for single-phase reclosing compared
to high-speed three-phase reclosing. This is due to the influence on the fault arc from
the voltage and the current in the non-tripped phases.
To maximize the availability of the power system it is possible to choose single pole
tripping and automatic reclosing during single-phase faults and three pole tripping
and automatic reclosing during multi-phase faults. Three-phase automatic reclosing
can be performed with or without the use of a synchronicity check, and an energizing
check, such as dead line or dead busbar check.
During the single-pole open time there is an equivalent "series"-fault in the system
resulting in a flow of zero sequence current. It is therefore necessary to coordinate
REB 670
Application manual
197
Section 4
IED application
the residual current protections (earth fault protection) with the single pole tripping
and the auto-reclosing function. Attention shall also be paid to pole
discrepancy (pole discordance) that arises when circuit breakers are provided with
single pole operating devices. These breakers need pole discrepancy protection. They
must also be coordinated with the single pole auto-recloser and blocked during the
dead time when a normal discrepancy occurs. Alternatively they should use a trip
time longer than the set single phase dead time.
For the individual line breakers and auto-reclosing equipment, the auto-reclosing
open time expression is used. This is the dead time setting for the Auto-Recloser.
During simultaneous tripping and reclosing at the two line ends, auto-reclosing open
time is approximately equal to the line dead time. Otherwise these two times may
differ as one line end might have a slower trip than the other end which means that
the line will not be dead until both ends have opened.
If the fault is permanent, the line protection will trip again when reclosing is attempted
in order to clear the fault.
It is common to use one automatic reclosing function per line circuit-breaker (CB).
When one CB per line end is used, then there is one auto-reclosing function per line
end. If auto-reclosing functions are included in duplicated line protection, which
means two auto-reclosing functions per CB, one should take measures to avoid
uncoordinated reclosing commands. In one and a half breaker, double-breaker and
ring bus arrangements, two CBs per line end are operated. One auto-reclosing
function per CB is recommended. Arranged in such a way, sequential reclosing of
the two CBs can be arranged with a priority circuit available in the auto-reclose
function. In case of a permanent fault and unsuccessful reclosing of the first CB,
reclosing of the second CB is cancelled and thus the stress on the power system is
limited. Another advantage with the breaker connected auto-recloser is that checking
that the breaker closed before the sequence, breaker prepared for an autoreclose
sequence etc. is much simpler.
The auto-reclosing function can be selected to perform single-phase and/or threephase automatic-reclosing from several single-shot to multiple-shot reclosing
programs. The three-phase auto-reclosing open time can be set to give either HighSpeed automatic reclosing (HSAR) or Delayed Automatic-Reclosing (DAR). These
expressions, HSAR and DAR, are mostly used for three-phase Reclosing as single
phase is always high speed to avoid maintaining the unsymmetrical condition. HSAR
usually means a dead time of less than 1 second.
In power transmission systems it is common practise to apply single and/or three
phase, single-shot Auto-Reclosing. In Sub-transmission and Distribution systems
tripping and auto-reclosing are usually three-phase. The mode of automatic-reclosing
varies however. Single-shot and multi-shot are in use. The first shot can have a short
delay, HSAR, or a longer delay, DAR. The second and following reclosing shots have
a rather long delay. When multiple shots are used the dead time must harmonize with
the breaker duty-cycle capacity.
Automatic-reclosing is usually started by the line protection and in particular by
instantaneous tripping of such protection. The auto-reclosing function can be
198
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
inhibited (blocked) when certain protection functions detecting permanent faults,

such as shunt reactor, cable or busbar protection are in operation. Back-up protection
zones indicating faults outside the own line are also connected to inhibit the AutoReclose.
Automatic-reclosing should not be attempted when closing a CB and energizing a
line onto a fault (SOTF), except when multiple-shots are used where shots 2 etc. will
be started at SOTF. Likewise a CB in a multi-breaker busbar arrangement which was
not closed when a fault occurred should not be closed by operation of the AutoReclosing function. Auto-Reclosing is often combined with a release condition from
synchronism check and dead line or dead busbar check. In order to limit the stress on
turbo-generator sets from Auto-Reclosing onto a permanent fault, one can arrange to
combine Auto-Reclosing with a synchronism check on line terminals close to such
power stations and attempt energizing from the side furthest away from the power
station and perform the synchronism check at the local end if the energizing was
successful.
Transmission protection systems are usually sub-divided and provided with two
redundant protection relays. In such systems it is common to provide auto-reclosing
in only one of the sub-systems as the requirement is for fault clearance and a failure
to reclose because of the auto-recloser being out of service is not considered a major
disturbance. If two auto-reclosers are provided on the same breaker, the application
must be carefully checked and normally one must be the master and be connected to
inhibit the other auto-recloser if it has started. This inhibit can for example be done
from AR In progress.
When Single and/or three phase auto-reclosing is used there are a number of cases
where the tripping shall be three phase anyway. Some examples are:
Evolving fault where the fault during the dead-time spreads to another phase.
The other two phases must then be tripped and a three phase dead-time and autoreclose initiated
Permanent fault
Fault during three phase dead-time
Auto-reclose out of service or CB not ready for an auto-reclosing cycle
Prepare three phase tripping is then used to switch the tripping to three phase. This
signal is generated by the auto-recloser and connected to the trip function block and
also connected outside the IED through IO when a common auto-recloser is provided
for two sub-systems. An alternative signal Prepare 1 Phase tripping is also provided
and can be used as an alternative when the autorecloser is shared with another
subsystem. This provides a fail safe connection so that even a failure in the IED with
the auto-recloser will mean that the other sub-system will start a three-phase trip.
A permanent fault will cause the line protection to trip again when it recloses in an
attempt to clear the fault.
The auto-reclosing function allows a number of parameters to be adjusted.
Some examples:
REB 670
Application manual
199
Section 4
IED application
number of auto-reclosing shots

auto-reclosing program
auto-reclosing open times (dead time) for each shot
Auto-reclosing operation Off and On
Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set OFF and ON by a setting parameter
and by external control. Parameter Operation= OFF, or On sets the function OFF and
ON. In setting Operation=ExternalCtrl OFF and On control is made by input signal
pulses, e.g. from the control system or from the binary input (and other systems).
When the function is set ON and operative (other conditions such as CB closed and
CB Ready are also fulfilled), the output SETON is activated (high). When the function
is ready to accept a reclosing start.
StartInitiate auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle.
The usual way to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it at tripping by line
protection by applying a signal to the input START. Starting signals can be either
General Trip signals or only the conditions for Differential, Distance protection Zone
1 and Distance protection Aided trip. In some cases also Directional Earth fault
function Aided trip can be connected to start an Auto-Reclose attempt.
In cases where one wants to differentiate three-phase auto-reclosing open time,
(dead time) for different power system configuration or at tripping by different
protection stages, one can also use the input STARTHS (start high-speed reclosing).
When initiating STARTHS, the auto-reclosing open time for three-phase shot 1, t1
3PhHS is used.
A number of conditions need to be fulfilled for the start to be accepted and a new
auto-reclosing cycle to be started. They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are:
a) CBREADY, CB ready for a reclosing cycle, e.g. charged operating gear, b)
CBPOS to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and start was
applied, c) No signal at input INHIBIT, i.e. no blocking or inhibit signal present. After
the start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal Started is set. It
can be interrupted by certain events, like an Inhibit signal.
StartInitiate of Auto-Reclosing from CB open information
If a user wants to initiate Auto-Reclosing from the CB open position instead of

from protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode
is selected with the setting parameter StartByCBOpen=On. It is then necessary to
block reclosing for all manual trip operations. Typically
CBAuxContType=NormClosed is also set and a CB auxiliary contact of type NC
(normally closed, 52b) is connected to inputs CBPOS and START. When the signal
changes from CB closed to CB open an Auto-Reclosing start pulse is generated
and latched in the function, subject to the usual checks. Then the reclosing sequence
continues as usual. One needs to connect signals from manual tripping and other
functions, which shall prevent reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.
200
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Blocking of the Auto-Reclose
Auto-Reclose attempts are expected to take place only in the event of transient faults
on the own line. The Auto-Recloser must be blocked for the following conditions:
Tripping from Delayed Distance protection zones

Tripping from Back-up protection functions
Tripping from Breaker failure function
Intertrip received from remote end Breaker failure function
Busbar protection tripping
Depending of the starting principle (General Trip or only Instantaneous trip) adopted
above the delayed and back-up zones might not be required. Breaker failure local and
remote must however always be connected.
Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1
Up to four different time settings can be used for the first shot, and one extension
time. There are separate settings for single-, two- and three-phase auto-reclosing open
time, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied, and an autoreclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the auto-reclosing open
time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activated in connection
with the start, the auto-reclosing open time for two-phase or three-phase reclosing is
used. There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-speed autoreclosing without Synchrocheck, t1 3PhHS, available for use when required. It is
activated by the STARTHS input.
An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normal
shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for
permissive line protection is lost. In such a case there can be a significant time
difference in fault clearance at the two ends of the line. A longer auto-reclosing open
time can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter
Extended t1=On and the input PLCLOST.
Long trip signal
In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly because of fault clearance.
The user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. A longer trip signal extends
the auto-reclosing open time by tExtended t1. If Extended t1=Off, a long trip signal
interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input INHIBIT.
Reclosing programs
The maximum number of reclosing shots in an auto-reclosing cycle is selected by the

setting parameter NoOfShots. The type of reclosing used at the first reclosing shot is
set by parameter FirstShot. The first alternative is three-phase reclosing. The other
alternatives include some single-phase or two-phase reclosing. Usually there is no
two-phase tripping arranged, and then there will be no two-phase reclosing.
The decision is also made in the tripping function block (TR) where the setting 3Ph,
1/3Ph (or1/2/3Ph) is selected.
REB 670
Application manual
201
Section 4
IED application
FirstShot=3ph (normal setting for a single 3 phase shot)
3-phase reclosing, one to five shots according to setting NoOfShots. The output
Prepare three-phase trip PREP3P is always set (high). A trip operation is made as a
three-phase trip at all types of fault. The reclosing is as a three-phase Reclosing as in
mode 1/2/3ph described below. All signals, blockings, inhibits, timers, requirements
etc. are the same as in the example described below.
FirstShot=1/2/3ph (normal setting for a 1/3 phase Auto reclose with Trip
modules (TR) in 1/3PhasePole trip)
1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing first shot, followed by 3-phase reclosing shots,
if selected. Here, the auto-reclosing function is assumed to be "On" and "Ready". The
breaker is closed and the operation gear ready (operating energy stored). Input
START (or STARTHS) is received and sealed-in. The output READY is reset (set
to false). Output ACTIVE is set.
If TR2P is low and TR3P is low (1-phase trip): The timer for 1-phase reclosing
open time is started and the output 1PT1 (1-phase reclosing in progress) is
activated. It can be used to suppress pole disagreement trip and earth-fault
protection during the 1-phase open interval.
If TR2P is high and TR3P is low (2-phase trip): The timer for 2-phase reclosing
open time is started and the output 2PT1 (2-phase reclosing in progress) is
activated.
If TR3P is high (3-phase trip): The timer for 3-phase auto-reclosing open time,
t1 3Ph or t1 3PhHS is started and output 3PT1 (3-phase auto-reclosing shot 1 in
progress) is set.
While any of the auto-reclosing open time timers are running, the output INPROGR
is activated. When the "open time" timer runs out, the respective internal signal is
transmitted to the output module for further checks and to issue a closing command
to the circuit breaker.
When a CB closing command is issued the output prepare 3-phase trip is set. When
issuing a CB closing command a reclaim timer tReclaim is started. If no tripping
takes place during that time the auto-reclosing function resets to the Ready state
and the signal ACTIVE resets. If the first reclosing shot fails, a 3-phase trip will be
initiated and 3-phase reclosing can follow, if selected.
FirstShot=1/2ph 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot.
In 1-phase or 2-phase tripping, the operation is as in the above described example,

program mode 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing shot fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued
and 3-phase reclosing can follow, if selected. In the event of a 3-phase trip, TR3P
high, the auto-reclosing will be blocked and no reclosing takes place.
FirstShot=1ph + 1*2ph 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot.
The 1-phase reclosing attempt can be followed by 3-phase reclosing, if selected. A

failure of a 2-phase reclosing attempt will block the auto-reclosing. If the first trip is
a 3-phase trip the auto-reclosing will be blocked. In the event of a 1-phase trip, (TR2P
low and TR3P low), the operation is as in the example described above, program
mode 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing shot fails, a 3-phase trip will be initiated and 3202
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
phase reclosing can follow, if selected. A maximum of four additional shots can be
done (according to the NoOfShots parameter). At 2-phase trip (TR2P high and TR3P
low), the operation is similar to the above. But, if the first reclosing shot fails, a 3phase trip will be issued and the auto-reclosing will be blocked. No more shots are
attempted! The expression 1*2ph should be understood as Just one shot at 2-phase
reclosing During 3-phase trip (TR2P low and TR3P high) the auto-reclosing will be
blocked and no reclosing takes place.
FirstShot=1ph + 1*2/3ph 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the

first shot
At 1-phase trip, the operation is as described above. If the first reclosing shot fails, a
3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosing will follow, if selected.At 2-phase
or 3-phase trip, the operation is similar to the above. But, if the first reclosing shot
fails, a 3-phase trip command will be issued and the auto-reclosing will be blocked.
No more shots take place! 1*2/3ph should be understood as Just one shot at 2-phase
or 3-phase reclosing.
FirstShot=1ph + 1*2/3ph 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the

first shot.
At 1-phase trip, the operation is as described above. If the first reclosing shot fails, a
3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosing will follow, if selected.At 2-phase
or 3-phase trip, the operation is similar as above. But, if the first reclosing shot fails,
a 3-phase trip will be issued and the auto-reclosing will be blocked. No more shots
take place! 1*2/3ph should be understood as Just one shot at 2-phase or 3-phase
reclosing.
Table 64:
First Shot
1st shot
2nd-5th shot
3ph
3ph
3ph
1/2/3ph
1ph
3ph
2ph
3ph
--
3ph
3ph
--
1/2ph
1ph
3ph
2ph
3ph
--
--
--
1ph + 1*2ph
1ph
3ph
2ph
--
--
--
--
1ph
3ph
2ph
3ph
3ph
--
1ph
3ph
2ph
--
3ph
--
1/2ph + 1*3ph
1ph + 1*2/3ph
REB 670
Type of reclosing shots at different settings of FirstShot
Application manual
203
Section 4
IED application
A start of a new reclosing cycle is blocked during the set reclaim time after the
selected number of reclosing shots have been made.
Eternal selection of auto-reclose mode
The auto-reclose mode can be selected by use of the available logic function blocks.
Below is an example where the choice of mode is done from a symbol on the local
HMI through selector switch function block with only 3 phase or 1/3 phase mode,
but alternatively there can e.g. be a physical selector switch on the front of the panel
which is connected to a binary to integer function block (B16I).
If the PSTO input is used, connected to the Local-Remote switch on the LHMI, the
choice can also be from the station HMI system, typically ABB Microscada through
IEC 61850 communication.
The connection example for selection of the auto-reclose mode is shown in . Selected
names are just examples but note that the symbol on LHMI can only show three signs.
SL01(180,100)
SLGGIO
INTONE
3
1/3
PSTO
AR01(2401,8)
SMBRREC_79
NAME1
SWPOSN
MODEINT
NAME2
en07000119.vsd
Figure 89:
Selection of the auto-reclose mode from a LHMI symbol through a

selector switch function block.
Reclosing ReclaimReset timer
The Reclaim timer tReclaim defines the time it takes from issue of the reclosing
command, until the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this
time, it is treated as a continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when
the CB closing command is given.
Pulsing of the CB closing command and Counter
The CB closing command, CLOSECB is given as a pulse with a duration set by

parameter tPulse. For circuit-breakers without an anti-pumping function, close pulse
cutting can be used. It is selected by parameter CutPulse=On. In case of a new trip
pulse (start), the closing command pulse is then cut (interrupted). The minimum
closing pulse length is always 50 ms. At the issue of the Reclosing command, the
appropriate Reclosing operation counter is incremented. There is a counter for each
type of Reclosing and one for the total number of Reclosing commands.
Transient fault
After the Reclosing command the reclaim timer keeps running for the set time. If no
tripping occurs within this time, tReclaim, the Auto-Reclosing will reset. The CB
204
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
remains closed and the operating gear recharges. The input signals CBPOS and
CBREADY will be set
Permanent fault and Reclosing unsuccessful signal
If a new trip occurs, and a new input signal START or TRSOTF appears, after the
CB closing command, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The
timers for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the set number of
Reclosing shots further shots may be made or the Reclosing sequence is ended. After
reclaim timer time-out the Auto-Reclosing function resets, but the CB remains open.
The CB closed information through the input CBPOS is missing. Thus the reclosing
function is not ready for a new reclosing cycle. Normally the signal UNSUCCL
appears when a new trip and start is received after the last reclosing shot has been
made and the Auto-Reclosing function is blocked. The signal resets after reclaim
time. The unsuccessful signal can also be made to depend on CB position input.
The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should then be set to CBCheck, and a timer
tUnsucCl should be set too. If the CB does not respond to the closing command and
does not close, but remains open, the output UNSUCCL is set high after time
tUnsucCl. The Unsuccessful output can e. g. be used in Multi-Breaker arrangement
to cancel the Auto-Reclosing function for the second breaker if the first breaker closed
onto a persistent fault. It can also be used to generate a Lock-out of manual closing
until the operator has reset the lock-out, see separate section.
Lock-Out initiation
In many cases there is a requirement that a Lock-out is generated when the AutoReclosing attempt fails. This is done with logic connected to the in- and outputs of
the Auto-Reclose function and connected to Binary IO as required. Many alternative
ways of performing the logic exist depending on whether manual closing is
interlocked in the IED, whether an external physical Lock-out relay exists and
whether the reset is hardwired, or carried out by means of communication. There are
also different alternatives regarding what shall generate Lock-out. Examples of
questions are:
Shall back-up time delayed trip give Lock-out (normally yes)

Shall Lock-out be generated when closing onto a fault (mostly).
Shall Lock-out be generated when the Auto-Recloser was OFF at the fault or e.g.
in Single phase AR mode and the fault was multi-phase (normally not as not
closing attempt has been given).
Shall Lock-out be generated if the Breaker did not have sufficient operating
power for an Auto-Reclosing sequence (normally not as no closing attempt has
been given)
In figures 90 and 91 the logic shows how a closing Lock-out logic can be designed
with the Lock-out relay as an external relay alternatively with the lock-out created
internally with the Manual closing going through the Synchro-check function. An
example of Lock-out logic.
REB 670
Application manual
205
Section 4
IED application
OR
AR
BJ-TRIP
INHIBIT
SOTF-TRIP
UNSUCCL
OR
SMBO
Lock-out
RXMD1
11
BFP
TRBU
21
12
MAIN ZAK CLOSE
CLOSE COMMAND
en05000315.vsd
Figure 90:
BJ-TRIP
Lock-out arranged with an external lock-out relay.
OR
AR
INHIBIT
SOTF-TRIP
UNSUCCL
OR
TR
SETLKOUT
CLLOUT
BFP
SOFTWARE
OR IO RESET
BJTRIP
RESET LOCK-OUT
RSTLOUT
AND
OR
SMBO
MAN CLOSE
AR CLOSE
SYNC
AUTO STOP
OR
CLOSE COMMAND
MAN ENOK
en05000316.vsd
Figure 91:
Lock-out arranged with internal logic with manual closing going

through in IED
Evolving fault
An evolving fault starts as a single-phase fault which leads to single-phase tripping

and then the fault spreads to another phase. The second fault is then cleared by threephase tripping.
The Auto-Reclosing function will first receive a trip and start signal (START) without
any three-phase signal (TR3P). The Auto-Reclosing function will start a single-phase
reclosing, if programmed to do so. At the evolving fault clearance there will be a new
signal START and three-phase trip information, TR3P. The single-phase reclosing
sequence will then be stopped, and instead the timer, t1 3Ph, for three-phase reclosing
will be started from zero. The sequence will continue as a three-phase reclosing
sequence, if it is a selected alternative reclosing mode.
206
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
The second fault which can be single phase is tripped three phase because trip module
(TR) in the IED has an evolving fault timer which ensures that second fault is always
tripped three phase. For other types of relays where the relays do not include this
function the output PREP3PH (or the inverted PERMIT1PH) is used to prepare the
other sub-system for three phase tripping. This signal will, for evolving fault
situations be activated a short time after the first trip has reset and will thus ensure
that new trips will be three phase.
Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence
The Auto-Reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following

reclosing shots (if multiple shots are selected) even if start signals are not received
from the protection functions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting
parameter AutoCont = On and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function
to proceed without a new start.
Thermal overload protection holding the Auto-Reclosing function back
If the input THOLHOLD (thermal overload protection holding reclosing back) is

activated, it will keep the reclosing function on a hold until it is reset. There may thus
be a considerable delay between start of Auto-Reclosing and reclosing command to
the circuit-breaker. An external logic limiting the time and sending an inhibit to the
AR-INHIBIT input can be used. The input can also be used to set the Auto-Reclosing
on hold for a longer or shorter period.
4.7.1.2
Setting guidelines
Configuration
The PCM configuration tool is used to configure signals.

Automatic-recloser function parameters are set via the local HMI panel or the
Parameter Setting Tool (PST) is a part of the PCM 600 tool and is installed on a PC
and connected to the front panel of the IED with an ordinary ethernet cable. Please
refer to the Application Manual (AM) for a list of the setting parameters and the local
HMI path.
Recommendations for input signals
Please see examples in figure 92, figure 93 and figure 94 of default factory
configurations.
ON and OFF
These inputs can be connected to binary inputs or to a communication interface block
for external control.
START
It should be connected to the trip output protection function, which starts the autoreclosing function. It can also be connected to a binary input for start from an external
contact. A logical OR-gate can be used to combine the number of start sources.
REB 670
Application manual
207
Section 4
IED application
If StartByCBOpen is used, the CB Open condition shall also be

connected to the input START.
STARTHS, Start High-speed auto-reclosing
It is often not used and connected to FALSE. It may be used when one wants to use
two different dead times in different protection trip operations. This input starts the
dead time t1 3PhHS. High-speed reclosing shot 1 started by this input is without a
synchronization check.
INHIBIT
To this input shall be connected signals that interrupt a reclosing cycle or prevent a
start from being accepted. Such signals can come from protection for a line connected
shunt reactor, from transfer trip receive, from back-up protection functions, busbar
protection trip or from breaker failure protection. When the CB open position is set
to start the Auto-Recloser, then manual opening must also be connected here. The
inhibit is often a combination of signals from external IEDs via the IO and internal
functions. An OR gate is then used for the combination.
CBPOS and AR-CBREADY
These should be connected to binary inputs to pick-up information from the CB. The
CBPOS input is interpreted as CB Closed, if parameter CBAuxContType is set
NormOpen, which is the default setting. At three operating gears in the breaker (single
pole operated breakers) the connection should be All poles closed (series
connection of the NO contacts) or At least one pole open (parallel connection of
NC contacts) if the CBAuxContType is set to NormClosed. The CB Ready is a signal
meaning that the CB is ready for a reclosing operation, either Close-Open (CO), or
Open-Close-Open (OCO). If the available signal is of type CB not charged or not
ready, an inverter can be inserted in front of the CBREADY input.
SYNC
This is connected to the internal synchronism check function when required. It can
also be connected to a binary input for synchronization from an external device. If
neither internal nor external synchronism or energizing check is required, it can be
connected to a permanently high source, TRUE. The signal is required for three phase
shots 1-5 to proceed (Note! Not the HS step)
PLCLOST
This is intended for line protection permissive signal channel lost (fail) (e.g. PLC=
Power Line Carrier fail). It can be connected, when required to prolong the AR time
when communication is not working, i.e. one line end might trip with a zone 2 delay.
When the function is not used it is set to FALSE.
TRSOTF
This is the signal Trip by Switch Onto Fault. It is usually connected to the switch
onto fault output of line protection if multi-shot Auto-Reclose attempts are used.
The input will start the shots 2-5. For single shot applications the input is set to
FALSE.
THOLHOLD
208
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Signal Thermal overload protection holding back Auto-Reclosing. It is normally

set to FALSE. It can be connected to a thermal overload protection trip signal which
resets only when the thermal content has gone down to an acceptable level, e.g. 70%.
As long as the signal is high, indicating that the line is hot, the Auto-Reclosing is held
back. When the signal resets, a reclosing cycle will continue. Please observe that this
have a considerable delay! Input can also be used for other purposes if for some reason
the Auto-Reclose shot is halted.
TR2P and TR3P
Signals for two-phase and three-phase trip. They are usually connected to the
corresponding output of the TRIP block. They control the choice of dead time and
the reclosing cycle according to the selected program. Signal AR-TR2P needs to be
connected only if the trip has been selected to give 1/2/3 phase trip and an auto
reclosing cycle with two phase reclosing is foreseen.
WAIT
Used to hold back reclosing of the low priority unit during sequential reclosing.
See Recommendation for multi-breaker arrangement below! The signal is activated
from output AR-WFMASTER on the second breaker Auto-Recloser in multi-breaker
arrangements.
BLKON
Used to block the Auto-Reclosing function e.g. when certain special service
conditions arise. Input is normally set to FALSE. When used, blocking must be reset
with AR-BLOCKOFF.
BLOCKOFF
Used to Unblock the Auto-Reclosing function when it has gone to Block due to
activating input AR-BLKON or by an unsuccessful Auto-Reclose attempt if the
setting BlockUnsuc is set to On. Input is normally set to FALSE.
RESET
Used to Reset the Auto-Recloser to start condition. Possible Thermal overload Hold
etc. will be reset. Positions, setting On-Off etc. will be started and checked with set
times. Input is normally set to FALSE.
Recommendations for output signals
Please see figure 92, figure 93 and figure 94 and default factory configuration for
examples.
SETON
Can be used to indicate that the auto-reclose function is switched On and operative.
BLOCKED
Indicates that the auto-reclose function is temporarily or permanently blocked.
ACTIVE
Indicates that the AR is active, from start until end of reclaim time.
INPROGR
Indicates that a sequence is in progress, from start until reclosing command.
REB 670
Application manual
209
Section 4
IED application
UNSUCCL
Indicates unsuccessful reclosing.
CLOSECB
Connect to a binary output for circuit-breaker closing command.
READY
Indicates that the Auto-reclosing function is ready for a new and complete reclosing
sequence. It can be connected to the zone extension of a line protection should
extended zone reach before automatic reclosing be necessary.
1PT1 and 2PT1
Indicates that 1-phase or 2-phase automatic reclosing is in progress. It is used to
temporarily block an earth-fault and/or pole disagreement function during the 1-phase
or 2-phase open interval.
3PT1,-3PT2,-3PT3,-3PT4 and -3PT5
Indicates that 3-phase automatic reclosing shots 1-5 are in progress. The signals can
be used as an indication of progress or for own logic.
PREP3P
Prepare 3-phase trip is usually connected to the trip block to force a coming trip to
be a 3-phase one. If the function cannot make a single- or two-phase reclosing, the
tripping should be three-phase.
PERMIT1P
Permit 1-phase trip is the inverse of AR-PREP1P. It can be connected to a binary
output relay for connection to external protection or trip relays. In case of a total loss
of auxiliary power, the output relay drops and does not allow 1-phase trip. If needed,
the signal can be inverted by a contact of the output relay breaking.
WFMASTER
Wait from master is used in high priority units to hold back reclosing of the low
priority unit during sequential reclosing. Refer to the recommendation for multibreaker arrangements in figure 94.
Other outputs
The other outputs can be connected for indication, disturbance recording etc. as
required.
210
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
IOM
IOM
AR
INPUT
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
PROTECTION
xxxx-TRIP
>1
SOTF-TRIP
ZM1--TRIP
>1
ON
OFF
F BLKON
T
BLOCKOFF
INHIBIT
CBREADY
CBPOS
PLCLOST
F
RESET
F
F
START
STARTHS
SKIPHS
TRSOTF
F
F
T
SYN-AUTOOK
F
F
THOLHOLD
TR2P
TR3P
OUTPUT
BLOCKED
SETON
INPROGR
ACTIVE
UNSUCCL
SUCCL
CLOSECB
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
PERMIT1P
PREP3P
READY
1PT1
2PT1
3PT1
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
3PT5
SYNC
WAIT
RSTCOUNT
WFMASTER
en04000135.vsd
Figure 92:
Example of I/O-signal connections at a three-phase reclosing

function
Setting recommendations for multi-breaker arrangements

Sequential reclosing in multi-breaker arrangements, like 1 1/2-breaker, double
breaker and ring bus, is achieved by giving the two line breakers different priorities.
Please refer to figure 94. In a single breaker arrangement the setting is Priority =
None. In a multi-breaker arrangement the setting for the first CB, the Master, is
Priority = High and for the other CB Priority = Low.
While the reclosing of the master is in progress, it issues the signal WFMASTER. A
reset delay of one second ensures that the WAIT signal is kept high for the duration
of the breaker closing time. After an unsuccessful reclosing it is also maintained by
the signal UNSUCCL. In the slave unit, the signal WAIT holds back a reclosing
operation. When the Wait signal is reset at the time of a successful reclosing of the
first CB, the slave unit is released to continue the reclosing sequence. A parameter
tWait sets a maximum waiting time for the reset of the WAIT. At time-out it interrupts
the reclosing cycle of the slave unit. If reclosing of the first breaker is unsuccessful,
the output signal UNSUCCL connected to the input INHIBIT of the slave unit
interrupts the reclosing sequence of the latter.
REB 670
Application manual
211
Section 4
IED application
The signals can be cross-connected to allow simple changing of the

priority by just setting the High and the Low priorities without
changing the configuration. The inputs CBPOS for each breaker are
important in multi breaker arrangements to ensure that the CB was
closed at the beginning of the cycle. If the High priority breaker is not
closed the High priority moves to the low priority breaker.
IOM
IOM
AR-
INPUT
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
PROTECTION
xxxx-TRIP
SOTF-TRIP
ZM1--TRIP
ON
OFF
F
BLKON
T
BLOCKOFF
INHIBIT
CBREADY
CBPOS
PLCLOST
F
STARTHS
SKIPHS
TRSOTF
>1
F
TRIP-TR2P
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
CLOSECB
PERMIT1P
xx
xx
xx
xx
RESET
START
>1
OUTPUT
BLOCKED
SETON
INPROGR
ACTIVE
UNSUCCL
SUCCL
PREP3P
READY
1PT1
2PT1
TRIP-P3PTR
>1
TEF-BLOCK
3PT1
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
3PT5
THOLHOLD
TR2P
TR3P
SYNC
TRIP-TR3P
SYN-AUTOOK
F
WAIT
RSTCOUNT
WFMASTER
en04000136.vsd
Figure 93:
212
Example of I/O-signal connections in a single-phase reclosing

function
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Terminal Master
Priority = High
AR
ON
OFF
BLKON
BLOCKOFF
INHIBIT
RESET
PLCLOST
BLOCKED
SETON
INPROGR
ACTIVE
UNSUCCL
SUCCL
READY
START
STARTHS
SKIPHS
CLOSECB
PERMIT1P
PREP3P
THOLHOLD
TRSOTF
CBREADY
CBPOS
SYNC
WAIT
RSTCOUNT
CB1
CB2
1PT1
2PT1
3PT1
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
3PT5
WFMASTER
Terminal Slave
Priority = Low
AR
ON
OFF
BLKON
BLOCKOFF
INHIBIT
RESET
PLCLOST
START
STARTHS
SKIPHS
TRSOTF
THOLHOLD
BLOCKED
SETON
INPROGR
ACTIVE
UNSUCCL
SUCCL
READY
CLOSECB
PERMIT1P
PREP3P
1PT1
2PT1
3PT1
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
3PT5
CBREADY
CBPOS
SYNC
WAIT
WFMASTER
*) Other input/output signals as in previous single
breaker arrangements
Figure 94:
en04000137.vsd
Additional input and output signals at multi-breaker arrangement
Auto-recloser parameter settings
REB 670
Application manual
213
Section 4
IED application
Operation
The operation of the Auto-reclose function can be switched on and off. The setting
external control makes it possible to switch it on or off using an external switch via
IO or communication ports.
NoOfShots, Number of reclosing shots
In power transmission 1 shot is mostly used. In most cases one reclosing shot is
sufficient as the majority of arcing faults will cease after the first reclosing shot. In
power systems with many other types of faults caused by other phenomena, for
example wind, a greater number of reclose attempts (shots) can be motivated.
First shot and reclosing program
There are six different possibilities in the selection of reclosing programs. What type
of reclosing to use for the different kinds of faults depends on the power system
configuration and on the users practices and preferences. When the circuit-breakers
only have three-phase operation, then three-phase reclosing has to be chosen. This is
usually the case in subtransmission and distribution lines. Three-phase tripping and
reclosing for all types of faults is also widely accepted in completely meshed power
systems. In transmission systems with few parallel circuits, single-phase reclosing
for single-phase faults is an attractive alternative for maintaining service and system
stability.
Auto-reclosing open times, dead times
Single-phase auto-reclosing time: A typical setting is t1 1Ph = 800ms. Due to the
influence of energized phases the arc extinction may not be instantaneous. In long
lines with high voltage the use of shunt reactors in the form of a star with a neutral
reactor improves the arc extinction.
Three-phase shot 1 delay: For three-phase high-speed auto-reclosing (HSAR) a
typical open time is 400 ms. Different local phenomena, such as moisture, salt,
pollution etc. can influence the required dead time. Some users apply delayed autoreclosing (DAR) with delays of 10 s or more. The delay of reclosing shot 2 and
possible later shots are usually set at 30 s or more. A check that the CB duty cycle
can manage the selected setting must be done. The setting can in some cases be
restricted by national regulations. For multiple shots the setting of shots 2-5 must be
longer than the circuit breaker duty cycle time.
Extended t1 and tExtended t1, Extended auto-reclosing open time for shot 1.
The communication link in a permissive (not strict) line protection scheme, for
instance a power line carrier (PLC) link, may not always be available. If lost, it can
result in delayed tripping at one end of a line. There is a possibility to extend the autoreclosing open time in such a case by use of an input to PLCLOST, and the setting
parameters. Typical setting in such a case: Extended t1 = ON and tExtended t1 = 0.8
s.
tSync, Maximum wait time for synchronizationsynchronism check
The time window should be coordinated with the operate time and other settings of
the synchronization check function. Attention should also be paid to the possibility
214
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
of a power swing when reclosing after a line fault. Too short a time may prevent a
potentially successful reclosing. A typical setting may be 2.0 s.
tTrip, Long trip pulse
Usually the trip command and start auto-reclosing signal reset quickly as the fault is
cleared. A prolonged trip command may depend on a CB failing to clear the fault. A
trip signal present when the CB is reclosed will result in a new trip. Depending on
the setting Extended t1 = Off or On a trip/start pulse longer than the set time tTrip
will either block the reclosing or extend the auto-reclosing open time. At a setting
somewhat longer than the auto-reclosing open time, this facility will not influence
the reclosing. A typical setting of tTrip could be close to the auto-reclosing open time.
tInhibit, Inhibit resetting delay
A typical setting is tInhibit = 5.0 s to ensure reliable interruption and temporary
blocking of the function. Function will be blocked during this time after the tinhibit
has been activated.
tReclaim, Reclaim time
The reclaim time sets the time for resetting the function to its original state, after
which a line fault and tripping will be treated as an independent new case with a new
reclosing cycle. One may consider a nominal CB duty cycle of for instance, O-0.3sec
CO- 3 min. CO. However the 3 minute (180 s) recovery time is usually not critical
as fault levels are mostly lower than rated value and the risk of a new fault within a
short time is negligible. A typical time may be tReclaim = 60 or 180 s dependent of
the fault level and breaker duty cycle.
StartByCBOpen = Off, On
The normal setting is Off. It is used when the function is started by protection trip
signals Follow CB = Off, On The usual setting is Follow CB = Off. The setting ON
can be used for delayed reclosing with long delay, to cover the case when a CB is
being manually closed during the auto-reclosing open time before the autoreclosing function has issued its CB closing command.
tCBClosedMin
A typical setting is 5.0 s. If the CB has not been closed for at least this minimum time,
a reclosing start will not be accepted.
CBAuxContType, CB auxiliary contact type = NormOpen, NormClosed
(Normally Open, Normally Closed)
It shall be set to correspond to the CB auxiliary contact used. A NormOPen contact
is recommended in order to generate a positive signal when the CB is in the closed
position.
CBReadyType = CO or OCO, Type of CB ready signal connected
The selection depends on the type of performance available from the CB operating
gear. At setting OCO (CB ready for an Open Close Open cycle), the condition
is checked only at the start of the reclosing cycle. The signal will disappear after
tripping, but the CB will still be able to perform the C-O sequence. For the selection
CO (CB ready for a Close Open cycle) the condition is also checked after the set
auto-reclosing dead time. This selection has a value first of all at multi-shot reclosing
REB 670
Application manual
215
Section 4
IED application
to ensure that the CB is ready for a C-O sequence at shot 2 and further shots. During
single-shot reclosing, the OCO selection can be used. A breaker shall according to
its duty cycle always have storing energy for a CO operation after the first trip. (IEC
56 duty cycle is O-0.3secCO-3minCO).
tPulse, Breaker closing command pulse duration
The pulse should be long enough to ensure reliable operation of the CB. A typical
setting may be tPulse=200 ms. A longer pulse setting may facilitate dynamic
indication at testing, e.g. in the CAP program Debug mode. In CBs without antipumping relays, the setting Cut Pulse = ON can be used to avoid repeated closing
operation when reclosing onto a fault. A new start will then cut the ongoing pulse.
BlockUnsuc
Setting of whether an Unsuccessful Auto-Reclose attempt shall set the Auto-Reclose
in Block. If used the inputs BLOCKOFF must be configured to unblock the function
after an unsuccessful Reclosing attempt.Normal setting is Off.
UnsucClByCBCheck, Unsuccessful closing by CB check = NoCBCheck,
CBCheck and tUnsucCl
The normal setting is NoCBCheck. The auto-reclosing unsuccessful event is then
decided by a new trip within the reclaim time after the last reclosing shot. If one wants
to get the UNSUCCL (Unsuccessful closing) signal in the case the CB does not
respond to the closing command, CLOSECB, one can set UnsucClByCBCheck=
CBCheck and set tUnsucCl for instance to 1.0 s.
Priority and time tWaitForMaster
In single CB applications, one sets Priority = None. At sequential reclosing the
function of the first CB, e.g. near the busbar, is set Priority = High and for the second
CB Priority = Low. The maximum waiting time, tWaitForMaster of the second CB
is set longer than the auto-reclosing open time and a margin for synchronism check
at the first CB. Typical setting is tWaitForMaster=2sec.
AutoCont and tAutoContWait, Automatic continuation to the next shot if the
CB is not closed within the set time
The normal setting is AutoCont = OFF. The tAutoContWait is the length of time the
AR waits to see if the breaker is closed when AutoCont is set to On. Normally the
setting can be tAutoContWait = 2 sec.
4.7.1.3
Setting parameters
216
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 65:
Parameter
REB 670
Basic parameter group settings for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
External ctrl
On
External ctrl
Off, ExternalCtrl, On
ARMode
3 phase
1/2/3ph
1/2ph
1ph+1*2ph
1/2ph+1*3ph
1ph+1*2/3ph
1/2/3ph
The AR mode
selection e.g. 3ph,
1/3ph
t1 1Ph
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Open time for shot 1,

single-phase
t1 3Ph
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
6.000

delayed reclosing 3ph
t1 3PhHS
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400

high speed reclosing
3ph
tReclaim
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
60.00
Duration of the
reclaim time
tSync
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
Maximum wait time

for synchrocheck OK
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Maximum trip pulse

duration
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Duration of the circuit

breaker closing pulse
tCBClosedMin
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
Min time that CB must

be closed before new
sequence allows
tUnsucCl
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
Wait time for CB

before indicating
Unsuccessful/
Successful
Priority
None
Low
High
None
Priority selection
between adjacent
terminals None/Low/
High
tWaitForMaster
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
60.00
Maximum wait time

for release from
Master
Application manual
217
Section 4
IED application
Table 66:
Parameter
Advanced parameter group settings for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
NoOfShots
1
2
3
4
5
Max number of
reclosing shots 1-5
StartByCBOpen
Off
On
Off
To be set ON if AR is
to be started by CB
open position
CBAuxContType
NormClosed
NormOpen
NormOpen
Select the CB aux

contact type NC/NO
for CBPOS input
CBReadyType
CO
OCO
CO
Select type of circuit

breaker ready signal
CO/OCO
t1 2Ph
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000

two-phase
t2 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00

three-phase
t3 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00

three-phase
t4 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00

three-phase
t5 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00

three-phase
Extended t1
Off
On
Off
Extended open time

at loss of permissive
channel Off/On
tExtended t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
3Ph Dead time is

extended with this
value at loss of perm
ch
tInhibit
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Inhibit reclosing reset

time
CutPulse
Off
On
Off
Shorten closing pulse

at a new trip Off/On
Follow CB
Off
On
Off
Advance to next shot

if CB has been closed
during dead time
AutoCont
Off
On
Off
Continue with next

reclosing-shot if
breaker did not close
tAutoContWait
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Wait time after close

command before
proceeding to next
shot
218
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
4.7.2
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UnsucClByCBChk
NoCBCheck
CB check
NoCBCheck
Unsuccessful closing
signal obtained by
checking CB position
BlockByUnsucCl
Off
On
Off
Block AR at
unsuccessful
reclosing
ZoneSeqCoord
Off
On
Off
Coordination of down
stream devices to
local prot unit's AR
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation (SLGGIO)
Function block name: SLxx
ANSI number:
SLGGIO
4.7.2.1
Application
The SLGGIO function block (or the selector switch function block, as it is also
known) is used within the CAP configuration tool in order to get a selector switch
functionality similar with the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware
selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions
operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance
issues, lower system reliability and extended purchase portfolio. The virtual selector
switches eliminate all these problems.
The SLGGIO function block has two operating inputs (UP and DOWN), one blocking
input (BLOCK) and one operator position input (PSTO). The normal way a selector
switch is connected would be in accordance with fig.:
This is a minimal configuration, allowing for selector switch operation both from the
LHMI and from external sources (switches), via the IED binary inputs. It also allows
the operation from remote (like the station computer). The POS_NUM is an integer
value output, giving the actual output number. In this particular example, this is a
selector switch with 10 positions. Since the number of positions of the switch can be
established by settings (see below), one must be careful in coordinating the settings
with the configuration (if one sets the number of positions to x in settings for
example, there will be only the first x outputs available from the block in the
configuration). Also the frequency of the (UP or DOWN) pulses should be lower than
the setting tPulse.
From the LHMI, there are two modes of operating the switch: from the menu and
from the SLD. An example of these two types of operation is given in this document:
REB 670
Application manual
219
Section 4
IED application
4.7.2.2
Setting guidelines
The following settings are available for the Logic rotating switch for function
selection and LHMI presentation function:
Operation: Sets the operation of the function On or Off;
noOfPositions: Sets the number of positions in the switch (max. 32)- this setting
influence the behaviour of the switch when changes from the last to the first position;
outputType: Steady or Pulsed;
operatePulseLenght: In case of a pulsed output, it gives the length of the pulse (in
seconds);
timeDelay: The delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and
the output activation;
stopAtExtreme: Sets the behavior of the switch at the end positions if set to 0, when
pressing UP while on first position, the switch will jump to the last position; when
pressing DOWN at the last position, the switch will jump to the first position; when
set to 1, no jump will be allowed;
4.7.2.3
Setting parameters
Table 67:
Parameter
4.7.3
Basic general settings for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
NrPos
32
2 - 32
Number of positions
in the switch
OutType
Pulsed
Steady
Steady
Output type, steady or

pulse
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Operate pulse
duration, in [s]
tDelay
0.000 - 60000.000
0.010
0.000
Time delay on the

output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Stop when min or max

position is reached
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO)

Function block name: VS
ANSI number:
VSGGIO
220
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.7.3.1
Application
The VS function block (or the versatile switch function block) is a multipurpose
function used within the CAP tool for a variety of applications, as a general purpose
switch. This function can be used for both acquiring an external switch position
(through the IPOS1 and the IPOS2 inputs) and represent it through the single line
diagram symbols (or use it in the configuration through the outputs POS1 and POS2)
as well as a command function (controlled by the PSTO input), giving switching
commands through the CMD_POS12 and CMD_POS21 outputs.
The output POSITION is an integer output, showing the actual position (POS1, POS2,
INTERMEDIATE or BAD STATE) through an integer number (03).
An example where the VS switch is configured to switch auto reclose onoff from a
button symbol on the HMI is shown in figure 95. The I and OClose and Open buttons
on LHMI are used for onoff operations.
I140
OUT INV INPUT
VS01(180,100)
VSGGIO
INTONE
OFF
ON
PSTO
IPOS1
IPOS2
NAM_POS1
NAM_POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21
ON
OFF
AR01(2401,8)
SMBRREC_79
SETON
en07000112.vsd
Figure 95:
Control of auto reclose from LHMI through versatile switch
The switch is also provided with IEC 61850 communication so it can be controlled
from SA system as well.
An output can not be used to process the function.
4.7.3.2
Setting guidelines
The VS function can generate pulsed or steady commands (by setting the Mode
parameter one can change this). When pulsed commands are generated, the length of
the pulse can be set using the tPulse parameter. Also, being accessible on the single
line diagram (SLD), this function block has two control modes (settable through
CtlModel): Direct (called DirNorm) and Select-Before-Execute (called SBOEnh).
4.7.3.3
Setting parameters
REB 670
Application manual
221
Section 4
IED application
Table 68:
Parameter
4.7.4
Basic general settings for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
CtlModel
Dir Norm
SBO Enh
Dir Norm
Specifies the type for

control model
according to IEC
61850
Mode
Steady
Pulsed
Pulsed
Operation mode
tSelect
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
30.000
Max time between

select and execute
signals
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Command pulse
lenght
Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)

Function block name: DPx--
ANSI number:
DPGGIO
4.7.4.1
Application
The DPGGIO function block is used to send three logical outputs to other systems or
equipment in the substation. The three outputs are named OPEN, CLOSE and
VALID, since this function block is intended to be used as a position indicator
block in interlocking and reservation station-wide logics. For additional information
see also "".
4.7.4.2
Setting guidelines
There are no settings available for the user for DPGGIO. However, to get the signals
sent by DPGGIO one must use the engineering tools described in chapter
"Engineering of the IED".
4.7.4.3
Setting parameters
4.7.5
Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO)
222
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Function block name: SCx--
ANSI number:
SPC8GGIO
4.7.5.1
Application
The SC function block is a collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring
in commands from REMOTE (SCADA) or LOCAL (HMI) to those parts of the logic
configuration that do not need complicated function blocks that have the capability
to receive commands (for example SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be
sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the
result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary
inputs and SPGGIO function blocks, see figure 96.
SC01SPC8GGIO
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
BLOCK
PSTO
en07000143.vsd
Figure 96:
4.7.5.2
SC function block
Setting guidelines
The SC function block has the setting Operation, turning the function operation On/
Off. There are two settings for every command output (totally 8):
Latchedx: deciding if the command signal for output x is latched (steady) or pulsed.
tPulsex: if the previous setting was set on pulsed, then timePulsex will set the length
of the pulse (in seconds).
4.7.5.3
Setting parameters
REB 670
Application manual
223
Section 4
IED application
Table 69:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
Latched1
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 1
tPulse1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output1 Pulse Time
Latched2
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 2
tPulse2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output2 Pulse Time
Latched3
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 3
tPulse3
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output3 Pulse Time
Latched4
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 4
tPulse4
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output4 Pulse Time
Latched5
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 5
tPulse5
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output5 Pulse Time
Latched6
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 6
tPulse6
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output6 Pulse Time
Latched7
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 7
tPulse7
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output7 Pulse Time
Latched8
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/

latched mode for
output 8
tPulse8
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output8 pulse time
4.8
Logic
4.8.1
Configurable logic blocks (LLD)
4.8.1.1
Application
A high number of logic blocks and timers are available for user to adapt the
configuration to the specific application needs.
224
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.8.1.2
Setting guidelines
There are no settings for AND gates, OR gates, inverters or XOR gates.
For normal On/Off delay and pulse timers the time delays and pulse lengths are set
from the CAP configuration tool.
Both timers in the same logic block (the one delayed on pick-up and the one delayed
on drop-out) always have a common setting value. Pulse length settings are
independent of one another for all pulse circuits.
For controllable gates, settable timers and SR flip-flops with memory, the setting
parameters are accessible via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager
(PCM 600).
Configuration
Logic is configured using the CAP configuration tool.
Execution of functions as defined by the configurable logic blocks runs according to
a fixed sequence with different cycle times.
For each cycle time, the function block is given an serial execution number. This is
shown when using the CAP configuration tool with the designation of the function
block and the cycle time, for example, TMnn-(1044, 6). TMnn is the designation of
the function block, 1044 is the serial execution number and 6 is the cycle time.
The execution of different function blocks within the same cycle is determined by
the order of their serial execution numbers. Always remember this when connecting
two or more logical function blocks in series.
Always be careful when connecting function blocks with a fast cycle
time to function blocks with a slow cycle time.
Remember to design the logic circuits carefully and always check the
execution sequence for different functions. In other cases, additional
time delays must be introduced into the logic schemes to prevent
errors, for example, race between functions.
4.8.1.3
Setting parameters
Table 70:
Parameter
T
Table 71:
Parameter
T
REB 670
General settings for the Timer (TM01-) function

Range
0.000 - 90000.000
Step
0.001
Default
Unit
0.000
Description
Time delay of function
General settings for the Pulse (TP01-) function

Range
0.000 - 90000.000
Application manual
Step
0.001
Default
Unit
0.010
Description
Time delay of function
225
Section 4
IED application
Table 72:
Parameter
Memory
Table 73:
Parameter
Operation
Table 74:
Parameter
4.8.2
Parameter group settings for the SRM (SM01-) function

Range
Off
On
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operating mode of
the memory function
Parameter group settings for the GT (GT01-) function

Range
Off
On
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation Off/On
Parameter group settings for the TimerSet (TS01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
0.000 - 90000.000
0.001
0.000
Delay for settable

timer n
Fixed signal function block (FIXD)

Function block name: FIXD-
ANSI number:
FixedSignals
4.8.2.1
Application
The fixed signals function block generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals that
can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in the
other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating a certain logic.
4.8.2.2
Setting parameters
4.8.3
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I
226
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Function block name: BB--
ANSI number:
4.8.3.1
Application
The B16I function block (or the Boolean 16 to integer conversion block) is used within
the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. It can
be used for example, to connect logical output signals from a function (like distance
protection) to integer inputs from another function (like line differential protection).
The B16I does not have a logical node mapping.
4.8.3.2
Setting parameters
4.8.4
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node

representation (B16IGGIO)
Function block name: BA--
ANSI number:
B16IGGIO
4.8.4.1
Application
The B16IGGIO function block (or the Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic
node representation block) is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a
set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The B16IGGIO can receive an integer from a station
computer for example, over IEC61850. These functions are very useful when you
want to generate logical commands (for selector switches or voltage controllers) by
inputting an integer number. The B16IGGIO has a Logical Node mapping in the
IEC61850.
4.8.4.2
Setting parameters
4.8.5
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)
REB 670
Application manual
227
Section 4
IED application
Function block name: IY- -
ANSI number:
4.8.5.1
Application
The IB16 function block (or the integer to Boolean 16 conversion block) is used within
the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. It can
be used for example, to connect logical output signals from a function (like distance
protection) to integer inputs from another function (like line differential protection).
The IB16 does not have a logical node mapping.
4.8.5.2
Setting parameters
4.8.6
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation (IB16GGIO)
Function block name: IX--
ANSI number:
IB16GGIO
4.8.6.1
Application
The IB16GGIO function block (or the integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic
node representation block) is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a
set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The IB16GGIO can receive an integer from a station
computer for example, over IEC61850. These functions are very useful when you
want to generate logical commands (for selector switches or voltage controllers) by
inputting an integer number. The IB16GGIO has a Logical Node mapping in the
IEC61850.
4.8.6.2
Setting parameters
228
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.9
Monitoring
4.9.1
Measurements (MMXU)
Function block name: SVRx-
ANSI number:
CVMMXU
Function block name: CPxx
P, Q, S, I, U, f
ANSI number:
CMMXU
Function block name: VNx
ANSI number:
VNMMXU
Function block name: VPx-
ANSI number:
VMMXU
REB 670
Application manual
229
Section 4
IED application
Function block name: CSQx
ANSI number:
CMSQI
Function block name: VSQx
I1, I2, I0
ANSI number:
VMSQI
4.9.1.1
U1, U2, U0
Application
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM 600 or to station level e.g.via
IEC61850). The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power,
reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient
production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the
system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.
Additionally it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and
control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument
transformers (i.e. CTs & VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the
measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of
the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally it can be used to verify
proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection
function.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual
hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,
i.e the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact
of noise in the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value
can also be based on periodic reporting.
230
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
The measuring function, SVR (CVMMXU), provides the following power system
quantities:
P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

PF: power factor
U: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude
I: phase current magnitude
F: power system frequency
The measuring functions CP (CMMXU), VN (VNMMWU) and VP (VMMXU)

provides physical quantities:
I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU)

U: voltages (phase and phase-phase voltage, magnitude and angle) (VMMXU,
VNMMXU)
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual
hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
The measuring functions CSQ (CMSQI) and VSQ (VMSQI) provides sequential
quantities:
I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle)

U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and
angle).
The SVR function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental

frequency phasors (i.e. DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage
signals. The measured power quantities are available either as instantaneously
calculated quantities or averaged values over a period of time (i.e. low pass filtered)
depending on the selected settings.
4.9.1.2
Setting guidelines
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM
600.
The parameters for the Measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are set via the local
Operation: Off/On. Every function instance (SVRx, CPxx, VNxx, VP0x, CSQxx,
VSQx) can be taken in operation (On) or out of operation (Off). Default setting is
Off.
REB 670
Application manual
231
Section 4
IED application
The following general settings can be set for the Service Value functions (SVR).
PowAmpFact: Amplitude factor to scale power calculations. The setting range is
0.000-6.000. Default setting is 1.000, which also is a typical setting.
PowAngComp: Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & U. The
setting range is 180 degrees. Default setting is 0 degree, which also is a typical
setting.
Mode: Selection of measured current and voltage. There are 9 different ways of
calculating monitored three-phase values depending on the available VT inputs
connected to the IED. See parameter group setting table. Default setting expects
complete VT information (L1,L2,L3).
k: Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I. The setting range is
0.0-1.0. Default setting is 0.0 i.e. no filtering, which also is a typical setting.
UGenZeroDb: Minimum level of voltage in % of UBase used as indication of zero
voltage (zero point clamping). If measured value is below UGenZeroDb calculated
S, P, Q and PF will be zero. The setting range is 1-100%. Default setting is 5%.
IGenZeroDb: Minimum level of current in % of Ibase used as indication of zero
current (zero point clamping). If measured value is below IGenZeroDb calculated S,
P, Q and PF will be zero. The setting range is 1-100%. Default setting is 5%.
UBase: Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage
setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage supervised
object. The setting range is 0.05-2000 kV. Default setting is 400 kV.
It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the supervised
object. The setting range is 1-99999 A. Default setting is 3000 A.
UAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of
Ur, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10%. Default setting is 0.
IAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of
Ir, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10%. Default setting is 0.
IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Ir, where
Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10 degrees. Default setting is 0.
The following general settings can be set for the phase current monitoring
functions (CP).
IAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of
Ir, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10%. Default setting is 0.
IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Ir, where
Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10 degrees. Default setting is 0.
232
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
The following general settings can be set for the phase-phase voltage monitoring
functions (VP).
UAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of
Ur, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10%. Default setting is 0.
UAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Ur,
where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10 degrees. Default setting is
0.
The following general settings can be set for all monitored quantities included in
the functions (SVR, CP, VN, VP, CSQ and VSQ).
Xmin: Minimum value for analog signal X (X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3,
UL1-3UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0)) set directly in applicable measuring unit.
Xmax: Maximum value for analog signal X.
XZeroDb: Zero point clamping. A signal value less than XZeroDb is forced to zero.
The setting range is 0-100000 in steps of 0.001% related to measuring range. Default
setting is 0. Observe the related zero point clamping settings in Setting group N for
SVR (UGenZeroDb and IGenZeroDb). If measured value is below UGenZeroDb and/
or IGenZeroDb calculated S, P, Q and PF will be zero and these settings will override
XZeroDb.
XRepTyp: Reporting type. Cyclic (Cyclic), amplitude deadband (Dead band) or
integral deadband (Int deadband). The reporting interval is controlled by the
parameter XDbRepInt. Default setting is Cyclic.
XDbRepInt: Reporting deadband setting. Cyclic reporting is the setting value and is
reporting interval in seconds. Amplitude deadband is the setting value in % of
measuring range. Integral deadband setting is the integral area, i.e. measured value
in % of measuring range multiplied by the time between two measured values. Default
setting is 10.
XHiHiLim: High-high limit. Set in applicable measuring unit. The setting range is
10000000000 in steps of 0.001. Default setting is 900106 (i.e 900 MW/MVar/
MVA).
XHiLim: High limit. Default setting is 800106 (i.e 800 MW/MVar/MVA).
XLowLim: Low limit. Default setting is -800106.
XLowLowLim: Low-low limit. Default setting is -900106.
XLimHyst: Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits. The setting
range is 0-100 in steps of 0.001. Default setting is 5%.
All phase angles are presented in relation to defined reference channel. The parameter
PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog inputs".
Calibration curves
REB 670
Application manual
233
Section 4
IED application
It is possible to calibrate the functions (SVR, CP, VN and VP) to get class 0.5
presentations of currents, voltages and powers. This is accomplished by amplitude
and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The
compensation curve will have the characteristic for amplitude and angle
compensation of currents as shown in figure 97 (example). The first phase will be
used as reference channel and compared with the curve for calculation of factors. The
factors will then be used for all related channels.
% of Ir
Amplitude
compensation
-10
IAmpComp5
Measured
current
IAmpComp30
IAmpComp100
30
% of Ir
0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant
-10
Degrees
100
Angle
compensation
-10
Measured
current
IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
30
100
% of Ir
-10
en05000652.vsd
Figure 97:
Calibration curves
Setting examples
Three setting examples, in connection to service values (SVR), are provided:
SVR measurement function application for a 400 kV OHL

SVR measurement function application on the secondary side of a transformer
SVR measurement function application for a generator
For each of them detail explanation and final list of selected setting parameters values
will be provided.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual
hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
234
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Measurement function application for a 400 kV OHL
Single line diagram for this application is given in the figure 98:
400kV Busbar
800/1 A
400 0,1
/
kV
3
3
400kV OHL
Figure 98:
en05000374.vsd
SLD for 400 kV OHL application
In order to monitor, supervise and calibrate the active and reactive power as indicated
in the above figure it is necessary to do the following:
1.
2.
3.
Set correctly CT and VT data and phase angle reference channel

PhaseAngleRef (see section "Analog inputs") using the Parameter Setting Tool
(a part of PCM 600) for analog input channels
Connect in Application Configuration Tool ( a part of PCM 600) measurement
function to three-phase CT and VT inputs
Set under General settings parameters for the Service Value Report function:
general settings as shown in table 75.

level supervision of active power as shown in table 76.
calibration parameters as shown in table 77.
Table 75:
General settings parameters for the Service Value Report function
CAP & PST name Short Description (60 char)
Selected
value
Comments
Operation
Operation Off/On
On
Function must be "On"
PowAmpFact
Amplitude factor to scale power

calculations
1.000
It can be used during

commissioning to achieve higher
measurement accuracy. Typically
no scaling is required
PowAngComp
Angle compensation for phase

shift between measured I & U
0.0
It can be used during

commissioning to achieve higher
measurement accuracy. Typically
no angle compensation is
required. As well here required
direction of P & Q measurement is
towards protected object (i.e. as
per IED internal default direction)
Mode
Selection of measured current

and voltage
L1, L2, L3
All three phase to ground VT

inputs are available
REB 670
Application manual
235
Section 4
IED application
Selected
value
Comments
Low pass filter coefficient for

power measurement, U and I
0.00
Typically no additional filtering is

required
UGenZeroDb
Zero point clamping in % of Ubase
25
Set minimum voltage level to 25%.

Voltage below 25% will force S, P
and Q to zero.
IGenZeroDb
Zero point clamping in % of Ibase
Set minimum current level to 3%.

Current below 3% will force S, P
and Q to zero.
UBase
Base setting for voltage level in kV
400.00
Set rated OHL phase-to-phase

voltage
IBase
Base setting for current level in A
800
Set rated primary CT current used

for OHL
Table 76:
Settings parameters for level supervision
Selected
value
Comments
PMin
Minimum value
-750
Minimum expected load
PMax
Minimum value
750
Maximum expected load
PZeroDb
Zero point clamping in 0.001% of

range
3000
Set zero point clamping to 45 MW

i.e. 3% of 1500 MW
PRepTyp
Reporting type
db
Select amplitude deadband

supervision
PDbRepInt
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In %

of range, Int Db: In %s
Set db=30 MW i.e. 2% (larger

changes than 30 MW will be
reported)
PHiHiLim
High High limit (physical value)
600
High alarm limit i.e. extreme

overload alarm
PHiLim
High limit (physical value)
500
High warning limit i.e. overload

warning
PLowLim
Low limit (physical value)
-800
Low warning limit. Not active
PLowLowlLim
Low Low limit (physical value)
-800
Low alarm limit. Not active
PLimHyst
Hysteresis value in % of range

(common for all limits)
Set Hysteres=30 MW i.e. 2%
Table 77:
Settings for calibration parameters
Selected
value
IAmpComp5
Amplitude factor to calibrate

current at 5% of Ir
0.00
IAmpComp30

current at 30% of Ir
0.00
IAmpComp100

0.00
UAmpComp5

voltage at 5% of Ur
0.00
Comments
236
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Selected
value
UAmpComp30

voltage at 30% of Ur
0.00
UAmpComp100

voltage at 100% of Ur
0.00
IAngComp5
Angle calibration for current at 5%

of Ir
0.00
IAngComp30
Angle pre-calibration for current at

30% of Ir
0.00
IAngComp100
Angle pre-calibration for current at

100% of Ir
0.00
Comments
Measurement function application for a power transformer

Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 99.
110kV Busbar
200/1
31,5 MVA
110/36,75/(10,5) kV
Yy0(d5)
500/5
UL1L2
35 / 0,1kV
35kV Busbar
Figure 99:
en05000375.vsd
SLD for transformer application
In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in the above figure, it
is necessary to do the following:
REB 670
Application manual
237
Section 4
IED application
1.
2.
3.
Set correctly all CT and VT and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef
(see section "Analog inputs") data using the Parameter Setting Tool for analog
input channels
Connect in Application Configuration Tool measurement function to LV side
CT & VT inputs
Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the
following table:
CAP & PST name Short description (60 char)
Selected
value
Comment
Operation
Operation Off/On
On
Function must be "On"
PowAmpFact

calculations
1.000
Typically no scaling is required
PowAngComp

180.0
Typically no angle compensation

is required. However here the
required direction of P & Q
measurement is towards busbar
(i.e. Not per IED internal default
direction). Therefore angle
compensation have to be used in
order to get measurements in
aliment with the required direction.
Mode

and voltage
L1L2
Only UL1L2 phase-to-phase

voltage is available

0.00

required
UGenZeroDb
25
Set minimum voltage level to 25%
IGenZeroDb
Set minimum current level to 3%
UBase
35.00
Set LV side rated phase-to-phase

voltage
IBase
495
Set transformer LV winding rated

current
Measurement function application for a generator

Single line diagram fro this application is given in figure 100.
238
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
220kV Busbar
300/1
100 MVA
242/15,65 kV
Yd5
15 / 0,1kV
UL1L2 , UL2L3
P
100MVA
15,65kV
4000/5
en05000376.vsd
Figure 100:
SLD for generator application
In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in the above figure, it
is necessary to do the following:
1.
2.
3.
Set correctly all CT and VT data and phase angle reference channel
PhaseAngleRef (see section "Analog inputs") using the Parameter Setting Tool
for analog input channels
Connect in Application Configuration Tool measurement function to the
generator CT & VT inputs
Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the
following table:
Selected
value
Comment
Operation
Operation Off/On
On
Function must be On"
PowAmpFact

calculations
1.000
Typically no scaling is required
PowAngComp

0.0
Typically no angle compensation

is required. As well here required
direction of P & Q measurement is
towards protected object (i.e. as
per IED internal default direction)
REB 670
Application manual
239
Section 4
IED application
4.9.1.3
Selected
value
Comment
Mode

and voltage
Arone
Generator VTs are connected

between phases (i.e. Vconnected)

0.00

required
UGenZeroDb
25%
Set minimum voltage level to 25%
IGenZeroDb
Set minimum current level to 3%
UBase
15,65
Set generator rated phase-tophase voltage
IBase
3690
Set generator rated current
Setting parameters
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM
600.
Table 78:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function

Default
Unit
SLowLim
Range
0.000 10000000000.000
Step
0.001
0.000
VA
Description
Low limit (physical
value)
SLowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
VA
Low Low limit

(physical value)
SMin
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
VA
Minimum value
SMax
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000000000.000
VA
Maximum value
SRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
PMin
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-1000000000.000
Minimum value
PMax
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000000000.000
Maximum value
PRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
QMin
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-1000000000.000
VAr
Minimum value
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for

current level in A
240
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
QMax
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000000000.000
VAr
Maximum value
QRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base setting for

voltage level in kV
Mode
L1, L2, L3
Arone
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
L1, L2, L3
Selection of
measured current and
voltage
PowAmpFact
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
1.000
Amplitude factor to
scale power
calculations
PowAngComp
-180.0 - 180.0
0.1
0.0
Deg
Angle compensation
for phase shift
between measured I
&U
0.00 - 1.00
0.01
0.00
Low pass filter

coefficient for power
measurement, U and
I
PFMin
-1.000 - 0.000
0.001
-1.000
Minimum value
PFMax
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
Maximum value
PFRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UMin
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UMax
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
400000.000
Maximum value
URepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IMin
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IMax
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
REB 670
Application manual
241
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
FrMin
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Hz
Minimum value
FrMax
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
70.000
Hz
Maximum value
FrRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Table 79:
Parameter
Range
Step
Description
Advanced general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
Cycl: Report interval

(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping in

0,001% of range
SHiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900000000.000
VA
High High limit

(physical value)
SHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800000000.000
VA
High limit (physical

value)
SLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range (common for
all limits)
PDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
PZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
PHiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900000000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
PHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800000000.000

value)
PLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800000000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
PLowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900000000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
PLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
all limits)
QDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
QZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
242
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
QHiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900000000.000
VAr
High High limit

(physical value)
QHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800000000.000
VAr

value)
QLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800000000.000
VAr
Low limit (physical

value)
QLowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900000000.000
VAr
Low Low limit

(physical value)
QLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
all limits)
PFDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
PFZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
UGenZeroDb
1 - 100

% of Ubase
PFHiHiLim
-3.000 - 3.000
0.001
3.000
High High limit

(physical value)
IGenZeroDb
1 - 100

% of Ibase
PFHiLim
-3.000 - 3.000
0.001
2.000

value)
PFLowLim
-3.000 - 3.000
0.001
-2.000
Low limit (physical

value)
PFLowLowLim
-3.000 - 3.000
0.001
-3.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
PFLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
all limits)
UDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
UZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
UHiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
UHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000

value)
ULowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
ULowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
REB 670
Application manual
243
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
ULimHyst
Range
0.000 - 100.000
Step
0.001
5.000
Description
all limits)
IDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
IZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
IHiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900.000
High High limit

(physical value)
IHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800.000

value)
ILowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800.000
Low limit (physical

value)
ILowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
ILimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
all limits)
FrDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
FrZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
FrHiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
65.000
Hz
High High limit

(physical value)
FrHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
63.000
Hz

value)
FrLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
47.000
Hz
Low limit (physical

value)
FrLowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
45.000
Hz
Low Low limit

(physical value)
FrLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
all limits)
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
30% of Ur
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
100% of Ur
244
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
IAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
100% of Ir
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg
Angle calibration for

current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg

IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg

Table 80:
Parameter
Range
Step
Description
Basic general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IL1DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Mode On /
Off
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for

current level in A
IL1Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IL1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IL1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
IL2DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
IL2Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IL2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IL2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
IL3DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
REB 670
Application manual
245
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IL3Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IL3RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IL3AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
Table 81:
Parameter
Advanced general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IL1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
IL1HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900.000
High High limit

(physical value)
IL1HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800.000

value)
IAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
30% of Ir
IL1LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Low limit (physical

value)
IL1LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
100% of Ir
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg

current at 5% of Ir
IL1Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg

IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg

IL1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
IL2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
IL2HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900.000
High High limit

(physical value)
IL2HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800.000

value)
IL2LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Low limit (physical

value)
246
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
IL2LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
IL2Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IL2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
IL3ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%

0,001% of range
IL3HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900.000
High High limit

(physical value)
IL3HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800.000

value)
IL3LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Low limit (physical

value)
IL3LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
IL3Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IL3LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
Table 82:
Parameter
Range
Step
Description
Basic general settings for the VMMXU (VP01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UL12DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Mode On /
Off
UL12ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base setting for

voltage level in kV
UL12HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
UL12HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000

value)
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
30% of Ur
UL12LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
REB 670
Application manual
247
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UL12LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
100% of Ur
UL12Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UL12Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL12RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL12LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
UL12AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
UL12AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL23DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
UL23ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
UL23HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
UL23HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000

value)
UL23LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
UL23LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
UL23Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UL23Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL23RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL23LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
248
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
REB 670
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UL23AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
UL23AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL31DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
UL31ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
UL31HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
UL31HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000

value)
UL31LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
UL31LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
UL31Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UL31Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL31RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL31LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
UL31AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
UL31AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Application manual
249
Section 4
IED application
Table 83:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
3I0DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
3I0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
3I0HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900.000
High High limit

(physical value)
3I0HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800.000

value)
3I0LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800.000
Low limit (physical

value)
3I0LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
3I0Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
3I0Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
3I0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
3I0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
3I0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Mode On /
Off
3I0AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I1DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
I1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
I1HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900.000
High High limit

(physical value)
I1HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800.000

value)
I1LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800.000
Low limit (physical

value)
250
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
I1LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
I1Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
I1Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
I1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
I1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
I1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I2DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
I2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
I2HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900.000
High High limit

(physical value)
I2HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800.000

value)
I2LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800.000
Low limit (physical

value)
I2LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
I2Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
I2Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
I2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
REB 670
Application manual
251
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
I2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
I2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
I2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Table 84:
Parameter
Range
Step
Description
Basic general settings for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
3U0DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
3U0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
3U0HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
3U0HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000

value)
3U0LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
3U0LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
3U0Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
3U0Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
3U0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
3U0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
3U0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Mode On /
Off
3U0AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
252
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
U1DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
U1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
U1HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
U1HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000

value)
U1LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
U1LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
U1Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
U1Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
U1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
U1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
U1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
U1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
U2DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
U2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%

0,001% of range
U2HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
High High limit

(physical value)
U2HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000

value)
U2LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
Low limit (physical

value)
U2LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
Low Low limit

(physical value)
REB 670
Application manual
253
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
4.9.2
Default
Unit
U2Min
Range
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
Step
0.001
0.000
Description
Minimum value
U2Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
U2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
U2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
of range and is
U2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s

Int Db: In %s
U2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Event counter (GGIO)

Function block name: CNTx-
ANSI number:
CNTGGIO
4.9.2.1
Application
This function has six counters which are used for storing the number of times each
counter has been activated. All six counters have a common blocking function used,
for example, when testing. All sex counters has a common reset and a common
function.
4.9.2.2
Setting parameters
4.9.3
Event function (EV)

Function block name: EVxx-
ANSI number:
Event
254
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.9.3.1
Application
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication,
time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station
level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected
to the Event function block. The event function block is used for LON and SPA
communication.
Analog and double indication values are also transferred through the event block.
4.9.3.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the event function are set from the PST parameter setting
tool, part of PCM 600.
EventMaskCh_1 - 16
The inputs can be set individually as:
NoEvents
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect
LONChannelMask/SPAChannelMask
Definition of which part of the event function block that shall generate events:
Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
MinInterval_1 - 16
A time interval between cyclic events can be set individually for each input channel.
This can be set between 0.0 s to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s. It should normally be set
to 0, i.e. no cyclic communication.
MaxEvPerSec
Three times this setting value gives the maximum burst quota per input channel. A
reasonable value as default should be 10 events/s which gives 30 events/s as a
maximum sustained event rate per channel.
It is important to set the time interval for cyclic events in an optimized
way to minimize the load on the station bus.
REB 670
Application manual
255
Section 4
IED application
4.9.3.3
Setting parameters
Table 85:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the Event (EV01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SPAChannelMask
Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
Off
SPA channel mask
LONChannelMask
Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
Off
LON channel mask
EventMask1
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
Reporting criteria for

input 1
EventMask2
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 2
EventMask3
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 3
EventMask4
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 4
EventMask5
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 5
EventMask6
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 6
EventMask7
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 7
EventMask8
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 8
256
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
EventMask9
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 9
EventMask10
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 10
EventMask11
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 11
EventMask12
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 12
EventMask13
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 13
EventMask14
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 14
EventMask15
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 15
EventMask16
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect

input 16
MinRepIntVal1
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 1
MinRepIntVal2
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 2
MinRepIntVal3
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 3
MinRepIntVal4
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 4
MinRepIntVal5
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 5
MinRepIntVal6
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 6
MinRepIntVal7
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 7
REB 670
Application manual
257
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
4.9.4
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MinRepIntVal8
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 8
MinRepIntVal9
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 9
MinRepIntVal10
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 10
MinRepIntVal11
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 11
MinRepIntVal12
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 12
MinRepIntVal13
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 13
MinRepIntVal14
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 14
MinRepIntVal15
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 15
MinRepIntVal16
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 16
Measured value expander block

Function block name: XP
ANSI number:
RANGE_XP
4.9.4.1
Application
The functions MMXU (SVR, CP and VP), MSQI (CSQ and VSQ) and MVGGIO
(MV) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values
can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit
and high-high limit. The measure value expander block (XP) has been introduced to
be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary
signals i.e. below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or
above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable
logic.
4.9.4.2
Setting guidelines
There are no settable parameters for the measured value expander block function.
4.9.5
Disturbance report (RDRE)
258
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Function block name: DRP--, DRA1- DRA4-,

DRB1- DRB6-
ANSI number:
ABRDRE
4.9.5.1
Application
To get fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/
or in the secondary system it is very important to gather information on fault currents,
voltages and events. It is also important having a continuous event-logging to be able
to monitor in an overview perspective. These tasks are accomplished by the
Disturbance Report function and facilitate a better understanding of the power system
behavior and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance.
An analysis of the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to
explain a disturbance, basis for change of relay setting plan, improve existing
equipment etc. This information can also be used in a longer perspective when
planning for and designing new installations, i.e. a disturbance recording could be a
part of Functional Analysis (FA).
The Disturbance Report (DRP), always included in the IED, acquires sampled data
of all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function blocks i.e.
maximum 30 external analog, 10 internal derived analog and 96 binary signals.
The Disturbance Report function is a common name for several functions i.e.
Indications (IND), Event recorder (ER), Event List (EL), Trip Value recorder (TVR),
Disturbance recorder (DR).
The function is characterized by great flexibility as far as configuration, starting
conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity are concerned. Thus, the
disturbance report is not dependent on the operation of protective functions, and it
can record disturbances that were not discovered by protective functions for one
reason or another. The function can be used as an advanced stand-alone disturbance
recorder since there is more functionality in the Disturbance Report function then
usual.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED. The same applies to all events,
which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The Local Human Machine Interface
(LHMI) is used to get information about the recordings, and the disturbance report
files may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and
further analysis using the Disturbance Handling tool.
If the IED is connected to a station bus (IEC 61850-8-1), according to IEC 61850,
disturbance recorder and fault location information will be available on the bus. The
same information will be obtainable if IEC 60870-5-103 is used.
4.9.5.2
Setting guidelines
REB 670
Application manual
259
Section 4
IED application
The setting parameters for the Disturbance Report function (DRP) are set via the
LHMI or the tool included in PCM 600.
It is possible to handle up to 40 analog and 96 binary signals, either internal signals
or signals coming from external inputs. The binary signals are identical in all functions
i.e. Disturbance recorder (DR), Event Recorder (ER), Indication (IND), Trip Value
Recorder (TVR) and Event List function (EL).
User-defined names of binary and analog input signals can be set using the
configuration and parameter setting tool. The analog and binary signals appear with
their user-defined names. The name is used in all related functions (IND, EL, ER,
TVR and DR).
Figure ""Figure 101 shows the relations among Disturbance Report, included
functions and function blocks. EL, ER and IND uses information from the binary
input function blocks (DRB1- 6). TVR uses analog information from the analog input
function blocks (DRA1-3). The DR function acquires information from both DRAx
and DRBx.
DRA1-- 4-
Disturbance Report
DRP- -
A4RADR
RDRE
Analog signals
Trip Value Rec
DRB1-- 6-
Binary signals
Disturbance
Recorder
B6RBDR
Event List
Event Recorder
Indications
en05000160.vsd
Figure 101:
Disturbance report functions and related function blocks
For the Disturbance Report function there are a number of settings which also
influences the sub-functions.
Three LED indications placed above the LCD screen makes it possible to get quick
status information about the IED. The information:
260
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Green LED:
Steady light
In Service
Flashing light
Internal failure
Dark
No power supply
Yellow LED:
Steady light
A Disturbance Report is triggered
Flashing light
The IED is in test mode
Red LED:
Steady light
Triggered on binary signal N with SetLEDN=ON
Operation
The operation of the Disturbance Report function has to be set On or Off. If Off is
selected, note that no disturbance report is registered, and none sub-function will
operate (the only general parameter that influences EL).
Operation=Off:
Disturbance reports are not stored.

LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is not stored or changed.
Operation=On:
Disturbance report are stored, disturbance data can be read from the LHMI and
from a PC using PCM 600.
LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored.
Every recording will get a number (0 to 999) which is used as identifier (LHMI,
disturbance handling tool and IEC 61850). An alternative recording identification is
date, time and sequence number. The sequence number is automatically increased by
one for each new recording and is reset to zero at midnight. The maximum number
of recordings stored in the IED is 100 and the oldest will be overwritten when a new
one arrives (FIFO).
Recording times
The different recording times for the disturbance report are set (the pre-fault time,
post-fault time, and limit time). These recording times affect all sub-functions more
or less but not the EL function.
Prefault recording time (PreFaultRecT) is the recording time before the starting point
of the disturbance. The setting should be at least 0.1 s to ensure enough samples for
the estimation of pre-fault values in the Trip Value Recorder function.
Postfault recording time (PostFaultRecT) is the maximum recording time after the
disappearance of the trig-signal (does not influence the TVR-function).
REB 670
Application manual
261
Section 4
IED application
Recording time limit (TimeLimit) is the maximum recording time after trig. The
parameter limits the recording time if some trigging condition (fault-time) is very
long or permanently set (does not influence the TVR-function).
Post retrigger (PostRetrig) can be set to On or Off. Makes it possible to choose
performance of the Disturbance Report function if a new trig signal appears in the
post-fault window.
PostRetrig = Off
The function is insensitive for new trig signals during post fault time.
PostRetrig = On
The function completes current report and starts a new complete report i.e. the latter
will include:
new pre-fault- and fault-time (which will overlap previous report)

events and indications might be saved in the previous report too, due to overlap
new TVR- and FL-calculations (if installed, in operation and started)
Operation in test mode

If the IED is in test mode and OpModeTest=Off. The Disturbance Report function
does not save any recordings and no LED information is displayed.
If the IED is in test mode and OpModeTest=On. The Disturbance Report function
works in normal mode and the status is indicated in the saved recording.
Binary input signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected among internal logical and binary input
signals. The configuration tool is used to configure the signals.
For each of the 96 signals, it is also possible to select if the signal is to be used as a
trigger for the start of the disturbance report and if the trigger should be activated on
positive (1) or negative (0) slope.
OperationN Disturbance Report may trig for binary input N (On) or not (Off).
TrigLevelN: Trig on positive (Trig on 1) or negative (Trig on 0) slope for binary input
N.
Func103N: Function type number (0-255) for binary input N according to
IEC-60870-5-103, i.e. 128: Distance protection, 160: overcurrent protection, 176:
transformer differential protection and 192: line differential protection.
Info103N: Information number (0-255) for binary input N according to
IEC-60870-5-103, i.e. 69-71: Trip L1-L3, 78-83: Zone 1-6.
See also description in the chapter IEC 60870-5-103.
262
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected among internal analog and analog input
signals. The configuration tool is used to configure the signals.
The analog trigger of the Disturbance report is not affected if analog input M is to be
included in the disturbance recording or not (OperationM= On/Off).
NomValueM: Nominal value for input M
OverTrigOpM, UnderTrigOpM: Over or Under trig operation, Disturbance Report
may trig for high/low level of analog input M (On) or not (Off).
OverTrigLevelM, UnderTrigLevelM: Over or under trig level, Trig high/low level
relative nominal value for analog input M in percent of nominal value.
Sub-function parameters
All functions are in operation as long as the disturbance report is in operation.

Indications
IndicationMaN: Indication mask for binary input N. If set (Show), a status change of
that particular input, will be fetched and shown in the disturbance summary on the
LHMI. If not set (Hide), status change will not be indicated.
SetLEDN: Set red Trip LED on LHMI in front of the IED if binary input N changes
status.
Disturbance recorder
OperationM: Analog channel M is to be recorded by the disturbance recorder (On)
or not (Off).
Event recorder
The ER function has no dedicated parameters.
Trip Value recorder
ZeroAngleRef: The parameter defines which analog signal that will be used as phase
angle reference for all other analog input signals. It is suggested to point out a sampled
voltage input signal e.g. a line or busbar phase voltage (channel 1-30).
Event List
The EL function has no dedicated parameters.
Consideration
The density of recording equipment in power systems is increasing, since the number
of modern IEDs, where recorders are included, is increasing. This leads to a vast
number of recordings at every single disturbance and a lot of information has to be
handled if the recording functions don"t have proper settings. The goal is to optimize
the settings in each IED to be able to capture just valuable disturbances and to
maximize the number that"s possible to save in the IED.
The recording time should not be longer than necessary (PostFaultrecT and
TimeLimit).
REB 670
Application manual
263
Section 4
IED application
Should the function record faults only for the protected object or cover more?
How long is the longest expected fault clearing time?
Is it necessary to include reclosure in the recording or should a persistent fault
generate a second recording (PostRetrig)?
Minimize the number of recordings:
Binary signals: Use only relevant signals to start the recording i.e. protection trip,
carrier receive and/or start signals.
Analog signals: The level triggering should be used with great care, since
unfortunate settings will cause enormously number of recordings. If nevertheless
analog input triggering is used, chose settings by a sufficient margin from normal
operation values. Phase voltages are not recommended for trigging.
Remember that values of parameters set elsewhere are linked to the information on
a report. Such parameters are, for example, station and object identifiers, CT and VT
ratios.
4.9.5.3
Setting parameters
Table 86:
Parameter
264
Basic general settings for the RDRE (DRP--) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
PreFaultRecT
0.05 - 1.00
0.01
0.10
Pre-fault recording
time
PostFaultRecT
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
0.5
Post-fault recording
time
TimeLimit
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Fault recording time

limit
PostRetrig
Off
On
Off
Post-fault retrig
enabled (On) or not
(Off)
ZeroAngleRef
1 - 30
Ch
Trip value recorder,

phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest
Off
On
Off
Operation mode
during test mode
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 87:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation01
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue01
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 1
UnderTrigOp01
Off
On
Off
Use under level trig

for analogue cha 1
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01
0 - 200
50
Under trigger level for

analogue cha 1 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp01
Off
On
Off
Use over level trig for

analogue cha 1 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe01
0 - 5000
200
Over trigger level for

analogue cha 1 in %
of signal
Operation02
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue02
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 2
UnderTrigOp02
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 2
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe02
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 2 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp02
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 2 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe02
0 - 5000
200

analogue cha 2 in %
of signal
Operation03
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue03
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 3
UnderTrigOp03
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 3
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe03
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 3 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp03
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 3 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe03
0 - 5000
200
Overtrigger level for

analogue cha 3 in %
of signal
Operation04
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
REB 670
Application manual
265
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
NomValue04
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 4
UnderTrigOp04
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 4
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe04
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 4 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp04
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 4 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe04
0 - 5000
200

analogue cha 4 in %
of signal
Operation05
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue05
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 5
UnderTrigOp05
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 5
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe05
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 5 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp05
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 5 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe05
0 - 5000
200

analogue cha 5 in %
of signal
Operation06
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue06
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 6
UnderTrigOp06
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 6
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe06
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 6 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp06
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 6 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe06
0 - 5000
200

analogue cha 6 in %
of signal
Operation07
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue07
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 7
266
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UnderTrigOp07
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 7
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe07
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 7 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp07
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 7 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe07
0 - 5000
200

analogue cha 7 in %
of signal
Operation08
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue08
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 8
UnderTrigOp08
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 8
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe08
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 8 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp08
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 8 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe08
0 - 5000
200

analogue cha 8 in %
of signal
Operation09
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue09
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 9
UnderTrigOp09
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 9
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe09
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 9 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp09
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 9 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe09
0 - 5000
200

analogue cha 9 in %
of signal
Operation10
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue10
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 10
UnderTrigOp10
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 10
(on) or not (off)
REB 670
Application manual
267
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UnderTrigLe10
0 - 200
50

analogue cha 10 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp10
Off
On
Off

analogue cha 10 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe10
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Table 88:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation31
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue31
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 31
UnderTrigOp31
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 31
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe31
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp31
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe31
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Operation32
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue32
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 32
UnderTrigOp32
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 32
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe32
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp32
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe32
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Operation33
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue33
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 33
268
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UnderTrigOp33
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 33
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe33
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp33
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe33
0 - 5000
200
Overtrigger level for

of signal
Operation34
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue34
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 34
UnderTrigOp34
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 34
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe34
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp34
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe34
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Operation35
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue35
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 35
UnderTrigOp35
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 35
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe35
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp35
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe35
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Operation36
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue36
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 36
UnderTrigOp36
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 36
(on) or not (off)
REB 670
Application manual
269
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UnderTrigLe36
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp36
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe36
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Operation37
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue37
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 37
UnderTrigOp37
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 37
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe37
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp37
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe37
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Operation38
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue38
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 38
UnderTrigOp38
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 38
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe38
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp38
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe38
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Operation39
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue39
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 39
UnderTrigOp39
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 39
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe39
0 - 200
50

of signal
270
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
OverTrigOp39
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe39
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Operation40
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue40
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for

analogue channel 40
UnderTrigOp40
Off
On
Off

for analogue cha 40
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe40
0 - 200
50

of signal
OverTrigOp40
Off
On
Off

or not (off)
OverTrigLe40
0 - 5000
200

of signal
Table 89:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation01
Off
On
Off
Trigger operation On/

Off
TrigLevel01
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
Trig on positiv (1) or

negative (0) slope for
binary inp 1
IndicationMa01
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 1
SetLED01
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

for binary channel 1
Operation02
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel02
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 2
IndicationMa02
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 2
SetLED02
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation03
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel03
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 3
REB 670
Application manual
271
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IndicationMa03
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 3
SetLED03
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation04
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel04
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 4
IndicationMa04
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 4
SetLED04
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation05
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel05
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 5
IndicationMa05
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 5
SetLED05
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation06
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel06
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 6
IndicationMa06
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 6
SetLED06
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation07
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel07
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 7
IndicationMa07
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 7
SetLED07
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation08
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel08
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 8
IndicationMa08
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 8
SetLED08
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

272
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation09
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel09
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 9
IndicationMa09
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 9
SetLED09
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation10
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel10
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 10
IndicationMa10
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 10
SetLED10
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation11
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel11
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 11
IndicationMa11
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 11
SetLED11
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation12
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel12
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 12
IndicationMa12
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 12
SetLED12
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

for binary input 12
Operation13
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel13
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 13
IndicationMa13
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 13
SetLED13
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation14
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel14
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 14
REB 670
Application manual
273
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IndicationMa14
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 14
SetLED14
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation15
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel15
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 15
IndicationMa15
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 15
SetLED15
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

Operation16
Off
On
Off

Off
TrigLevel16
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary inp 16
IndicationMa16
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for

binary channel 16
SetLED16
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI

FUNT1
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FUNT2
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT3
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT4
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT5
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT6
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT7
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT8
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT9
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

-60870-5-103)
FUNT10
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 10
(IEC -60870-5-103)
274
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
FUNT11
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 11
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT12
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 12
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT13
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 13
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT14
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 14
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT15
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 15
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT16
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for

binary channel 16
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO1
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO2
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO3
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO4
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO5
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO6
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO7
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO8
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO9
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO10
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO11
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
REB 670
Application manual
275
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
INFNO12
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO13
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO14
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO15
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO16
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
(IEC -60870-5-103)
4.9.6
Event list (RDRE)
4.9.6.1
Application
From an overview perspective, continuous event-logging is a useful system
monitoring instrument and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder
functions.
The event list (EL), always included in the IED, logs all selected binary input signals
connected to the Disturbance report function. The list may contain of up to 1000 timetagged events stored in a ring-buffer where, if the buffer is full, the oldest event is
overwritten when a new event is logged.
The difference between the event list (EL) and the event recorder (ER) function is
that the list function continuously updates the log with time tagged events while the
recorder function is an extract of events during the disturbance report time window.
The event list information is available in the IED and the user can use the Local
Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get the information. The list can also be
uploaded from the PCM 600 tool.
4.9.6.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the Event list function (EL) are a part of the Disturbance
report settings.
It is possible to event handle up to 96 binary signals, either internal signals or signals
from binary input channels. These signals are identical with the binary signals
recorded by the disturbance recorder.
There is no dedicated setting for the EL function.
276
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.9.7
Indications (RDRE)
4.9.7.1
Application
Fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in
the secondary system is important. Binary signals that have changed status during a
disturbance are an example of this. This information is used primarily in the short
term (e.g. immediate disturbance analysis, corrective actions) to get information via
the LHMI in a straightforward way without any knowledge of how to handle the IED.
There are three LED"s on the LHMI (green, yellow and red) which will display status
information about the IED (in service, internal failure etc.) and the Disturbance Report
function (trigged).
The Indication function (IND), always included in the IED, shows all selected binary
input signals connected to the Disturbance Report function that have been activated
during a disturbance. The status changes are logged during the entire recording time,
which depends on the set of recording times (pre-, post-fault and limit time) and the
actual fault time. The indications are not time-tagged.
The indication information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the
IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to view the
information.
4.9.7.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for LED"s and the Indication function (IND) are a part of the
Disturbance Report settings.
Available signals are identical with the binary signals recorded by the disturbance
report. It is possible to use all binary input signals for the Indication function on the
LHMI, but it is not recommended since the general view will be lost. The intention
is to point out some important signals, not to many, to be shown. If a more thorough
analysis is to be done information from the Event Recorder should be used.
To be able to control the red LED in the LHMI:
SetLEDN: Set red LED on LHMI in front of the IED if binary input N changes status.
For the IND function there are a number dedicated settings:
IndicationMaN: Indication mask for binary input N. If set (Show), a status change of
that particular input, will be fetched and shown on the LHMI. If not set (Hide), status
change will not be indicated.
REB 670
Application manual
277
Section 4
IED application
4.9.8
Event recorder (RDRE)
4.9.8.1
Application
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in
the secondary system is vital e.g. time tagged events logged during disturbances. This
information is used for different purposes in the short term (e.g. disturbance analysis,
corrective actions) and in the long term (e.g. disturbance analysis, statistics and
maintenance, i.e. Functional Analysis).
The event recorder (ER), always included in the IED, logs all selected binary input
signals connected to the Disturbance Report function. Each recording can contain up
to 150 time-tagged events. The events are logged during the total recording time,
which depends on the set of recording times (pre-, post-fault and limit time) and the
actual fault time. During this time, the first 150 events for all 96 binary signals are
logged and time-tagged.
The event recorder information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in
the IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get the
information. The information is included in the disturbance recorder file, which may
be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further
analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).
4.9.8.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the Event Recorder (ER) function are a part of the
It is possible to event handle up to 96 binary signals, either internal signals or signals
from binary input channels. These signals are identical to the binary signals recorded
by the disturbance report.
For the ER function there is no dedicated setting.
4.9.9
Trip value recorder (RDRE)
4.9.9.1
Application
Fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances such as fault currents and
voltage faults in the power system is vital. This information is used for different
purposes in the short perspective (e.g. fault location, disturbance analysis, corrective
actions) and the long term (e.g. disturbance analysis, statistics and maintenance, i.e.
Functional Analysis).
278
Application manual
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
The trip value recorder (TVR), always included in the IED, calculates the values of
all selected external analog input signals (channel 1-30) connected to the Disturbance
Report function. The estimation is performed immediately after finalizing each
recording and available in the Disturbance Report. The result is magnitude and phase
angle before and during the fault for each analog input signal.
The information is used as input to the fault location function (FL), if included in the
IED and in operation.
The trip value recorder information is available for each of the recorded disturbances
in the IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get
the information. The information is included in the disturbance recorder file, which
can be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further
analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
4.9.9.2
Setting guidelines
The trip value function (TVR) setting parameters are a part of the Disturbance Report
settings.
For the TVR function there is one dedicated setting:
ZeroAngleRef: The parameter defines which analog signal to use as phase angle
reference for all other input signals. It is suggested to point out a sampled voltage
input signal e.g. a line or busbar phase voltage (channel 1-30).
4.9.10
Disturbance recorder (RDRE)
4.9.10.1
Application
To get fast, complete and reliable information about fault current, voltage, binary
signal and other disturbances in the power system is very important. This is
accomplished by the Disturbance Recorder function and facilitates a better
understanding of the behavior of the power system and related primary and secondary
equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis of the recorded data provides
valuable information that can be used to explain a disturbance, basis for change of
IED setting plan, improvement of existing equipment etc. This information can also
be used in a longer perspective when planning for and designing new installations,
i.e. a disturbance recording could be a part of Functional Analysis (FA).
The Disturbance Recorder (DR), always included in the IED, acquires sampled data
from all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function blocks i.e.
maximum 30 external analog, 10 internal (derived) analog and 96 binary signals.
The function is characterized by great flexibility as far as configuration, starting
conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity are concerned. Thus, the
disturbance recorder is not dependent on the operation of protective functions, and it
can record disturbances that were not discovered by protective functions.
REB 670
Application manual
279
Section 4
IED application
The disturbance recorder information is saved for each of the recorded disturbances
in the IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get
some general information about the recordings. The disturbance recording
information is included in the disturbance recorder files, which may be uploaded to
the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) for further analysis using the
Disturbance Handling tool. The information is also available on a station bus
according to IEC 61850 and according to IEC 60870-5-103.
4.9.10.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the Disturbance Recorder function (DR) is a part of the
It is possible to handle up to 40 analog and 96 binary signals, either internal signals
or signals coming from external inputs. The binary signals are identical with the
signals recorded by the other functions in the Disturbance Report function i.e. Event
Recorder (ER), Indication (IND) and Trip Value Recorder (TVR) function.
For the DR function there is one dedicated setting:
OperationM: Analog channel M is to be recorded by the disturbance recorder (On)
or not (Off). Other disturbance report settings, such as Operation and TrigLevel for
binary signals, will also influence the disturbance recorder.
280
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Section 5
About this chapter
This chapter describes the communication possibilities in a SA-system.
5.1
Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one
or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation
(SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.
Following communication protocols are available:
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

LON communication protocol
SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
DNP3.0 communication protocol
Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
5.2
5.2.1
Application IEC 61850-8-1

IEC 6185081 allows two or more intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) from one
or several vendors to exchange information and to use it in the performance of their
functions and for correct co-operation.
GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event), which is a part of IEC 61850
81 standard, allows the IEDs to communicate state and control information amongst
themselves, using a publish-subscribe mechanism. That is, upon detecting an event,
the IED(s) use a multi-cast transmission to notify those devices that have registered
to receive the data. An IED can, by publishing a GOOSE message, report it's status.
It can also request a control action to be directed at any device in the network.
This example shows the topology of an IEC 6185081 configuration. IEC 61850
81 specifies only the interface to the substation LAN. The LAN itself is left to the
system integrator.
REB 670
Application manual
281
Section 5
Engineering
Workstation
SMS
Station HSI
Base System
Gateway
CC
Printer
KIOSK 1
KIOSK 3
KIOSK 2
en06000195.vsd
Figure 102:
SA system with IEC 61850
This example shows the GOOSE peer-to-peer communication.

Station HSI
MicroSCADA
Gateway
GOOSE
IED
A
Control
IED
A
Protection
IED
A
Control and protection
IED
A
Control
IED
A
Protection
en05000734.vsd
Figure 103:
282
Example of a broadcasted GOOSE message
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
5.2.2
Setting guidelines
There are only two settings related to the IEC 6185081 protocol, available to the
user in PST:
Operation User can set it to On or Off.
GOOSE has to be set to the Ethernet link where GOOSE traffic shall be send and
received.
IEDName That specific IED name in the IEC 6185081 system However, there are
specific settings for the network interface (Ethernet) that are directly related to the
IEC 6185081 (but not only) in case this protocol is used. The IEDName is not
settable through PST. The IEDName is given by the name of the IED in the PCM
Navigation structure. The name shown as the "IEDName" parameter is a read-only
feedback of the current name of the IED on IEC61850.
IEC 6185081 specific data (logical nodes etc.) per included function in an IED can
be found iin a separate document, refer to section "Related documents".
5.2.3
Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)
5.2.3.1
Application
The SPGGIO function block is used to send one single logical output to other systems
or equipment in the substation. It has one visible input, that should be connected in
CAP.
5.2.3.2
Setting guidelines
There are no settings available for the user for SPGGIO. However, to get the signals
sent by SPGGIO one must use the engineering tools described in chapter
"Engineering of the IED".
5.2.3.3
Setting parameters
5.2.4
Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)
5.2.4.1
Application
The MVGGIO function block is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog
output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside the
same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement
supervision on that value.
REB 670
Application manual
283
Section 5
5.2.4.2
Setting guidelines
The settings available for the MVGGIO function allows the user to choose a deadband
and a zero deadband for the monitored signal. Values within the zero deadband are
considered as zero.
The high and low limit settings provides limits for the high-high-, high, normal, low
and low-low ranges of the measured value. The actual range of the measured value
is shown on the range output of the MVGGIO function block. When a measured value
expander block (RANGE_XP) is connected to the range output, the logical outputs
of the RANGE_XP are changed accordingly.
5.2.4.3
Setting parameters
Table 90:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MV db
1 - 300
10
Type

Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb
0 - 100000
500
m%

0,001% of range
MV hhLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
90.000
High High limit
MV hLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
80.000
High limit
MV lLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-80.000
Low limit
MV llLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-90.000
Low Low limit
MV min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-100.000
Minimum value
MV max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Maximum value
MV dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
MV limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
all limits)
5.2.5
Setting parameters
284
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
Table 91:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the IEC61850-8-1 (IEC1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off/On
GOOSE
Front
OEM311_AB
OEM311_CD
OEM311_AB
Port for GOOSE

communication
5.3
LON communication protocol
5.3.1
Application
Control Center
Station HSI
MicroSCADA
Gateway
Star coupler
RER 111
IED670
IED670
IED670
en05000663.vsd
Figure 104:
Example of LON communication structure for a substation

automation system.
An optical network can be used within the Substation Automation system. This
enables communication with the IED 670s through the LON bus from the operators
workplace, from the control center and also from other IEDs via bay-to-bay horizontal
communication.
The fiber optic LON bus is implemented using either glass core or plastic core fiber
optic cables.
REB 670
Application manual
285
Section 5
Table 92:
Specification of the fiber optic connectors

Glass fiber
Plastic fiber
Cable connector
ST-connector
snap-in connector
Cable diameter
62.5/125 m
1 mm
Max. cable length
1000 m
10 m
Wavelength
820-900 nm
660 nm
Transmitted power
-13 dBm (HFBR-1414)
-13 dBm (HFBR-1521)
Receiver sensitivity
-24 dBm (HFBR-2412)
-20 dBm (HFBR-2521)
The LON Protocol
The LON protocol is specified in the LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from

Echelon Corporation. This protocol is designed for communication in control
networks and is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network
can communicate with each other directly. For more information of the bay-to-bay
communication, refer to the section Multiple command function
Hardware and software modules
The hardware needed for applying LON communication depends on the application,
but one very central unit needed is the LON Star Coupler and optical fibres connecting
the star coupler to the IEDs. To interface the IEDs from MicroSCADA, the application
library LIB 670 is required.
The HV Control 670 software module is included in the LIB 520 high-voltage process
package, which is a part of the Application Software Library within MicroSCADA
applications.
The HV Control 670 software module is used for control functions in IED 670s. This
module contains the process picture, dialogues and a tool to generate the process
database for the control application in MicroSCADA.
Use the LNT, LON Network Tool to set the LON communication. This is a software
tool applied as one node on the LON bus. In order to communicate via LON, the IEDs
need to know which node addresses the other connected IEDs have, and which
network variable selectors should be used. This is organized by the LNT.
The node address is transferred to the LNT via the local HMI by setting the parameter
ServicePinMsg=YES. The node address is sent to the LNT via the LON bus, or the
LNT can scan the network for new nodes.
The communication speed of the LON bus is set to the default of 1.25 Mbit/s.This
can be changed by the LNT.
5.3.2
Setting parameters
286
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
Table 93:
Parameter
Operation
Table 94:
Parameter
General settings for the NVLON (NV---) function

Range
Off
On
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation
General settings for the LON (ADE1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation
TimerClass
Slow
Normal
Fast
Slow
Timer class
5.4
SPA communication protocol
5.4.1
Application
The communication protocol SPA is available for the IED 670 products as an option
and as an alternative to IEC 60870-5-103. The same communication port as for IEC
60870-5-103 is used.
SPA communication is applied when using the front communication port. For this
purpose, no serial communication module is required in the IED. Only the PCM 600
software in the PC and a crossed-over Ethernet cable for front connection is required.
When communicating with a PC see figure 105, using the rear SPA port on the serial
communication module (SLM), the only hardware required for a local monitoring
system is:
Optical fibres for the SPA bus loop

Optical/electrical converter for the PC
PC
A remote monitoring system for communication over the public telephone network
also requires telephone modems and a remote PC.
The software required for a local monitoring system is PCM 600, and for a remote
monitoring system it is PCM 600 in the remote PC only.
REB 670
Application manual
287
Section 5
Remote monitoring
system with
PCM600
Local monitoring
system with
PCM600
IED670
Teleph
one
modem
IED670
Teleph
one
modem
Optical to electrical
converter, e.g. SPA-ZC 22
or Fiberdata modem
Figure 105:
IED670
en05000672.vsd
SPA communication structure for a monitoring system. The

monitoring system can either be local, remote or a combination of
both
When communicating with a PC connected to the utility substation LAN, via WAN
and the utility office LAN (see figure 2), and using the rear Ethernet port on the optical
Ethernet module (OEM), the only hardware required for a station monitoring system
is:
Optical fibers from the IED to the utility substation LAN.

PC connected to the utility office LAN.
The software required is PCM 600.

Utility LAN
Remote
monitoring
system with
PCM600
WAN
Substation LAN
IED670
IED670
IED670
en05000715.vsd
Figure 106:
SPA communication structure for a remote monitoring system via a

substation LAN, WAN and utility LAN.
The SPA communication is mainly used for the Station Monitoring System. It can
include different numerical relays/terminals/IEDs with remote communication
possibilities. Connection to a personal computer (PC) can be made directly (if the PC
is located in the substation) or by telephone modem through a telephone network with
ITU (former CCITT) characteristics or via a LAN/WAN connection.
288
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
glass
<1000 m according to optical budget
plastic
<20 m (inside cubicle) according to optical budget
Functionality
The SPA protocol V2.5 is an ASCII-based protocol for serial communication. The
communication is based on a master-slave principle, where the IED is a slave and the
PC is the master. Only one master can be applied on each fiber optic loop. A program
is required in the master computer for interpretation of the SPA-bus codes and for
translation of the data that should be sent to the IED.
The specification of the SPA protocol V2.5 is available as a separate document, SPAbus Communication Protocol V2.5, 1MRS 750076-MTD EN
5.4.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the SPA communication are set via the local HMI.
The SPA and the IEC use the same rear communication port. To define the protocol
to be used, a setting is done on the local HMI. Refer to the Installation and
commissioning manual for setting procedure.
When the communication protocol has been selected, the power to the IED must be
switched off and on.
The most important settings in the IED for SPA communication are the slave number
and baud rate (communication speed). These settings are absolutely essential for all
communication contact to the IED.
These settings can only be done on the local HMI for rear channel communication
and for front channel communication.
The slave number can be set to any value from 1 to 899, as long as the slave number
is unique within the used SPA loop.
The baud rate, which is the communication speed, can be set to between 300 and
38400 baud. The baud rate should be the same for the whole station, although different
baud rates in a loop are possible. If different baud rates in the same fibre optical loop
are used, consider this when making the communication setup in the communication
master, the PC.
For local fibre optic communication, 19200 or 38400 baud is the normal setting. If
telephone communication is used, the communication speed depends on the quality
of the connection and on the type of modem used. But remember that the IED does
not adapt its speed to the actual communication conditions, because the speed is set
on the HMI of the IED.
5.4.3
Setting parameters
REB 670
Application manual
289
Section 5
Table 95:
Parameter
General settings for the SPA (SPA1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SlaveAddress
1 - 899
30
Slave address
BaudRate
300 Bd
1200 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
57600 Bd
9600 Bd
Baudrate on
serial line
Table 96:
Parameter
General settings for the SPAviaSLM (SPA1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SlaveAddress
1 - 899
30
Slave address
BaudRate
300 Bd
1200 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
9600 Bd
Baudrate on
serial line
Table 97:
Parameter
General settings for the SPAviaLON (SPA4-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation
SlaveAddress
1 - 899
30
Slave address
5.5
5.5.1
Application
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 is available for the IED 670 products
as an option.
290
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
TCP/IP
Control Center
Station HSI
Gateway
Star coupler
RER 123
IED670
IED670
IED670
en05000660.vsd
Figure 107:
Example of IEC 60870-5-103 communication structure for a

substation automation system.
The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED
communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have
software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
Table 98:
Max distances between IED/nodes
glass
< 1000 m according to optical budget
plastic
< 20 m (inside cubicle) according to optical budget
Functionality
The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial

communication exchanging information with a control system. In IEC terminology
a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication
is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must have software that can interpret
the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages. For detailed information about IEC
60870-5-103, refer to the IEC60870 standard part 5: Transmission protocols,
and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative interface of
protection equipment.
Design
General
The protocol implementation in IED 670 consists of the following functions:
REB 670
Application manual
291
Section 5
Event handling
Report of analog service values (measurands)
Fault location
Command handling
Autorecloser ON/OFF
Teleprotection ON/OFF
Protection ON/OFF
LED reset
Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
File transfer (disturbance files)

Hardware
When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) or a Remote Terminal
Unit (RTU) in the station, using the SPA/IEC port, the only hardware needed is:
Optical fibres, glass/plastic Opto/electrical converter for the PC/RTU PC/RTU
Commands
The commands defined in the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are represented in a
dedicated function blocks. These blocks have output signals for all available
commands according to the protocol.
Terminal commands in control direction
Function block with defined IED functions in control direction, I103IEDCMD. This
block use PARAMETR as FUNCTION TYPE, and INFORMATION NUMBER
parameter is defined for each output signal.
Function commands in control direction
Function block with pre defined functions in control direction, I103CMD. This block
includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER
parameter is defined for each output signal.
Function commands in control direction
Function block with user defined functions in control direction, I103UserCMD. These
function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in the private
range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each output signal.
Status
The events created in the IED available for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are based
on the:
292
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
IED status indication in monitor direction
Function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction, I103IED. This block
use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE, and INFORMATION NUMBER
parameter is defined for each input signal.
Function status indication in monitor direction, user-defined
Function blocks with user defined input signals in monitor direction, I103UserDef.
These function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in
the private range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each input
signal.
Supervision indications in monitor direction
Function block with defined functions for supervision indications in monitor

direction, I103Superv. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and
the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal.
Earth fault indications in monitor direction
Function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in monitor direction,
I103EF. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the
INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal.
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1
Function block with defined functions for fault indications in monitor direction,
I103FltDis. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the
INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each input signal. This block
is suitable for distance protection function.
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2
Function block with defined functions for fault indications in monitor direction,
I103FltStd. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the
INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each input signal.
This block is suitable for line differential, transformer differential, over-current and
earth-fault protection functions.
Autorecloser indications in monitor direction
Function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in monitor

direction, I103AR. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the
INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal.
REB 670
Application manual
293
Section 5
Measurands
The measurands can be included as type 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and type 9 according to the
standard.
Measurands in public range
Function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals,
I103Meas.
Measurands in private range
Function blocks with user defined input measurands in monitor direction,

I103MeasUsr. These function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for
each block in the private range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for
each block.
Fault location
The fault location is expressed in reactive ohms. In relation to the line length in
reactive ohms, it gives the distance to the fault in percent. The data is available and
reported when the fault locator function is included in the IED.
Disturbance Recordings
The transfer functionality is based on the Disturbance recorder function. The

analog and binary signals recorded will be reported to the master by polling. The
eight last disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the master.
A file that has been transferred and acknowledged by the master cannot be
transferred again.
The binary signals that are reported by polling are those that are connected to the
disturbance function blocks DRB1 DRB6. These function blocks include the
function type and the information number for each signal. See also the description
of the Disturbance report in the Technical reference manual. The analog
channels, that are reported, are those connected to the disturbance function blocks
DRA1 DRA4. The eight first ones belong to the public range and the remaining
ones to the private range.
Settings
Settings from the local HMI
The SPA and the IEC communication use the same rear port. To define the protocol
to be used, a setting is done on the local HMI under the menu:
Settings/General Settings/Communication/SLM Configuration/Rear optical SPAIEC port/Protocol selection for SPA or IEC103
When the communication protocols have been selected, the IED is automatically
restarted.
The settings for IEC 60870-5-103 communication are the following:
294
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
Settings for slave number and baud rate (communication speed)

Setting for invert the light or not
Setting for reporting frequency of mesurands
The settings for communication parameters slave number and baud rate can be found
on the local HMI at:
Settings/General Settings/Communication/SLM Configuration/Rear optical SPAIEC port/IEC60870-5-103
The slave number can be set to any value between 0 to 255.
The baud rate, the communication speed, can be set either to 9600 bits/s or 19200
bits/s.
Settings from the PCM 600 tool
Event
For each input of the Event function there is a setting for the information number of
the connected signal. The information number can be set to any value between 0 and
255. In order to get proper operation of the sequence of events the event masks in the
event function shall be set to ON_CHANGE. For single-command signals, the event
mask shall be set to ON_SET.
In addition there is a setting on each event block for function type. Refer to description
of the Main Function type set on the local HMI.
Commands
As for the commands defined in the protocol there is a dedicated function block with
eight output signals. Using the CAP 531 tool makes the configuration of these signals.
To realize the BlockOfInformation command, which is operated from the local HMI,
the output BLKINFO on the IEC command function block ICOM has to be connected
to an input on an event function block. This input shall have the information number
20 (monitor direction blocked) according to the standard.
Disturbance Recordings
For each input of the Disturbance recorder function there is a setting for the
information number of the connected signal. The information number can be set to
any value between 0 and 255.
Furthermore there is a setting on each input of the Disturbance recorder function for
the function type. Refer to description of Main Function type set on the local HMI.
Function and information types
The function type is defined as follows:

128 = distance protection
160 = overcurrent protection
176 = transformer differential protection
REB 670
Application manual
295
Section 5
192 = line differential protection

Please see the tables in the Technical reference manual /Station communication,
specifying the information types supported by the 670IED products with the
communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.
To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in the
protection IED.
There is no representation for the following parts:
Generating events for test mode

Cause of transmission: Info no 11, Local operation
EIA RS-485 is not supported. Glass or plastic fiber should be used. BFOC/2.5 is the
recommended interface to use (BFOC/2.5 is the same as ST connectors). ST
connectors are used with the optical power as specified in standard.
For more information please see the IEC standard IEC 60870-5-103.
5.5.2
Setting parameters
Table 99:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SlaveAddress
0 - 255
30
Slave address
BaudRate
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
9600 Bd
Baudrate on serial
line
RevPolarity
Off
On
On
Invert polarity
CycMeasRepTim
e
1.0 - 3600.0
0.1
5.0
Cyclic reporting time

of measurments
Table 100:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 101:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
296
General settings for the I103SLM (IECC-) function
General settings for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function

Range
1 - 255
Step
1
Default
255
Unit
FunT
Description
Function type (1-255)
General settings for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function

Range
1 - 255
Application manual
Step
1
Default
1
Unit
FunT
Description
REB 670
Section 5
Table 102:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 103:
Parameter
General settings for the I103IED (IEV1-) function

Range
1 - 255
Step
1
Default
1
Unit
FunT
Description
General settings for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
PULSEMOD
0-1
Mode
Pulse mode
0=Steady, 1=Pulsed
0.200 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Pulse length
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
FunT
INFNO_1
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for output 1 (1-255)
INFNO_2
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
INFNO_3
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
INFNO_4
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
INFNO_5
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
INFNO_6
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
INFNO_7
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
INFNO_8
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
Table 104:
Parameter
General settings for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
FunT
INFNO_1
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 1
(1-255)
INFNO_2
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 2
(1-255)
INFNO_3
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 3
(1-255)
INFNO_4
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 4
(1-255)
INFNO_5
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 5
(1-255)
REB 670
Application manual
297
Section 5
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
INFNO_6
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 6
(1-255)
INFNO_7
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 7
(1-255)
INFNO_8
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 8
(1-255)
Table 105:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 106:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 107:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 108:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 109:
Parameter
General settings for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function

Range
1 - 255
Step
1
Default
1
Unit
FunT
Description
General settings for the I103EF (ISEF-) function

Range
1 - 255
Step
1
Default
160
Unit
FunT
Description
General settings for the I103FltDis (IZ01-) function

Range
1 - 255
Step
1
Default
128
Unit
FunT
Description
General settings for the I103FltStd (IFL1-) function

Range
1 - 255
Step
1
Default
1
Unit
FunT
Description
General settings for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
25
FunT
INFNO
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for measurands
(1-255)
RatedMeasur1
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 1
RatedMeasur2
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 2
298
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 3
RatedMeasur4
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 4
RatedMeasur5
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 5
RatedMeasur6
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 6
RatedMeasur7
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 7
RatedMeasur8
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 8
RatedMeasur9
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for

measurement on
input 9
Table 110:
Parameter
REB 670
Range
RatedMeasur3
Basic general settings for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function

Default
Unit
RatedIL1
Range
1 - 99999
3000
Rated current phase

L1
RatedIL2
1 - 99999
3000
Rated current phase

L2
RatedIL3
1 - 99999
3000
Rated current phase

L3
RatedIN
1 - 99999
3000
Rated residual
current IN
RatedUL1
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
230.00
kV
Rated voltage for

phase L1
RatedUL2
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
230.00
kV
Rated voltage for

phase L2
RatedUL3
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
230.00
kV
Rated voltage for

phase L3
RatedUL1-UL2
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Rated voltage for

phase-phase L1-L2
RatedUN
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
230.00
kV
Rated residual
voltage UN
RatedP
0.00 - 2000.00
0.05
1200.00
MW
Rated value for active

power
RatedQ
0.00 - 2000.00
0.05
1200.00
MVA
Rated value for

reactive power
RatedF
50.0 - 60.0
10.0
50.0
Hz
Rated system
frequency
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
FunT
Application manual
Step
Description
299
Section 5
5.6
Automation bits (AUBI)
5.6.1
Application
The AUBI function block (or the automation bits function block) is used within the
CAP tool in order to get into the configuration the commands coming through the
DNP3.0 protocol. In this respect, this function block plays the same role as the
BinGOOSEReceive (for IEC61850) or MultiCmdReceive (for LON). The AUBI
function block have 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as a Binary
Output point in DNP. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP. This object
contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate a AUBI
output point you send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip
or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On,
on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give you 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300
ms apart.
5.6.2
Setting guidelines
The AUBI function block has just one setting, (Operation: On/Off) enabling or
disabling the function. The name for each command signal can also be set under CAP.
These names will be seen in the DNP communication configuration tool, in the PCM
600.
5.6.3
Setting parameters
Table 111:
Parameter
Operation
Table 112:
Parameter
Operation
300
Basic general settings for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function

Range
Off
On
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation Off / On
Basic general settings for the DNP3 (DNP--) function

Range
Off
ON
Application manual
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation mode Off /
On
REB 670
Section 5
Table 113:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
Serial-Mode
Off
Operation mode
BaudRate
300 Bd
600 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
9600 Bd
Baud-rate for serial

port
WireMode
Four-wire
Two-wire
Two-wire
RS485 wire mode
Table 114:
Parameter
REB 670
Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function
Advanced general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DLinkConfirm
Never
Sometimes
Always
Never
Data-link confirm
tDLinkTimeout
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Data-link confirm
timeout in s
DLinkRetries
0 - 255
Data-link maximum
retries
tRxToTxMinDel
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Rx to Tx minimum
delay in s
DataBits
5-8
Data bits
StopBits
1-2
Stop bits
Parity
No
Even
Odd
Even
Parity
RTSEnable
No
Yes
No
RTS enable
tRTSWarmUp
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RTS warm-up in s
tRTSWarmDown
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RTS warm-down in s
tBackOffDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.050
RS485 back-off delay

in s
tMaxRndDelBkOf
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
RS485 maximum
back-off random
delay in s
Application manual
301
Section 5
Table 115:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDP port to accept

UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDP portfor initial

NULL response
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
UDP port to remote

client/master
Table 116:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch3TCPIP (DNC3-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDP port to accept

UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDP port for initial

NULL response
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
UDP port to remote

client/master
Table 117:
Parameter
302

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDP port to accept

UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000

NULL response
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
UDP port to remote

client/master
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
Table 118:
Parameter

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDP port to accept

UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000

NULL response
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
UDP port to remote

client/master
Table 119:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default
variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Object 2, default
variation
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Object 4, default
variation
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Object 10, default

variation
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Object 20, default

variation
REB 670
Application manual
303
Section 5
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Object 22, default

variation
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Object 30, default

variation
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Object 32, default

variation
Table 120:
Parameter
Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source
(master) address
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
Address query enable
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes
Enable application for

multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
Confirm each multiple

fragment
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
Unsolicited response
enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
Unsolicited response,
event class mask
304
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
retries before off-line
retry mode
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
Delete oldest event

when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout
1 - 3600
1800
Time synch timeout

before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
Yes
request after timeout
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
Allow DNP to set time

in IED
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
Use average of 3 time

requests
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
Table 121:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast2TCPIP (DNM2-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source
(master) address
REB 670
Application manual
305
Section 5
Parameter
306
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default
variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Object 2, default
variation
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Object 4, default
variation
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Object 10, default

variation
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Object 20, default

variation
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Object 22, default

variation
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Object 30, default

variation
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Object 32, default

variation
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
Table 122:
Parameter
Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast2TCPIP (DNM2-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes

fragment
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
event class mask
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
retry mode
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
Delete oldest event

when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout
1 - 3600
1800
Time synch timeout

generated
REB 670
Application manual
307
Section 5
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
Yes
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No

in IED
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No

requests
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Table 123:
Parameter

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source
(master) address
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default
variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Object 2, default
variation
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Object 4, default
variation
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Object 10, default

variation
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Object 20, default

variation
308
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Object 22, default

variation
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Object 30, default

variation
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Object 32, default

variation
Table 124:
Parameter

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes

fragment
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
event class mask
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
retry mode
REB 670
Application manual
309
Section 5
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
Delete oldest event

when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout
1 - 3600
1800
Time synch timeout

generated
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
Yes
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No

in IED
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No

requests
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Table 125:
Parameter
Range
Description

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source
(master) address
310
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
Parameter
REB 670
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default
variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Object 2, default
variation
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Object 4, default
variation
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Object 10, default

variation
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Object 20, default

variation
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Object 22, default

variation
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Object 30, default

variation
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Object 32, default

variation
Application manual
311
Section 5
Table 126:
Parameter

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes

fragment
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
event class mask
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
retry mode
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
Delete oldest event

when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout
1 - 3600
1800
Time synch timeout

generated
312
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
Yes
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No

in IED
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No

requests
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Table 127:
Parameter

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source
(master) address
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default
variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Object 2, default
variation
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Object 4, default
variation
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Object 10, default

variation
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Object 20, default

variation
REB 670
Application manual
313
Section 5
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Object 22, default

variation
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Object 30, default

variation
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Object 32, default

variation
Table 128:
Parameter

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes

fragment
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
event class mask
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
retry mode
314
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
tURRetryDelay
Range
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
Delete oldest event

when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout
1 - 3600
1800
Time synch timeout

generated
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
Yes
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No

in IED
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No

requests
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
5.7
Single command, 16 signals (CD)
5.7.1
Application
Description
The single command, 16 signals (CD) is a common function and always included in
the IED.
REB 670
Application manual
315
Section 5
The IEDs may be provided with a function to receive commands either from a
substation automation system or from the local human-machine interface, HMI. That
receiving function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to control high
voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can
also be used. Together with the configuration logic circuits, the user can govern pulses
or steady output signals for control purposes within the IED or via binary outputs.
Figure 108 shows an application example of how the user can, in an easy way, connect
the command function via the configuration logic circuit to control a high-voltage
apparatus. This type of command control is normally carried out by sending a pulse
to the binary outputs of the IED. Figure 108 shows a close operation. An open
breaker operation is performed in a similar way but without the synchro-check
condition.
Single
command
function
CDxx
Configuration logic circuits
SingleCmdFunc
Close CB1
CMDOUTy
OUTy
Userdefined
conditions
Synchrocheck
&
en04000206.vsd
Figure 108:
Application example showing a logic diagram for control of a circuit

breaker via configuration logic circuits.
Figure 109 and figure 110 show other ways to control functions, which require steady
On/Off signals. Here, the output is used to control built-in functions or external
devices.
316
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
Single
command
function
CDxx
Function n
SingleCmdFunc
Function n
CMDOUTy
OUTy
en04000207.vsd
Figure 109:
Application example showing a logic diagram for control of built-in

functions.
Single
command
function
CDxx
Configuration logic circuits
SingleCmdFunc
Device 1
CMDOUTy
OUTy
Userdefined
conditions
&
en04000208.vsd
Figure 110:
5.7.2
Application example showing a logic diagram for control of external

devices via configuration logic circuits.
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the single command, 16 signals, function (CD) are set via the local
REB 670
Application manual
317
Section 5
Parameters to be set are MODE, common for the whole block, and CMDOUTy which
includes the user defined name for each output signal. The MODE input sets the
outputs to be one of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse.
5.7.3
Off, sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level,
that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.
Steady, sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent
from the station level.
Pulse, gives a pulse with 100 ms duration, if a value sent from the station level
is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic connected to the
command function block may not have a cycle time longer than the cycle time
for the command function block.
Setting parameters
Table 129:
Parameter
Mode
Basic general settings for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function

Range
Off
Steady
Pulsed
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation mode
5.8
Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit

(MT)
5.8.1
Application
The IED may be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and from
other IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/
inputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control
purposes within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate with
other IEDs, these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block with
16 outputs to send the information received by the command block.
5.8.2
Setting guidelines
5.8.2.1
Settings
The parameters for the multiple command function are set via the Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
The MODE input sets the outputs to be one of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse.
5.8.3
Setting parameters
318
Application manual
REB 670
Section 5
Table 130:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tMaxCycleTime
0.050 - 200.000
0.001
11.000
Maximum cycle time

between receptions of
input data
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum cycle time

between receptions of
input data
Mode
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
Mode for output

signals
tPulseTime
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Pulse length for multi

command outputs
Table 131:
Parameter
REB 670
General settings for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function
General settings for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function

Default
Unit
tMaxCycleTime
Range
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
5.000
Maximum time
interval between
transmission of output
data
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum time interval

between transmission
of output data
Application manual
Step
Description
319
320
Section 6
Remote communication
Section 6
About this chapter
This chapter describes the remote end data communication possibilities through
binary signal transferring.
6.1
Binary signal transfer to remote end

Function block name: BSR--, BST--
ANSI number:
BSDGGIO
Function block name: BRx--;BTx--
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name: BSTGGIO
6.1.1
Application
IED 670s can be equipped with communication devices for line differential
communication and/or communication of binary signals between IEDs. The same
communication hardware is used for both purposes.
Communication between two IEDs geographically on different locations is a
fundamental part of the line differential function.
Sending of binary signals between two IEDs, one in each end of a power line is used
in teleprotection schemes and for direct transfer trips. In addition to this, there are
application possibilities like e.g. blocking/enabling functionality in the remote
substation, changing setting group in the remote IED depending on the switching
situation in the local substation etc.
When equipped with an LDCM, a 64 kbit/s communication channel can be connected
to the IED, which will then have the capacity of 192 binary signals to be
communicated with a remote IED. For RED 670 the number of binary signals is
limited to 8 because the line differential communication is included in the same
telegrams.
REB 670
Application manual
321
Section 6
6.1.1.1
Communication hardware solutions

The LDCM (Line Data Communication Module) has an optical connection such that
two IEDs can be connected over a direct fibre (multimode), as shown in figure 111 .
The protocol used is IEEE/ANSI C37.94. The maximum distance with this solution
is approximately 150 km.
Max 150 km with long-range
LDCM and single mode fibre
DC
L
CM
LD
CM
LD
CM
LD
en06000519.vsd
Figure 111:
Direct fibre optical connection between two IEDs with LDCM.
The LDCM can also be used together with an external optical to galvanic G.703
converter or with an alternative external optical to galvanic X.21 converter as shown
in figure 112. These solutions are aimed for connections to a multiplexer, which in
turn is connected to a telecommunications transmission network (e.g. SDH or PDH).
Multiplexer
Multiplexer
Telecom. Network
*)
DC
L
L
*)
LD
CM
CM
DC
*) Converting optical to galvanic G.703 or X.21 alternatively

en05000527.vsd
Figure 112:
LDCM with an external optical to galvanic converter and a

multiplexer.
When an external modem G.703 or X21 is used, the connection between LDCM and
the modem is made with a multimode fibre of max. 3 km length. The IEEE/ANSI
C37.94 protocol is always used between LDCM and the modem.
322
Application manual
REB 670
Section 6
Alternatively, an LDCM with X.21 built-in converter and micro D-sub 15-pole
connector output can be used.
6.1.1.2
Application possibility with one-phase REB 670

For busbar protection applications in substations where dynamic zone selection is
required, it is typically necessary to wire the normally open and normally closed
auxiliary contacts from every monitored disconnector and/or circuit breaker to the
optocoupler inputs of the busbar protection. When one phase version of REB 670 is
used (i.e. B31), then six optocoupler inputs (i.e. two in each phase/IED) are required
for every primary switchgear object. For quite big stations (i.e. with 24 bays) this will
require quite a lot of binary inputs into every IED. In order to limit the number of
required optocoupler inputs into every IED it is possible to use LDCM
communication modules in order to effectively share the binary Ios between three
units, as shown in figure 113.
Figure 113:
Example how to share binary IO between one-phase REB 670 IEDs

by using LDCM modules
As shown in figure 113, it is then possible to wire only the status for bays 01-08 to
L1-IED. After that the information about auxiliary contact status for switchgear
objects from these eight bays can be sent via LDCM modules to other two phases. In
the similar way information from other bays can be only wired to L2, respectively
L3 phase IED and then shared to the other two phases via LDCM communication.
REB 670
Application manual
323
Section 6
Typical LDCM communication delay between two IEDs is in order of 30-40 ms. It
shall be noted that for disconnector status this delay will not pose any practical
problems. However, time delay caused by LDCM communication can be crucial for
circuit breakers status. In such cases it is strongly recommended that at least the circuit
breaker closing command from every circuit breaker is directly wired to all three
phases/IEDs in order to minimize any risk for unwanted operation of the busbar
differential protection zones due to late inclusion of respective bay current into the
differential measuring circuit.
6.1.2
Setting guidelines
ChannelMode: This parameter can be set On or Off. Besides this, it can be set
OutOfService which signifies that the local LDCM is out of service. Thus, with this
setting, the communication channel is active and a message is sent to the remote IED
that the local IED has its communication out of service.
TerminalNo: This setting assigns a number to the local IED. Up to 256 IEDs can be
assigned unique numbers. For a line differential protection, maximum 6 IEDs can be
included. The possibility to use the large number of IED designations is reserved for
the case where a high security against incorrect addressing in multiplexed systems is
desired.
RemoteTermNo: This setting assigns a number to the remote IED.
DiffSync: Here the method of time synchronization, PingPong or GPS, for the line
differential function is selected.
GPSSyncErr: If GPS synchronization is lost, the synchronization of the line
differential function will continue during 16 s. based on the stability in the local IED
clocks. Thereafter the setting Block will block the line differential function or the
setting PingPong will make it continue by using the PingPong synchronization
method. It shall be noticed that using PingPong in this situation is only safe as long
as there is no risk of varying transmission asymmetry.
CommSync: This setting decides the Master/Slave relation in the communication
system and shall not be mistaken for the synchronization of line differential current
samples. When direct fibre is used, one LDCM is set as Master and the other one as
Slave. When a modem and multiplexer is used, the IED is always set as Slave, as the
telecommunication system will provide the clock master.
OptoPower: The setting LowPower is used for fibres 0 1 km and HighPower for
fibres >1 km.
TransmCurr: This setting decides which of 2 possible local currents that shall be
transmitted, or if and how the sum of 2 local currents shall be transmitted, or finally
if the channel shall be used as a redundant channel.
In a 1 breaker arrangement, there will be 2 local currents, and the earthing on the
CTs can be different for these. CT-SUM will transmit the sum of the 2 CT groups.
324
Application manual
REB 670
Section 6
CT-DIFF1 will transmit CT group 1 minus CT group 2 and CT-DIFF2 will transmit
CT group 2 minus CT group 1.
CT-GRP1 or CT-GRP2 will transmit the respective CT group, and the setting
RedundantChannel makes the channel be used as a backup channel.
ComFailAlrmDel: Time delay of communication failure alarm. In communication
systems, route switching can sometimes cause interruptions with a duration up to 50
ms. Thus, a too short time delay setting might cause nuisance alarms in these
situations.
ComFailResDel: Time delay of communication failure alarm reset.
RedChSwTime: Time delay before switchover to a redundant channel in case of
primary channel failure.
RedChRturnTime: Time delay before switchback to a the primary channel after
channel failure.
AsymDelay: The asymmetry is defined as transmission delay minus receive delay. If
a fixed asymmetry is known, the PingPong synchronization method can be used if
the parameter AsymDelay is properly set. From the definition follows that the
asymmetry will always be positive in one end, and negative in the other end.
MaxTransmDelay: Data for maximum 40 ms transmission delay can be buffered up.
Delay times in the range of some ms are common. It shall be noticed that if data arrive
in the wrong order, the oldest data will just be disregarded.
CompRange: The set value is the current peak value over which truncation will be
made. To set this value, knowledge of the fault current levels should be known. The
setting is not overly critical as it considers very high current values for which correct
operation normally still can be achieved.
6.1.3
Setting parameters
Table 132:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ChannelMode
Off
On
OutOfService
On
Channel mode of
LDCM, 0=OFF,
1=ON,
2=OutOfService
TerminalNo
0 - 255
Terminal number
used for line
differential
communication
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
Terminal number on
remote terminal
DiffSync
Echo
GPS
Echo
Diff Synchronization
mode of LDCM,
0=ECHO, 1=GPS
REB 670
Application manual
325
Section 6
Parameter
326
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
GPSSyncErr
Block
Echo
Block
Operation mode
when GPS
synchroniation signal
is lost
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave
Com Synchronization
mode of LDCM,
0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
Transmission power
for LDCM, 0=Low,
1=High
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
CT-GRP1
Summation mode for

transmitted current
values
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
100
ms
Time delay before

communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
100
ms
Reset delay before

communication error
signal is reset
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
Time delay before

switching in
redundant channel
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
100
ms
Time delay before

switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
ms
Asymmetric delay
when communication
use echo synch.
MaxTransmDelay
0 - 40
20
ms
Max allowed
transmission delay
CompRange
0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
0-25kA
Compression range
MaxtDiffLevel
200 - 2000
600
us
Maximum time diff for

ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff
200 - 1000
300
us
Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21
Off
On
Off
Invert polarization for

X21 communication
Application manual
REB 670
Section 6
Table 133:
Parameter
Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ChannelMode
Off
On
OutOfService
On
Channel mode of
LDCM, 0=OFF,
1=ON,
2=OutOfService
TerminalNo
0 - 255
Terminal number
used for line
differential
communication
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
Terminal number on
remote terminal
DiffSync
Echo
GPS
Echo
Diff Synchronization
mode of LDCM,
0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr
Block
Echo
Block
Operation mode
when GPS
synchroniation signal
is lost
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave
Com Synchronization
mode of LDCM,
0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
Transmission power
for LDCM, 0=Low,
1=High
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChann
el
CT-GRP1
Summation mode for

transmitted current
values
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
100
ms
Time delay before

communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
100
ms
Reset delay before

communication error
signal is reset
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
Time delay before

switching in
redundant channel
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
100
ms
Time delay before

switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
ms
Asymmetric delay
when communication
use echo synch.
MaxTransmDelay
0 - 40
20
ms
Max allowed
transmission delay
CompRange
0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
0-25kA
Compression range
REB 670
Application manual
327
Section 6
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
200 - 2000
600
us
Maximum time diff for

ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff
200 - 1000
300
us
Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21
Off
On
Off

X21 communication
Table 134:
Parameter
328
Range
MaxtDiffLevel
Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function

Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ChannelMode
Off
On
OutOfService
On
Channel mode of
LDCM, 0=OFF,
1=ON,
2=OutOfService
TerminalNo
0 - 255
Terminal number
used for line
differential
communication
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
Terminal number on
remote terminal
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave
Com Synchronization
mode of LDCM,
0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
Transmission power
for LDCM, 0=Low,
1=High
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
10
ms
Time delay before

communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
10
ms
Reset delay before

communication error
signal is reset
InvertPolX21
Off
On
Off

X21 communication
Application manual
REB 670
Section 7
Configuration
Section 7
Configuration
About this chapter
This chapter describes the IED configurations.
7.1
Introduction
7.2
Description of configuration REB 670
7.2.1
Description of 3 ph variant A20

Three-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection zones
and four three-phase CT inputs (A20). This version is available in 1/2 of 19 case.
The version is intended for simpler applications such as T-connections, meshed
corners, etc.
7.2.2
Description of 3 ph variant A31

Three-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection zones
and eight three-phase CT inputs (A31). This version is available in full 19 case. The
version is intended for applications on smaller busbars, with up to two zones and eight
CT inputs.
7.2.3
Description of 1 ph variants B20 and B21

One-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection zones
and twelve CT inputs (B20, B21).
REB 670
This version is available in either 1/2 of 19 (B20) or full 19 (B21) case.

Due to three available binary input modules, the IED in 1/2 of 19 case (B20) is
intended for applications without need for dynamic Zone Selection such as
substations with single busbar with or without bus-section breaker, one-and-half
breaker or double breaker arrangements. Three such IEDs offer cost effective
solutions for such simple substation arrangements with up to twelve CT inputs.
The IED in full 19 case (B21) is intended for applications in substations where
dynamic Zone Selection or bigger number of binary inputs and outputs is needed.
Such stations for example are double busbar station with or without transfer bus
with up to 12 CT inputs.
Application manual
329
Section 7
Configuration
7.2.4
This version can be optionally used with external auxiliary summation current
transformers.
Description of 1 ph variant B31

One-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection zones
and twenty-four CT inputs (B31).
7.2.5
This version is available in full 19 case. The IED is intended for busbar
protection applications in big substations where dynamic Zone Selection, quite
large number of binary inputs and outputs and many CT inputs are needed. The
IED includes two differential zones and twenty-four CT inputs.
This version can be optionally used with external auxiliary summation current
transformers.
Available configurations for pre-configured REB 670

Three configurations have been made available for pre-configured REB 670 IED. It
shall be noted that all three configurations include the following features:
7.2.6
Configuration #1 Called X01
330
fully configured for the total available number of bays in each REB 670 variant
facility to take any bay out of service via built-in HMI or externally via binary
input
facility to block any of the two zones via built-in HMI or externally via binary
input
facility to block all bay trips via built-in HMI or externally via binary input, but
leaving all other function in service (i.e. BBP Zones, BFP and OCP where
applicable)
facility to externaly initiate built-in disturbance recorder
facility to connect external breaker failure backup trip signal from every bay
facility to connect external bay trip signal
This configuration includes just busbar protection for simple stations layouts (i.e.
One-and-a-half breaker, Double Breaker or Single Breaker stations). Additionaly
it can be used for double busbar-single breaker stations where disconnector
replica is done by using just b auxiliary contact from every disconnector and/or
circuit breakers. As a consequence no disconnector/breaker supervision will be
avavaible. It is as well possible to adapt this configuration by SMT to be used as
direct replacement of RED 521*1.0 terminals. This configuration is avaiable for
all five REB 670 variants (i.e. A20, A31, B20, B21 & B31). It shall be noted that
optional functions breaker failure protection RBRF, end fault protection and
overcurrent protection POCM can be ordered together with this configuration,
Application manual
REB 670
Section 7
Configuration
but they will not be pre-configured! Thus these optional functions shall be
configured by the end user.
7.2.7
7.2.8
REB 670
This configuration includes just busbar protection for double busbar-single

breaker stations, where Zone Selection is done by using a and b auxiliary contacts
from every disconnector and/or circuit breaker. Thus full disconnector/breaker
supervision is avaiable. This configuration is avaiable for only three REB 670
variants (i.e. A31, B21 and B31). It shall be noted that optional functions breaker
failure protection RBRF, end fault protection and overcurrent protection POCM
can be ordered together with this configuration, but they will not be preconfigured! Thus these optional functions shall be configured by the end user.
This configuration includes BBP with breaker failure protection RBRF, end fault
protection and overcurrent protection POCM for double busbar-single breaker
stations, where Zone Selection is done by using a and b auxiliary contacts from
every disconnectors and/or circuit breakers. Thus full disconnector/breaker
supervision is avaiable. This configuration is avaiable for only three REB 670
variants (i.e. A31, B21 and B31).
Application manual
331
332
Section 8
Glossary
Section 8
Glossary
About this chapter
This chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB
technical documentation.
8.1
REB 670
Glossary
AC
Alternating current
A/D converter
Analog to digital converter
ADBS
Amplitude dead -band supervision
ADM
Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
AR
Autoreclosing
ArgNegRes
Setting parameter/ZD/
ArgDir
Setting parameter/ZD/
ASCT
Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD
Adaptive signal detection
AWG
American Wire Gauge standard
BBP
Busbar protection
BFP
Breaker failure protection
BIM
Binary input module
BOM
Binary output module
BR
External bi-stable relay
BS
British standard
BSR
Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST
Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94
IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals

between IEDs
CAN
Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial

communication
CAP 531
Configuration and programming tool
Application manual
333
Section 8
Glossary
334
CB
Circuit breaker
CBM
Combined backplane module
CCITT
Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and

Telephony. A United Nations sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM
CAN carrier module
CCVT
Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C
Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS
Combined mega pulses per second
CO cycle
Close-open cycle
Co-directional
Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two

twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both
directions
COMTRADE
Standard format according to IEC 60255-24
Contra-directional
Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four

twisted pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in both
directions, and two pairs for transmitting clock signals
CPU
Central processor unit
CR
Carrier receive
CRC
Cyclic redundancy check
CS
Carrier send
CT
Current transformer
CVT
Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR
Delayed auto-reclosing
DARPA
Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US

developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL
Dead bus dead line
DBLL
Dead bus live line
DC
Direct current
DFT
Discrete Fourier transform
DIP-switch
Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DLLB
Dead line live bus
DNP
Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std.

1379-2000
DR
Disturbance recorder
DRAM
Dynamic random access memory
DRH
Disturbance report handler
Application manual
REB 670
Section 8
Glossary
REB 670
DSP
Digital signal processor
DTT
Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network
Extra high voltage network
EIA
Electronic Industries Association
EMC
Electro magnetic compatibility
EMF
Electro motive force
EMI
Electro magnetic interference
EnFP
End fault protection
ESD
Electrostatic discharge
FOX 20
Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,

data and protection signals
FOX 512/515
Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus
Compact, time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up

to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
G.703
Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by

local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced
and unbalanced lines
GCM
Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver

module
GI
General interrogation command
GIS
Gas insulated switchgear
GOOSE
Generic object oriented substation event
GPS
Global positioning system
GSM
GPS time synchronization module
HDLC protocol
High level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC

standard
HFBR connector
type
Plastic fiber connector
HMI
Human machine interface
HSAR
High speed auto reclosing
HV
High voltage
HVDC
High voltage direct current
IDBS
Integrating dead band supervision
IEC
International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6
IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6: Requirements

for protective current transformers for transient performance
Application manual
335
Section 8
Glossary
336
IEC 60870-5-103
Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial

master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850
Substation Automation communication standard
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12
A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on

twisted-pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1
PCI Mezzanine card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.

References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common
mezzanine card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI
specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for
the electrical EMF Electro Motive Force.
IED
Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS
Intelligent gas insulated switchgear
IOM
Binary input/output module
Instance
When several occurrences of the same function are available

in the IED they are referred to as instances of that function.
One instance of a function is identical to another of the same
kind but will have a different number in the IED user
interfaces. The word instance is sometimes defined as an item
of information that is representative of a type. In the same way
an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type
of function.
IP
1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol

suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless,
best-effort packet switching protocol. It provides packet
routing, fragmentation and re-assembly through the data link
layer.
2. Ingression protection according to IEC standard
IP 20
Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20
IP 40
IP 54
IRF
Internal fail signal
IRIG-B:
InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,

standard 200
ITU
International Telecommunications Union
LAN
Local area network
LIB 520
High voltage software module
LCD
Liquid crystal display
LDCM
Line differential communication module
LDD
Local detection device
Application manual
REB 670
Section 8
Glossary
REB 670
LED
Light emitting diode
LNT
LON network tool
LON
Local operating network
MCB
Miniature circuit breaker
MCM
Mezzanine carrier module
MIM
Milli-ampere module
MPM
Main processing module
MVB
Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally

developed for use in trains.
NCC
National Control Centre
NUM
Numerical module
OCO cycle
Open-close-open cycle
OCP
Overcurrent protection
OEM
Optical ethernet module
OLTC
On load tap changer
OV
Over voltage
Overreach
A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault

condition. For example a distance relay is over-reaching when
the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set
reach. The relay sees the fault but perhaps it should not have
seen it.
PCI
Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM
Pulse code modulation
PCM 600
Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP
Mezzanine card standard
PISA
Process interface for sensors & actuators
PMC
PCI Mezzanine card
POTT
Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus
Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity
to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM
Power supply module
PST
Parameter setting tool
PT ratio
Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT
Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC
Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
Application manual
337
Section 8
Glossary
338
RCA
Relay characteristic angle
REVAL
Evaluation software
RFPP
Resistance for phase-to-phase faults
RFPE
Resistance for phase-to-earth faults
RISC
Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value
Root mean square value
RS422
A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data

in point-to-point connections
RS485
Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC
Real time clock
RTU
Remote terminal unit
SA
Substation Automation
SC
Switch or push-button to close
SCS
Station control system
SCT
System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SLM
Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC

communication.
SMA connector
Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant

impedance.
SMS
Station monitoring system
SNTP
Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize

computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every
embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the
required accuracy.
SPA
Strmberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slave

protocol for point-to-point communication
SRY
Switch for CB ready condition
ST
Switch or push-button to trip
Starpoint
Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC
Static VAr compensation
TC
Trip coil
TCS
Trip circuit supervision
TCP
Transmission control protocol. The most common transport

layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP
Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de

facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD
Application manual
REB 670
Section 8
Glossary
Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for internet working

and encompasses both network layer and transport layer
protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific
protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US
Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these,
including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
REB 670
TEF
Time delayed earth-fault protection function
TNC connector
Threaded Neill Concelman, A threaded constant impedance

version of a BNC connector
TPZ, TPY, TPX,

TPS
Current transformer class according to IEC
Underreach
A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault

condition. For example a distance relay is under-reaching
when the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set
reach. The relay does not see the fault but perhaps it should
have seen it. See also Overreach.
U/I-PISA
Process interface components that deliver measured voltage

and current values
UTC
Coordinated universal time. A coordinated time scale,

maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures
(BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination
of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from
International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole
number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal
Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth"s
orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing
the Earth"s irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The
Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour
clock and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane
and ship navigation, where it also sometimes known by the
military name, "Zulu time". "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet
stands for "Z" which stands for longitude zero.
UV
Undervoltage
WEI
Weak end infeed logic
VT
Voltage transformer
X.21
A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom

equipment
3IO
Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the

residual or the earth-fault current
3UO
Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the

residual voltage or the neutral point voltage
Application manual
339
340

Am Reb670

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Am Reb670

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Application manual

Busbar protection IED

Document ID: 1MRK505181-UEN

Copyright 2007 ABB. All rights reserved

Engineering of the IED...................................................13

Different busbar arrangements.............................................126

Configurable logic blocks (LLD).................................................224

Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT).......................318

Introduction to the application manual

About the complete set of manuals for an IED

The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelines

About the application manual

1MRK 505 179-UEN

Installation and commissioning manual

1MRK 505 180-UEN

Technical reference manual

1MRK 505 178-UEN

1MRK 505 181-UEN

1MRK 505 182-BEN

Connection and Installation components

1MRK 013 003-BEN

Test system, COMBITEST

1MRK 512 001-BEN

Accessories for IED 670

1MRK 514 012-BEN

Getting started guide IED 670

1MRK 500 080-UEN

1MRK 500 083-WEN

1MRK 500 084-WEN

Generic IEC 61850 IED Connectivity package

Protection and Control IED Manager PCM 600 Installation sheet

Engineering guide IED 670 products

1MRK 511 179-UEN

Latest versions of the described documentation can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation

Engineering of the IED

Application Configuration tool

The interface between Signal matrix and Configuration tool

The Function selector options allows definition of the specific

Analog pre-processing function block SMAI

Virtual IO blocks SMBI and SMBO configured in an application

The configurable LEDs.

The analog preprocessing function block (SMAI).

The analog preprocessing block.

Single breaker arrangement. Three phase tripping arrangement.

Single breaker arrangement. Three phase tripping arrangement.

Single breaker arrangement. Single phase tripping arrangement.

Multi breaker arrangement. Three phase tripping arrangement.

Multi breaker arrangement. Single phase tripping arrangement.

Adapting a configuration to satisfy special

Signal Matrix Tool (SMT)

Application configuration tool CAP 531

A typical view from the application configuration tool showing an

Preparing a specific application configuration of

Configuring an IED with CAP531

Open view for PCM 600

Adding a new function block

Using the Signal monitoring tool (SMT)

Using the Event viewer tool

Setting of the IED

A typical view from the PCM 600 setting tool

A special function block is included for block of setting changes,

There are two types of points of access to the IED 670:

local, through the local HMI